GSK-928TEa Eng PDF
GSK-928TEa Eng PDF
GSK-928TEa Eng PDF
This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
All rights are reserved. It is against the law for any organization or individual
to publish or reprint this manual without the express written permission of
GSK and the latter reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability.
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Foreword
Dear user,
The manual describes the relative content and notes of the system.
Warning
This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel as improper
operations may cause accidents. Please carefully read this user manual before use!
Note: The power supply of the system installed in the cabinet is exclusive to GSK’ CNC
systems.
Must not take the power supply as other uses, otherwise, there maybe cause
great accidence!
We are full of heartfelt gratitude to you for supporting us in the use of GSK’s products.
II
Suggestions for safety
The user must carefully read the suggestions for the system before installing and operating the
system.
The user must follow the suggestions of the system to ensure that the person is not hurt and the
equipments are not damaged.
The user must follow the related suggestions for safety described in the user manual, and must not
operate it until the manual is read completely.
The user must follow the suggestions of safety described in the user manual from the machine
manufacture.
The user can operate the machine or compile the program to control the machine after completely
reading the manual and the one from the machine manufacturer.
III
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ. Graphic symbol
Caution Operation against the instructions may cause the operator serious
injuries.
Alarm Wrong operation may injure the operator and damage the system.
Warning Improper operation may result in damage to the machine, as well its
products.
Important information.
IV
Suggestions for safety
Ⅱ. Notes
1)Check before acceptance
Warning ●Moistureproof measures are needed while the system is delivered and stored.
Never climb the packing box, neither stand on it, nor place heavy items on it. Do
not put over five packing boxes in piles. Take particular care of the front panel
and the display of the system.
3)Installation
Warning ●Protect the system from sunlight and raindrops. The shell of the system is not
waterproof.
Warning ●Prevent dust, corrosive air, liquid, conductors and inflammable substances
from entering the system.
●Keep the system away from inflammable and explosive substances. Avoid
places where there is powerful electromagnetic interference.
●Install the system firmly without vibration.
4)Wiring
Caution ●Only qualified persons can connect the system or check the connection. The
connecting wires cannot be damaged. Do not press or open the cover of the
system with power on.
Caution ●The voltage and the polarity of connecting plugs must accord with the user
manual.
●Wet hands are dangerous to grasp the plug or the switch.
V
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
5)Debugging
Warning ●Make sure that the parameters of the system is correct before the system runs.
●No parameter is beyond the setting limit in the manual.
6)Operation
Warning ●The operator can not leave the system to work alone.
●Do not switch on the system until making sure the connection is correct.
●The emergency stop button is able to disconnect all power supplies when the
system breaks down. Do not switch on/off the system frequently
7)Troubleshooting
Warning ●After alarms, do not restart the system until the breakdown is fixed.
VI
Suggestions for safety
CNC and the operator panels. It is hard to explain all the integrated functions,
programming and operation. Do not use integrated instructions not included in the manual
VII
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
1)Test the machine without workpieces or tools. Make sure that the machine runs well before
it starts to work.
2)Check the input data of the system carefully before operating the machine. Incorrect input
data may cause the machine to work improperly, so as to damage the workpiece and the
3)Make sure that the input feedrate of the system is suitable for the expected operation.
Feedrate has a maximum for each machine, and the amount of the feed rate is subject to
change with operation. Choose the maximum according to the instructions of the machine.
Improper feedrate leads the machine to work wrongly, so as to damage the workpiece and
4)When offset is needed, check the direction and the amount of the compensation. Improper
compensation causes the machine to work wrongly, so as to damage the workpiece and
5)If the machine is to run in JOG working mode, check the current position of the tool and the
workpiece, and correctly specify the moving axis, moving direction and the feedrate.
MPG(Handwheel) control with great override, such as 100, may damage the machine and
6)If the tool is return to the reference point, make sure that the machine has been equipped
with the device to detect the reference point, otherwise, the tool can not reach the
reference point, which may damage the machine and its tool, and even injure the operator.
VIII
Suggestions for safety
Safety Responsibility
——The manufacturer should be responsible for danger from clearing out or controlling
design and/or structure of the CNC system and its supplied accessories.
——The manufacture should be responsible for safety of the CNC system and its
supplied accessories.
——The manufacture should provide the user for use information and suggestion.
IX
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
X
Contents
CONTENTS
OPERATION ·································································································································1
CHAPTER ONE OVERVIEW ··························································································································· 1
CHAPTER TWO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ····························································································· 3
2.1 Technical specifications····················································································································· 3
2.2 Functional difference between 928TEa and 928TCa turning CNC system·································· 4
CHAPTER THREE OPERATION PANEL ·········································································································· 6
3.1 LCD Display······································································································································· 6
3.2 LED Status Indicator ························································································································ 6
3.3 Keyboard············································································································································ 6
3.3.1 Character keys···························································································································· 6
3.3.2 Working mode selection key ······································································································ 7
3.3.3 Function keys ······························································································································ 7
3.3.4 Cycle start and cycle pause (feed hold)key··············································································· 8
3.3.5 Manual axis control key············································································································· 8
3.3.6 Manual auxiliary function key ·································································································· 9
3.3.7 Edit keys ···································································································································· 10
CHAPTER FOUR SYSTEM OPERATION ········································································································11
4.1 System ON/OFF, Initial State, Modal, and Safe Protection··························································11
4.1.1 Power on·····································································································································11
4.1.2 Power off ····································································································································11
4.1.3 System, program initial and modal························································································· 12
4.1.3.1 Initial and modal ··············································································································· 12
4.1.3.2 Initial mode and modal of program················································································· 12
4.1.4 Safe protection ·························································································································· 13
4.1.4.1 Hardware limit protection ································································································ 13
4.1.4.2 Software limit safe protection··························································································· 14
4.1.4.3 Emergency stop alarm(emergently stopping the system) ·············································· 15
4.1.4.4 Drive unit alarm ················································································································ 16
4.1.4.5 Other alarms ······················································································································ 16
4.1.4.6 Switching off power supply······························································································· 16
4.1.4.7 Reset operation ·················································································································· 17
4.2 CNC Working Mode Selection ······································································································· 17
4.3 EDIT Working Mode ······················································································································ 17
4.3.1 Part program catalog search ··································································································· 18
4.3.2 Selecting, creating, deleting, renaming and copying a part program ·································· 19
4.3.2.1 Selecting and creating a part program ············································································ 19
4.3.2.2 Delete a part program ······································································································· 20
4.3.2.3 Deleting all part programs································································································ 20
4.3.2.4 Renaming a part program ································································································ 21
4.3.2.5 Copying a part program ··································································································· 21
4.3.3 Part program communication ································································································· 21
4.3.3.1 Sending part programs(CNC→PC, CNC→USB, CNC→CNC) ······························ 22
4.3.3.2 Receiving part programs(PC→CNC, USB→CNC, CNC→CNC) ··························· 22
4.3.3.3 TXT part program standard format in PC····································································· 23
4.3.4 Part program content input and edit······················································································ 24
4.3.4.1 Inputting program content ······························································································· 27
4.3.4.2 Inserting program line ······································································································ 27
4.3.4.3 Deleting a block ················································································································· 28
4.3.4.4 Inserting a character in a block························································································ 28
4.3.4.5 Deleting a character in a block························································································· 28
4.3.4.6 Modifying a block content ································································································ 28
4.3.4.7 Inserting a macro character string ·················································································· 29
4.3.4.8 Program stored space········································································································ 29
4.3.4.9 No. 253 program operation······························································································· 29
4.3.4.10 No. 254 program operation····························································································· 30
4.3.5 hp5 function ······························································································································ 30
XI
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
CONNECTION ·························································································································305
CHAPTER ONE INTERFACE ······················································································································· 305
1.1 Rear Cover Interface Position Layout························································································· 305
1.2 Total Frame···································································································································· 306
CHAPTER TWO INTERFACE GRAPH ········································································································· 307
CHAPTER THREE CNC DEVICE CONNECTION························································································ 309
3.1 Front Cover Communication Interface······················································································· 309
3.1.1 USB interface ·························································································································· 309
3.1.2 Serial RS232 technical specifications···················································································· 309
3.1.3 Serial RS232 signal definition ······························································································· 310
3.1.4 Connecting with external PC by RS232 ··············································································· 310
3.1.5 Connecting with another CNC system by RS232 communication interface
(communication connections between GSK928TEa) ······································································ 310
3.2 X1,X2 Interface·······························································································································311
3.2.1 X1 interface signal definition··································································································311
3.2.2 X2 interface signal definition································································································· 313
3.2.4 Connection method of output signal ····················································································· 316
3.2.5 Input/output signal technical specification ·········································································· 317
3.3 Machine Zero Return Function and Connection········································································ 317
3.4 Tool Exchange Control Function and Connection······································································ 319
3.4.1 Tool exchange control signal definition ················································································ 319
3.4.2 Signal connection···················································································································· 320
3.4.3 Function description··············································································································· 320
3.4.3.1 Tool change mode 0 ········································································································· 320
3.4.3.2 Tool change mode 1 ········································································································· 320
3.4.3.3 Tool change mode 2 ········································································································· 321
3.4.3.4 Tool change mode 3 ········································································································· 322
3.4.3.5 Tool change mode 4 ········································································································· 323
3.4.3.6 Tool change 9···················································································································· 324
3.4.4 Tool signal check and parameter setting ·············································································· 326
3.4.4.1 Default mode (P408_d7=0) ····························································································· 326
3.4.4.2 Table look-up mode (P408_d7=1)················································································ 327
3.5 X3 Motor Interface························································································································ 328
3.5.1 Signal definition······················································································································ 328
3.5.2 Technical specifications·········································································································· 328
3.5.3 Equivalent circuit ··················································································································· 328
3.5.3.1 Drive unit alarm signal XALM, ZALM, YALM························································ 328
3.5.3.2 Enabling signal XEN,ZEN····························································································· 329
3.5.3.3 Pulse signal and direction signal ···················································································· 329
3.5.4 Connection between CNC system and drive unit of compound stepper motor ················ 330
XVII
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
3.5.5 Connecting between CNC and drive unit of reaction stepper motor ································· 332
3.5.6 Connection layout between CNC and AC servo drive unit ················································· 334
3.5.7 Connection layout between CNC and Panasonic drive unit ··············································· 336
3.5.8 Connection layout between CNC system and Japanese Yaskawa drive unit····················· 337
3.6 X4 Spindle Interface ······················································································································ 338
3.6.1 Signal definitions····················································································································· 338
3.6.2 Converter technical specification ·························································································· 338
3.6.3 Encoder technical specifications···························································································· 338
3.6.4 Connection layout of converter analog voltage ···································································· 339
3.6.5 Encoder interface method ······································································································ 339
3.6.6 Encode interface connection layout······················································································· 339
3.6.7 Connection between CNC system Y and AC servo drive unit ············································ 340
3.6.8 Connection between CNC system Y and DAP03 spindle drive unit··································· 341
3.7 X5 MPG Interface·························································································································· 342
3.7.1 Signal definition ······················································································································ 342
3.7.2 Interface method····················································································································· 342
3.7.3 Connection layout ··················································································································· 342
CHAPTER 4 USER USE AND MAINTENANCE ····························································································· 343
4.1 Environmental Condition·············································································································· 343
4.2 Earthing·········································································································································· 343
4.3 Power Supply Requirements········································································································· 343
4.4 Guard·············································································································································· 343
4.5 Use after Long-Time Unuse ·········································································································· 343
APPENDIX ····················································································································································· 344
APPENDIX 1 CNC SYSTEM ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SYMBOL EXPLANATIONS···································· 344
APPENDIX 2 CNC SYSTEM TOOL POST CONTROLLER CIRCUIT METHOD LAYOUT ································· 345
APPENDIX 3 INTERFACE CIRCUIT METHOD LAYOUT ··············································································· 346
APPENDIX 4 EXTERNAL CONTROL CONNECTION LAYOUT ······································································ 349
APPENDIX 5 CNC SYSTEM APPEARANCE INSTALLATION DIMENSION····················································· 350
XVIII
Operation Chapter One Overview
Operation
Chapter One Overview
With 480×234 lattice TFT color graphic LCD, GSK 928TEa CNC system takes as key control the
high-speed CPU and the complex programmable logic device of super-large-scale integrated
circuit CPLD. ISO CNC code is used to write part programs. The system is characterized by a full
screen editing, Chinese operation interface, real time demonstration of the machining process,
simple operation. the system can be matched with stepper motors or AC servo drive unit to
machine outer cylinders, end faces, grooves, tapers, circular arcs and threads with high
cost-performance.
Technical Specifications:
9 X, Z link to realize the short linear high-speed smooth interpolation, 0.001mm
interpolation precision, max. rapid traverse speed 30m/min
9 Optional to Y(set by the parameter), Y not only realizes the rapid traverse,
feed(JOG/STEP/MPG feed) motion, alone tapping motion, but also sets the coordinate
system, program zero return, manual machine zero return and other operations
9 Control servo spindle
9 Flexible and convenient programming with statement programming function
9 USB interface communication to get the convenient and fast operation
9 Least command unit 0.001mm, command electronic gear ratio (1~99999)(
/ 1~99999)
9 Control all kinds of automatic tool post, spindle automatic shifting gear
9 Pitch error compensation, backlash compensation, tool length compensation, tool
radius C compensation function
9 Exponential acceleration/deceleration control used to high-speed, high precise
machining
9 Automatic chamfering function
9 Tapping function
9 Course monitoring function
9 Cutting metric/inch thread, end face thread, variable pitch thread, continuous thread;
thread high-speed run-out
9 Full editing part programs, storing 255 machining programs; No. 253 program up to
4MB
9 Big screen color LCD, color configuration is selected by the parameter
9 MSTE state real-time display in machining
9 Multi-level operation password to conveniently manage devices
9 Parameter backup function
9 Parameter, offset data communication function
9 Bilateral communication between CNC and CNC, between CNC and PC, serial upgrade
CNC software
1
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
2
Operation Chapter Two Technical Specifications
32 commands:G00, G01, G02, G03, G04, G05, G26, G28, G30, G31, G32, G33, G34, G40, G41, G42,
G command
G50, G51, G71, G72, G73, G74, G75, G76, G90, G92, G94, G96, G97, G98, G99
Tapping: metric/inch single/multiple straight thread, taper thread, end face thread; variable pitch thread;
Thread thread run out length, angle and speed can be set, executing the high-speed thread run-out; pitch:
machining 0.001mm~500mm or 0.06tooth/inch~25400tooth/inch; tapping function
Spindle encoder: lines can be set (100p/r~5000p/r); Drive ratio between encoder and spindle is 1:1
Backlash compensation: 0 mm~10.000mm
Pitch error compensation: 300 compensation points for each axis; use constant distance or inflection
point to create data; the system executes the delicate linear compensation
Precision
Offset: 16 tool selections, 64 groups tool length compensation and tool nose radius compensation (offset
compensation
C)
Toolsetting method: fixed-point, trial cutting
Offset executing method: traversing tool or modifying coordinate offset
M00, M02, M20, M30, M03, M04, M05, M08, M09, M10, M11, M12, M32, M33, M41, M42, M43, M44,
M command M47, M48, M78, M79, M80, M96, M97, M98, M99, M91, M92, M93, M94, M21, M22, M23, M24;M
commands are defined by operator: M60~M74 realize the special function control
Up to 16 tools (T01□□~T16□□),setting tool post type, parameters to select too change course
T command
Tool post type is set to 0 when the line-up tool is used
Speed switching value control: S 4-gear directly controlling output range is S01~S04; or 16-gear BCD
output range is S00~S15
Spindle speed Speed analog voltage control: S specifies the spindle speed per minute or the cutting surface speed
control (constant surface speed) , outputs 0~10V voltage to spindle converter, supports 4-gear spindle speed
M41~M44 with stepless shifting gear
Support DAP03 servo spindle speed/position control mode switch, realize spindle, Z or X link function
I/O I/O function diagnosis display
function I/O interface:23 input/18 output interfaces
Statement Assignment statement: complete assignment, many arithmetic and logic operations
programming Conditional statement: complete conditional judgement and skip
Display: 480×234 lattice, color LCD,LED or CCFL light in poor
Display window Display method: Chinese or English window set by a parameter, displaying machining path of workpiece
in real-time
Program capacity: max. 255 programs, No. 0~252, 254 with 800KB, No.253 with 4MB(FLASH)
Program edit Edit method: edit in full screen, relative/absolute coordinate and compound program call, subprogram
multi-level embedding
Program drawing check
USB, RS232 interface;bidirectionally transmitting programs, parameters and offset between CNC and
Communication USB, CNC and PC, CNC and CNC
Supporting software RS232, USB to download and upgrade
Optional drive
DA98 Series Digital AC Servo or DY3 Series Stepper Drive unit with pulse + direction signal input
unit
3
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
2.2 Functional difference between 928TEa and 928TCa turning CNC system
The manual is applied to two types of system: 928TEa, 928TCa. Functions of 928TCa turning CNC
system are less than those of 928TEa as follows:
Functional
928TEa 928TCa Remark
difference item
Controllable axis X, Y, Z X, Z
Rapid traverse
Max. 30000 mm /min Max. 15000 mm /min
speed
Cutting speed (0.001~15000)mm/min (0.001~4000)mm/min
4
Operation Chapter Two Technical Specifications
5
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The turning CNC system(system or CNC) uses the aluminum alloy three-D operation panel and its
appearance is as follows:
LCD display: CNC man-machine dialogue interface. Resolution 480×234 lattice TFT color LCD
display.
LED indicates that the current working state of the system. There are 16 function keys with LED
indicators, the function executed by the corresponding key is valid when LED is ON, and it is invalid
when LED is OFF.
3.3 Keyboard
Based on GB/T 3168-1993 Numerical Control of Machine-Symbol, the system sets the following
symbol function keys which complete the corresponding functions when they are pressed as follows:
Character keys include all required valid digit, letter, mathematic symbol and logic symbol.
In EDIT working mode, each letter key can switch into 2 or 3 letter keys; in other working mode, each
6
Operation Chapter Three System Operation Panel
letter key only expresses one letter key. (For example, I and I are on one key, the operator directly
press the key when “I” or “P” is required, and the system automatically indentifies other letters.)
Digit key: input all kind of data (0~9);
Letter key: input field, address, English letter;
Symbol key: +, -, *, /, minus sign, decimal and so on;
Logic key: >, =, <, and, or, ()and so on.
Marking with the symbols and characters, the working mode selection keys are pressed to
complete the corresponding function, and their definitions are as follows:
INCREASING RAPID OVERRIDE Increase rapid traverse override in JOG working mode
and G00 rapid traverse override in AUTO working mode.
REDUCING RAPID OVERRIDE: Reduce rapid traverse override in JOG working mode and
G00 rapid traverse override in AUTO working mode.
INCREASING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE: Increase feedrate override in JOG working mode and
G01 feedrate override in AUTO working mode.
REDUCING FEEDATE OVERRIDE: Reduce feedrate override in JOG working mode and
7
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
X MACHINE ZERO (MACHINE ZERO) RETURN : It is valid in JOG /AUTO working mode.
(machine zero is called machine reference point in the user manual.)
DRY RUN: In AUTO working mode, whether M, S, T are valid is determined by the
parameter (bit parameter P401_d7), each axis coordinates automatically recover to the
previous ones before the system enters the DRY RUN working mode.
SINGLE BLOCK: A single block runs in AUTO working mode. It is hp function in other
working modes.
Start and pause programs in AUTO working mode and each key symbol definition is as follows:
CYCLE START: Start to run programs in AUTO working mode; move coordinate axis in
JOG working mode.
CYCLE PAUSE (FEED HOLD ): pause the running in JOG or AUTO working mode; hp
function in other working modes.
【Note】
There is “hp(help) at top right on some keys, and there are 7 help keys hp0~hp6;hp is valid
when the main key is invalid in different working modes.
RAPID TRAVERSE/FEED Switching rapid traverse and feed in JOG working mode.
JOG STEP Selecting each step width or MPG feed in STEP/ MPG(Handwheel) working
mode; hp function in other working modes.
MPG(Handwheel) MPG control selection and axis selection in JOG working mode; hp
function in other working modes.
The following press keys are used to controlling and completing all miscellaneous function of the
machine and each key symbol definition is as follows:
Spindle gear shifting Select the speed of each gear when the machine is equipped
with multi-gear (up to 16 gears) spindle motor and control
loops.
Tool change Select the next tool number neighboring to the current one.
9
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
10
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
This chapter introduces operations and notes of the system. Please read carefully before operation.
4.1.1 Power on
There is not a power switch on the operation panel of the system. The operator installs it according to
the different machine to avoid bad effects to CNC system owing to the impaction of power supply.
Check before the system is turned on:
1) Ensure the machine state is normal;
2) Ensure the voltage meets the requirements;
3) Ensure the wiring is correct and firm.
The system is turned on as follows:
1) The master power switch of machine is turned on.
Switch on the power switch of the CNC system, and the system displays as Fig. 4-1. Press
any keys except for , and the system enters into EDIT working mode.
The initial mode of the system is defined to be a special initial state of all functions set by itself when
the system is turned on; all auxiliary functions do not execute the actual output.
The modal of the system is defined to be their kept states after the system executes all functions.
Initial mode and modal of the system:
System state Initial mode Modal
Machine coordinate system Keep last power-on state Keep till being changed
of the system
Tool nose coordinate system Keep last power-on state Keep till being changed
of the system
Cutting feedrate:F In Auto mode:30mm/min Keep till being changed
In JOG mode: Keep last power-on state
Conversion spindle speed:S Keep last power-on state Keep till being changed
Spindle gear Shifting gear spindle gear:S0 Keep till being changed
Conversion spindle gear:M41
MANUAL slow feed/rapid feed state Slow feed Keep till being changed
Feedrate override Keep last power-on state Keep till being changed
Rapid override Keep last power-on state Keep till being changed
Spindle state M05 spindle stop Keep till being changed
Cooling state M09 cooling OFF Keep till being changed
Chuck state M11 chuck release Keep till being changed
Lubricating state M33 lubricating OFF Keep till being changed
T number state Keep last power-on state Keep till being changed
Tailstock state M79 tailstock run-out state Keep till being changed
Set spindle speed/position mode M48 Keep till being changed
The initial mode is the automatic initialization setting state before the system executes the machining
program; i.e. the initial default state of the default programming word and speed word.
Program initialization state of the system:
G command:G00, G40, G97, G98;
Cutting speed:30mm/min;
Miscellaneous function: current state;
System coordinates: current coordinates are those of the last automatic executing
program or manual operation
12
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
G modal is always valid till it is changed by other modal commands in the same group after the
word is set. After the modal meaning is set, the G command may not be input again when the
same function is used in the later block.
There are four groups of G command with modal characteristics, and there is only one command
in the modal state:
Group 1:G00, G01, G02, G03, G05; (initial mode:G00 );
Group 2:G40, G41, G42; (initial mode:G40 );
Group 3:G96, G97; (initial mode:G97 );
Group 4:G98, G99; (initial mode:G98 F30 );
The command without modal characteristics has effect in the block and must be defined to use every
time.
【Note】
In AUTO working mode, the system automatically recovers to the program initial mode when it
executes the first command of workpiece program or executes the first block command after M20, or
selects the middle block as the first command.
The CNC system set a perfect protection measure to prevent the operator from danger and the
machine from being damaged.
The system can check the travel limit switch installed on the machined. When the machine slide
moves to press the travel limit switch, the system stops feeding instead of closing other
miscellaneous functions, and the program stops running and the system displays the hardware limit
alarm information of corresponding axis.
After the travel limit switch alarms, the system can select JOG working mode, the manual feed key
which is reverse to the limit direction is pressed, i.e. the system escapes the travel limit and the travel
limit switch alarm automatically disappears on the screen.
【Explanation】
1) X, Y, Z positive limit check shares one pin LT+, and their negative limit check shares one pin
LT-; when the positive limit alarms, all axes can not move positively but move negatively; and
vice versa.
2) When the travel limit switch runs across the limit block, the limit signal appears; the valid
length of limit block signal is more than 30mm or more to avoid rush out the valid area of the
signal.
3) When the parameter is set to “limit emergency stop” mode (bit parameter P402_d7=1), and
the system runs across the limit block, there may be great deviation between the coordinates
displayed by the system and the actual position.
13
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Relative parameters】
Bit parameters: P402_d7, P404_d6, P404_d1.
Bit parameter P402_d7 sets the hardware limit alarm mode;
Bit parameter P402_d6 sets whether the hardware limit alarm checks;
Bit parameter P402_d1 sets the hardware limit alarm level of each axis;
When P404_d1=1 is high level alarm, the positive limit switch +X, +Y, +Z of each axis are normally
closed contact, are connected to X/Z/Y positive limit input interface LT+(they are open and the system
alarms) in serial; the negative limit switch -X, -Y, -Z of each axis are normally closed contact, are
connected to X/Z/Y negative limit input interface LT+(it is off and the system alarms) in serial; it is
suggested that the operator should select in prior the hardware limit to the normally closed contact of
each axis as follows:
When P404_d1=0 is low level alarm, the positive limit switch +X, +Y, +Z of each axis are normally
open contact, are connected to X/Z/Y positive limit input interface LT-(they are closed and the system
alarms) in serial; the negative limit switch -X, -Y, -Z of each axis are normally open contact, are
connected to X/Z/Y negative limit input interface LT-(it is off and the system alarms) in serial; it is
suggested that the operator should select in prior the hardware limit to the normally closed contact of
each axis as follows:
【Explanation】
1) The coordinate axis decelerates to stop when the coordinates exceed the software limit range
during the motion.
【Relative parameters】
P009, P010: max. travel of Z positive, negative tool nose software limit; P011, P012: max. travel of X
positive, negative tool nose software limit;
P013, P014: max. travel of Y positive, negative too nose software limit; P015, P016: max. travel of Z
positive, negative mechanical software limit;
P009, P010: max. travel of Z positive, negative mechanical software limit; P009, P010: max. travel of
Y positive, negative mechanical software limit;
Bit parameter P404_d4, P404_d3 separately sets whether the mechanical, tool nose software limit
alarm are valid.
When there is the external emergency stop input terminal ESP in the system input interface, the
operator should connect the emergency stop button Normally closed contact on the machine panel
with the emergency stop input terminal. Press Emergency stop button and the system enters the
emergency stop state. The system stops all feed, the spindle, the cooling switching output is valid and
the system displays “Emergency stop alarm”.
After the emergency stop condition is released, the operator should rotate the emergency stop button
clockwise based on the up arrow, the button automatically releases to cancel the emergency stop
signal.
When the system is in the emergency stop alarm state and the external emergency stop signal is
cancelled, the “RESET” key is pressed to escape the emergency stop state to return the previous
working mode.
When the system is in the emergency stop alarm state and the external emergency stop signal is not
cancelled, the operation is forbidden in JOG, AUTO and DIAGNOSIS working mode; is permitted in
EDIT, PARAMETER, OFFSET working mode.
Press RESET to clear the emergency stop alarm window in EDIT, PARAMETER and OFFSET
working mode, and the system permits the operation.
There is the Emergency stop in the movement, there may be great deviation between the coordinates
displayed the system and the actual position, and the operator must correct the machine coordinates.
When the emergency stop button is pressed and the emergency stop alarm is released, the system
state is as follows:
1) When the system is in DRY RUN state in Auto working mode, it escapes the state.
2) When the system is in rapid state in JOG working mode, the system automatically switches
into the feed state.
15
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
3) The interface output signals of the chuck, tailstock, and machine in the electricity power-on
delay do not change; the system sets the internal memory state to M11, M79. After the
emergency stop is released, the system chuck and tailstock state is separate M10, M78 after
the chuck or the tailstock pedal switch is pressed firstly.
4) Besides the above functions, other function states are initial mode; the system stops all feed,
the spindle, the cooling and other switching controls set the output to be invalid.
【Relative parameters】
The external emergency stop signal function is valid when P404_d7 is set to 0.
The external emergency stop signal function is invalid when P404_d7 is set to 1.
The parameter is for debugging the system, and must be set to valid in the power-on state,
otherwise, it cannot have the protective effect.
When the system is connected with the alarm output signal of a drive unit and appears Drive unit
alarms, the system automatically closes all feed and prompts Z/X/Y drive unit alarms. All axes
immediately stop motion, and the program stops running. At the moment, check the drive unit and
relative device to troubleshooting and the system is turned on again.
When there is the alarm in the course of motion, there may be great deviation between the
coordinates displayed the system and the actual position, and the operator must correct the machine
coordinates.
In JOG working mode, the system prohibits all axes moving when there is the alarm.
In AUTO working mode, the system prohibits the program starting run when there is the alarm.
【Relative parameters】
The drive unit alarm checks when P404_d5 is set to 0.
P405_d4, P405_d3, P405_d2 separately sets alarm level of Z, X, Y drive unit.
When the system appears other alarms, Chinese characters prompts, at the moment, the operator
can perform the troubleshooting based on PROGRAMMING, Chapter 8 Alarm Message.
The machine power supply is switched off immediately to avoid the accidence in the danger or other
emergency cases when the machine is running.
Note: When the coordinate axis is moving and the power supply is switched off, after the machine is
switched on again, there may be great deviation between the displayed coordinates and the
actual position, and so the operator must execute the machine zero return or other ways to
regulate the machine coordinates to ensure that the displayed coordinates are the same those
of the actual.
16
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
When the system outputs abnormally and the coordinate axis moves abnormally, the operator should
The system uses the working mode key to directly select the all working modes. All working modes
can direct switch to get the simple and convenient operations.
The display is as Fig. 4-1 after the system is turned on, and the display state keeps till the other key is
pressed to enter the EDIT working mode.
The relative setting or operation key format and sample descriptions in the user manual are as
follows: meanings and uses of all required functions are described at the beginning of the
corresponding chapter; all required letter and digit keys are expressed with underlines; the system
prompt messages are expressed with borders.
In executing some setting or input or man-machine dialogue, press ESC key to escape the current
17
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
☆ transmit part programs between U disc and the system by the USB interface;
☆ transmit part program between the external PC and the system by RS232 communication
interface;
☆ transmit part program in two systems by RS232 communication interface;
☆ compile and save program;
program motion path drawing analog;
☆input variable and macro character string.
Press to enter the EDIT working mode. The EDIT working mode includes two main
window: program catalog search window and program edit window. The program catalog search
window is as Fig. 4-3:
EDIT Current program No.020 Program length 1KB Upper top
Program catalog search window displays the current stored program quantity, and all programs sorts
as follows:
1)name: program number from top to bottom, from left to right;
2)size: program stored space from top to bottom, form left to right;
18
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
3)remark: the first 12 characters of the first line of the program from top to bottom, from left to
right;
4)the last: input time sequence from top to bottom, from left to right.
program on each window; press to the first page of program, to the last. Press
, to sort all programs according to their name, size, remark and last distribution.
The operations to select a part program or create a new program are as follows:
① Press INPUT key in EDIT working mode;
② Input the required program number by the board key, or input a program number which is
not in the program catalog list as the new program number;
③ Press ENTER key;
④ Select or create a part program, display the content of the part program, and the system
enters the program edit window.
【Note】
1) When a program is selected, it is changed by the above steps; it cannot be changed once it is
confirmed.
2) there is no the selected program number in the input part program catalog, creating a
program is taken as the current program.
【Example】
Example 1:there is no %20 part program in the part program catalog, creating it is as follows:
Press keys to input: INPUT 2 0 ENTER. The new program %020 has been
19
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Clear the program area in the program catalog search window, and all programs in the system are
deleted as follows:
① Press INPUT in the part program catalog search state;
③ Press DELETE , the system prompts: Enter-delete all programs Esc-escape the deletion .
④ Press ENTER to delete all part programs; press ESC not to execute the deletion operation
and return EDIT working mode.
【Note】
The system creates a program number 000 as the current program after all part programs are
deleted.
20
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
The program name of the current program is renamed as another new one. The new is taken as the
current program is as follows:
② Input the program number which is not in the program list, press ALTER and the current
program number is rewritten to the input program number.
【Note】
When the input program exists, the system prompts E166 required renaming program has
existed.
【Example】
Example: the current program %000 is renamed to %005 as follows:
Copy the current program content to another one new and the new becomes the current program as
follows:
【Note】
When the input program name exists, the system prompts E161 copying program exists and
waits the prompt losing to input a new one.
【Example】
Example: copy the current program %000 to %005 as follows:
Press key input: INPUT 5 INPUT. The copy operation is completed.
The communication of part programming includes the sending and receiving the part program. The
sending is divided into: the system outputs to PC(CNC→PC), one system outputs to another one
(CNC→CNC), and the system outputs to U disc (CNC→USB);
Press hp6 in the program catalog search window, the system prompts the part program
communication window.
21
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
22
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
first line as the standard; i.e. the character string XXX digit of “%XXX” in the first line
sent by PC.
◆ The program number sent by the system USB is CNCxxx.TXT xxx digit in“C928PRO”
file in the U disc root catalog.
Note: in USB communication, the character string XXX digit of %XXX” in the first line should be
the same that of xxx digit of CNCxxx.TXT. When they are different, the xxx digit of CNCxxx.TXT is
taken as the standard.
3) The blocks start from the second block. The block must meet its format. Each block cannot
exceed 250 characters, ends with the ENTER key, otherwise, the system prompts the error:
Program line too long in receiving programs.
4) The annotation area has Chinese annotation in the block.
5) Max. TXT file length cannot exceed the program stored space limit of the system.
Part program communication standard format in PC:
TXT file format Explanation
%099 1. There must be program name %099 when
N0000 G50 X100 Z100 ; setting coordinate system the system receives programs; the first line
N0010 G00 X20 Z90 ; rapidly positioning must the 3-digit 0~254+。
G01 X10 Z80 ; linearly cutting 2. “N****” are the blocks with the line number,
…… and others are the blocks without the line
/N0250 G02 X30 Z20 R5 ;arc cutting numbers;
N0260 ;T22 ;tool change 3. The hone of each line must be blank;
4. there is a space between the line number
N0262 M05
and the command for the program with the
N0270 G04 D8
line number;
……
M20 5. / block skip;
6. ;the following is the annotation.
N0000 G0 X100
N0010 X0
N0020 X100
N0030 X0
N0040 G1 X100 F80
Current editing program is Pop-up
Middle N0050 X0
compiled successfully window
N0060 X100
N0070 X0
N0080 X100
N0090 X0
N0100 G1 Z100
N0120 M20
Fig. 4-4 program edit
24
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
forbidden to modify; when the system edits and modifies the programs, P416_d0
should be set to 0.
Edit key meanings and use in program edit window:
3) Home key: the cursor rapidly moves to the home or the first field head of the line.
Press continuously the head key, and the cursor switches between the head and the first
field of the line. The compound of the head key and the deletion key can delete the current
line.
End key: the cursor rapidly moves to the end of the line.
4) insert/alter:
Changing edit input mode: switch the insert and the alter after pressing it once. The cursor
also changes correspondingly and the insert mode cursor flashes to be one horizontal line,
and the alter mode cursor flashes to be the high light square.
5) input key:
The program edit state is switched into the program catalog search state, and the system
25
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
hp3 key:current program compiling and analog drawing current program graph.
hp5 key:execute No. 253 or No. 254 program, the system command help and part
G r F N ()
( )
M H = I P
Blank
X J > K
> space
Z Q < D V and
< and
S if R Y or
or
26
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
T L then *
. *
then
U E else - +
else
W / ;
/ ;
Note: P333 is set to 10 (the system automatically creates the block number, and the following
is the same).
In program edit window, inputting the part program content is as follows:
① create a new program according to the operations of creating new part program;
② input one line content after the block N0000 is displayed;
③ press ENTER key after inputting one line programs to end the line input;
④ the system automatically creates the next block number and continuously input the program
content;
⑤ press ESC to complete the program content input after the last line programs are input.
【Note】
1) The first row of every line only displays the blank space;
2) Each block only displays 60 characters, and only the first 60 characters are displayed when
there are more than 60 characters, the operator can press to left move one
character.
3) The serial number of the first row blank is 0, the last is 251, and the system only displays the
cursor instead of the character; there are up to 250 characters in the edit line; i. e. the first
blank bit +250 characters+ the last cursor bit character=252.
Insert one or many program line between two program lines or in the front of the current block as
follows:
① Move the cursor to the first block end or the last block home of the two blocks;
② Press ENTER, and the system automatically creates a new block number between the
current block and the next (the serial number increment is P333 parameter 1/4 integer, the
next block number can be modified when the above the increment is not enough) and
remains a blank line.
③ Input the required block content;
④ After all content is input and many line are required to insert, ENTER is pressed, which is not
done when one line is required to insert.
【Example】
Example: insert a new block M3 between N0020 and N0030 as follows:
27
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Modify the content of the block into the new, which can be complete according the input
mode(insert/alter).
In INSERT mode, use the insert and deletion as follows:
① Move the cursor the character which needs to be modified;
② Input the new content;
③ Press DELETE to delete the required content.
In REWRITE mode, directly modify the content as follows:
① Press ALTER; the cursor switches into the alter mode(the character position pointed by the
cursor is high light square);
② Move the cursor to the character which needs to be modified;
③ Input the new content. The cursor points the next character.
28
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
【Example】
Example: alter X in N0020 G0 X0.0 Z0.0 into U as follows:
Switch the input mode into ALTER mode, move the cursor to the down of X and input U .
Alter to N0020 G0 U 0.0 Z0.0 .
For No. 0~252, No. 254 program, the system provides 800K stored space, and so the single
program can be up to 800K. For No. 253 program, the system provides 4m FLASH stored space.
【Explanation】
1)The system displays the program leftover space and prompts the leftover stored space size.
2)When the current edit No. 0~252, No.254 program size are more than all stored space(max.
800K), the programs cannot be saved, and the system prompts the storage space has full:
Overflow in edit area. Delete the old programs when the leftover space is not enough.
3)Max. edit space of No. 253 program is up to 4M, and is only saved to the system FLASH.
4)In saving programs, the program capacity is big and saving the programs need long time, and
the operator needs to wait.
Because No. 253 program is up to 4M, its solidifying and read are special as follows:
1) Only be saved to a fixed FLASH;
2) Select No. 253 program, press hp5 and then 4 to save it to the FLASH in program edit
window;
3) Use USB or RS232 to complete the communication.
【Note】
1)No. 253 program cannot automatically save, compile and solidify(FLASH) it after compiling,
otherwise, it cannot be saved.
29
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
For No. 254 program, press hp5 in program edit window, the system prompts the help message
prompt box how to compile, solidify and read No. 254 as follows:
1) Press 5 to compile and solidify No. 254 program:
Edit No.254 program. The system alarms when the edit is wrong; the system saves it to the
FLASH area when it is compiled successfully.
2) Press 4 and read No. 254 program:
Read No. 254 program saved in FLASH area to the edit buffer zone, and update it.
3) Press ESC to escape the current state.
hp5 help key including the system command help, relative parameter help for arc, line number sort,
character string replacing, cursor positioning and MPG controlling cursor moving and so on.
When the current program is No. 253 or No. 254, hp5 help key adds its operation prompt.
In program edit window, press hp5 1 , the system prompts “Command help introduction” window;
the function can search all commands of the system including G, M, S, T, F as follows:
1)G , M , S , T , F separately introduces G, M, S, T, F command.
2)press INPUT and input the command number to search; the system displays the definition, the
function, the format and the explanation of the command number.
【Example】
Example: search G05 command help.
Press :hp5 1 INPUT G 05 ENTRE, the system displays G05 definition, function,
format and explanation.
Press hp5 2 in the program edit window, the system prompts “Input relative arc parameters” window;
the function can search arc parameters.
Input [starting point coordinates], [end point coordinates], [circle radius], the system
automatically counts the relative parameters of arc.
【Example】
Starting point A coordinates(60, 10), end point B coordinates (40, 30) as follows:
30
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Z
1
Press hp5 3 in the program edit window, and the system sort again the programs, and the sorted
block number increases in 10 times. (P333 value is set to 10.)
【Note】
1) After sorting the block number again, the program skip error appears when the program skip
command is used in programming.
2) Program sorting function is invalid when P333 is set to 0.
Press hp5 R in the program edit window, and the system prompts “ Character string replacing”
window; the operator can execute the operation according to the system prompts. All characters
which need to be replaced are replaced from the character where the cursor is to the last character.
31
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The system provides the character string search function, i.e position the content needed by the
operator, which is convenient for operator to search the required content. Press hp5, and the system
1)Press and the cursor positions to the first page of the current program.
2)press and the cursor positions to the last page of the current program.
3)press F, input the character which is needed to search of the current program, press ENTER,
the cursor positions the character.
After the system is connected with MPG, the operator presses MPG , rotates MPG to control the
cursor movement when the MPG key LED is light on the operation panel. Press MPG repeatedly,
MPG operation is invalid when MPG key LED is OFF. The concrete MPG connection is referred to
CONNECTION.
The system provides hp3 compiling command key to compile part programs, check the syntax error,
logic error of programs and coordinate data overtravel according to part program execution path to
reduce the alarm error in Auto mode and improve the safety of executing part programs.
Press compiling command key and the system orderly checks and compiles part programs from the
first line block, and creates convenient target command according to the execution path. When the
system finds out the mistaken operator programs, it stops the compiling, displaying the mistaken field
position and number in the line of the source program, prompting the operator to modify till the
mistaken is corrected.
In program edit window, press hp3 and the system orderly compile the current program. The system
pops up a window『Program alarm』when it finds out a mistaken message. The system displays
Current edited program compiling is completed successfully when all command compiling are
correct.
32
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
hp3 is firstly is pressed in the program edit window and the current program is not mistaken, the user
presses it again to execute the analog drawing of the program path. When the current program is
mistaken, the system finds out the mistaken message and pops up a window『Program alarm』.
The system draws the current program graph after hp3 is pressed twice when the current program is
not mistaken as Fig. 4-5.
◆ Setting graph display area:
The system executes the analog drawing the motion path in the range (X min. coordinate—X max.
coordinate, Z min. coordinate—Z max. coordinate)
Generally, the preset range value of the system is the full drawing of program motion path which is
not modified, ENTER is pressed and the system enters into the program analog execution state.
Press , to select the required data which is needed to modify, directly input data(not use
ENTER key); pressing ENTER meaning all modifications are completed and the system enters the
program analog execution state.
◆ Motion path drawing:
The program analog execution is divided into single mode/continuous mode execution, and it is single
block in the initial state; press SINGLE and the two mode are switched each other. Press ENTER
once to execute one block in single mode; press ENTER to automatically execute the whole program
in continuous mode.
33
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Press , to zoom out or zoom in graph. The operator can see the local area after it is
zoomed out. The position and length of scroll bar indicate the position and the covered proportion of
visual area in the full graph. Press , , , to move the scroll bar and see
other areas.
Current
Z:
Set Graphic Area: mm
X min. : -210 mm mm
Z min. : -210 mm
X max. : 360 mm X:
mm
Z max. : 460 mm
mm
34
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
【Example】
[Program alarm example]:
In compiling program, press hp3 and the alarm display is as follow:
[Program alarm]
Error E206:missing message
Line:11
Program:N0100 G92 Z300 P1
Position: P
35
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
In JOG working mode, the operator can directly press the function key to execute some operation, and also press the
letter key execute the some setting or execute some operation; the system provides the corresponding prompt
message for each operation.
The relative setting or operation input format and example are as follows: the required function key is expressed with
icon; the required input letter or digit key is expressed with the underline; the system prompt is expressed with the
frame.
Press to clear the mistaken digit and input it again when the mistaken digit is input in the course of inputting
letter or digit.
Press to escape the current operation before the confirmation when the operator sets some operation or
executes the input or man-machine dialog process
In JOG working mode, the system displays in the top right. Press it and the system pops up one window,
displaying the operation key catalog in JOG working mode; press it again and the window is closed; directly press
other functions and the window automatically closes.
36
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
37
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Confirm the traverse speed and movement distance before executing the coordinate movement. Press the
emergency stop button immediately when there is the unexpected accidence.
Press the system is switched from STEP or MPG mode into JOG mode.
【JOG TRAVERSE】is to keep pressing the coordinate axis move key, and the machine slider
continuously moves; release the key, and the slider decelerates to stop. The traverse speed is
executed according to the rapid or feedrate.
Coordinate axis move key meanings are as follows:
38
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Press and the system is switched from JOG or MPG to STEP mode.
【STEP TRAVERSE】: press the coordinate axis move key and the machine slier moves the
preset step width. The traverse speed is executed by the selected rapid or feedrate.
Press continuously the key, the machine slider will continuously feed the step width till the key is
released and the slider has moved the last step width. The step width in the single step
movement is displayed in the black background.
The step width of single step movement is 0.001 0.01 0.1 1.0 10.0 50.0. the system
can gradually select them according to STEP REGULATION.
【Note】
1)In STEP mode, press CYCLE START to stop slider moving. When the key is pressed down, the
slider stops and the unfinished step will not be reserved, and then the feed key is pressed to
execute the next step feed. X step width is the moving distance in diameter.
2) When the manual feed key is pressed, the external spindle and the feed hold knob are
permitted to feed, the slider moves. When the manual step feed key is pressed, the slider does
not move in the state of feed hold.
3) When the slider is moving and the feed hold knob rotates to the feed hold position, the slider will
decelerate to stop and the unfinished step width will not be reserved.
Press to switch from MPG mode to JOG or STEP mode, and the indicator ON is selected.
【MPG movement】: the system receives the pulse signal generated by MPG(handwheel) to control
the movement of coordinate axis.
◆ preset each movement of scale of MPG:
The MPG dial rotates one case, and the coordinate axis moves one step width. The step width has
three gears: 0.001mm, 0.01mm, 0.1mm, which can be switched circularly according to the STEP
REGULATION.
◆ preset MPG coordinate axis:
Press MPG to select MPG coordinate axis to X or Z/Y, which can be switched circularly. The
coordinate of the selected coordinate axis is in the high light state. When Y/Z SWITCH indicator is ON,
pressing MPG control axis switches X, Y mutually.
Rotate MPG after the required coordinate axis is selected, and the selected axis moves according to
MPG rotating.
Rotate CW MPG and the coordinate axis moves positively. Rotate CCW MPG and it moves
negatively.
【Note】
1) The MPG speed of should be lower than 5 rev/s, otherwise the motor still moves even if the
MPG has stopped, which causes the moving distance does not correspond with the scale.
39
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
2) In MPG mode, all the functions related to the axis moving including JOG or STEP movement
function, zero return, incremental/absolute movement are invalid, but S, M, T and other
auxiliary functions are valid.
3) In MPG mode, when the relative functions of coordinate axis moving are executed, and the
relative/absolute movement of field is input, MPG is forbidden temporarily, and at the moment,
it is invalid, its press key is invalid and its LED flashes. After the above function is executed,
MPG function automatically recovers, S, M, T auxiliary function is valid.
4) Even if the MPG is shaken, the slider does not traverse when the external spindle and the feed
hold knob forbid the slider to traverse.
5) When the bigger override (X 100) is selected, the motor will rapidly traverse if the MPG is
rotated rapidly. At the moment, because the system automatically accelerates/ decelerate, the
motor will traverse not to stop although the MPG stops. The actual moving distance is
determined by max. speed of motor, the acceleration/ deceleration time, the feedrate override
and the MPG speed. The rapider the speed is, the longer the acceleration/deceleration time is
and the rapider the MPG speed is, the longer the moving distance of motor decelerating is,
otherwise the shorter the moving distance of motor is.
6) P400_d4=1: the step width 0.1 is valid; P400_d4=1, the step width 0.1 is invalid.
7) When P400_d1 is set to 1, the external MPG control button is valid, Y/Z selection axis, and the
step regulation key are invalid.
cutting feed(low speed movement). Press to switch the rapid traverse and low speed feed
states. The speed indicator ON is to select the rapid traverse state.
◆ Rapid override
Rapid override is divided into the four gears: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%. increases to one gear till
40
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Press and the speed indicator is OFF, which is the selected low speed feed state.
◆ System embedding feedrate
When the input field F is 0, the system uses the embedding speed feed.
The manual feedrate override has 16-gear 0%~150%, the corresponding embedding feedrate
of each gear is as follows:
Feedrate feedrate(mm/ min ) Feedrate feedrate(mm/ min )
override override
0% 0 80% 240
10% 7.5 90% 300
20% 22 100% 420
30% 38 110% 525
40% 60 120% 675
50% 82 130% 850
60% 110 140% 1000
70% 180 150% 1260
【Note】
1)There is 2% error in the above table.
2)When the feedrate override is 0, the system prompts “Feedrate override being 0”, which
indicates the machine is in the motion state, and the motion is immediately executed after the
feedrate override is non-zero.
◆ Feedrate override
The feedrate override has 16 gears 0%~150% ; press and the feedrate override increase
one gear till 150%; press and the feedrate override reduces one gear till 0%.
41
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
4) JOG movement and STEP movement operations are controlled by F when the speed
indicator is OFF.
5) When the indicator is OFF, the low speed feed speed is limited by P113(max. cutting feed
speed). When the input F is more than 9113, it takes P113 as the standard.
6) When the indicator is OFF, in the two-axis speed feed, the traverse mode is the same that of
G01 in AUTO working mode, i.e. interpolation move mode, the two axes simultaneously
move at their proportion, and simultaneously end, F is the combined speed of the two axes.
7) When the indicator is ON, in the single –axis rapid traverse, the speed is determined by
P100~P102.
8) When the indicators is ON, in the two-axis rapid traverse, the traverse mode is determined by
P400_d3,and is the same that of G00. P400_d3=0: it is the separately traverse mode, each
axis rapidly moves, the system displays the combined speed more than rapid traverse
speed of each axis. P400_d3=1: it is the interpolation traverse mode, two axes
simultaneously move rapidly at their proportion and simultaneously end, and the system is
related to the motion parameter of two axes and the slope of move block.
9) When the federate override is 0 and the system is in the low speed feed state or there is F in
the filed, the system prompts “FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0” till the federate override is
changed into others after is ENTER is pressed.
10) Input F field in G98, and the system cannot input G99.
◆ Call field execution
The system automatically saves the last 8 times executed command record in inputting field moving.
Press , and the system pops up the window list record; the operator can input according to the
digit serial number to modify or directly execute the operation.
43
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
when the incremental value becomes big, the motion stops when it reaches the software limit point,
and the system prompts the limit alarm message. In the inputting field move mode to input command
to execute Z/X link, when the specified value exceeds the range, the system prompts the limit alarm
message and refuses the execution. Whether the machine and tool software limit alarm are valid is
set by P404_d4, P404_d3.
4.4.2.1 Creating machine coordinate system_machine zero return(machine reference point return)
◆ Machine zero:
Machine coordinate system fixed on the machine is the reference coordinate system for CNC
counting the coordinate position. After the system is installed, the operator should firstly create the
machine coordinate system.
The reference point of the machine coordinate system is called machine zero(or machine reference
point or machine zero). Some fixed point on each machine is taken as the machine reference point,
and the system firstly returns to the machine zero and then returns to the machining starting point to
eliminate the machine coordinate system deviation caused by the power-off and step-out; executing
the zero return instead of toolsetting again after power-off accidentally can find the machine
coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system to continuously machine the workpiece.
In most conditions, the system looks for the machine reference point by the deceleration switch and
zero switch installed on the machine; or by the one-turn signal of servo motor as the zero signal only
with the deceleration switch. The deceleration switch is generally installed near to the max. travel of
positive Z/X//Y coordinate axis.
◆ Machine zero return operations:
Press , and Z execute the machine zero return; Z/Y switch indicator lighting means Y is being
executed.
Press in JOG Working mode, Z moves to Z machine zero at the selected rapid traverse speed
in the zero return direction.
◆ Zero return process as follows:
Zero return mode 1: when there is the deceleration signal and zero signal, the system executes
the zero return mode 1; the zero return process is as follow:
Step 1: the coordinate axis moves to the specified direction at the rapid speed till the block
presses down the deceleration switch and the system has checked the starting
point of the deceleration signal to decelerate to stop moving;
Step 2: the coordinate axis reversely moves at the set zero return speed till the system has
checked the starting point of deceleration signal to decelerate and to stop moving;
44
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Step 3: when the set zero offset is not zero, the system continuously moves one zero offset
value;
Step 4: the coordinate axis continuously moves at the set zero return speed, and starts
checking the zero signal till the system has checked the zero signal to decelerate to
stop moving;
Step 5: the above operations have completed the zero return motion and check processes;
at last, the system automatically modifies the current machine coordinate into the
“Zero coordinate” set by the parameter.
Zero return mode 2: when there is the only deceleration signal without the zero signal, the
system executes the zero return mode 2.
Because there is no zero signal, the system reduces the above the Step 3 and Step 4
compared to the zero return mode 1; the system only executes the above Step 1, Step 2 and
Step 5 to complete the zero return process, which zero return precision is worse than the
zero return mode 1.
Zero return mode 3: when there is the zero signal without the deceleration signal, the system
execute the zero return mode 3.
Because there is no deceleration signal, the system reduces the above the Step 1, Step 2
and Step 3 compared to the zero return mode 1; the system only executes the above Step
4, and Step 5 to complete the zero return process. In the mode, the manual operation
moves the coordinate axis to a special position and then the system executes the zero
return, otherwise, the result is not correct.
Zero return mode 4: the system executes the zero return mode 4 when there is no deceleration
and zero signal.
When there is no machine zero check device installed on the machine, the relative
parameters are set to 0; at the moment, when the system executes the machine zero return
function, it does not check the zero signal and deceleration signal till it returns to the zero
coordinate position of the axis.
【Note】
1) The machine zero return moves to the zero direction. The coordinate axis should stop in the
negative of machine zero before the system executing zero return.
2)In the machine zero return, the rapid traverse speed of the coordinate axis is controlled by the
rapid override.
3) In the machine zero return, the coordinate axis motion is not limited by the software limit
parameter.
4) Parameter related to the machine zero return is referred to PROGRAMMING, Parameter
Setting Working Mode.
5) Connection related to the machine zero return and zero return mode are referred to
CONNECTION, Machine Zero Function and Connection.
6) After the system executes the machine zero return, the blue icon of the machine zero
45
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
return before the corresponding machine coordinates are displayed as the prompt.
4.4.2.2 Creating machine coordinate system_without machine zero(no machine reference point)
(Prompt: the coordinate axis with the zero check device cannot execute the operation.)
The coordinate axis without the zero check device(without deceleration signal and zero signal), can
create the machine coordinate system as follows:
【Format】
Input: INPUT U NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER. The current X machine coordinate is
modified into the new coordinate value.
Input: INPUT V NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER. The current Y machine coordinate is
modified into the new coordinate value.
Input: INPUT W NEW COORDINATE VALUE ENTER. The current Z machine coordinate is
modified into the new coordinate value.
46
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Select a point as the reference point( the point is a fixed point on the machine, such as chuck
end face or reference face of frock to be convenient to the created workpiece coordinate
system to be consistent with the previous workpiece coordinate system after the previous is
damaged). Measure the distance between the cut end face to the selected reference point.
3) Press INPUT, and the system displays SETTING, press Z and the system displays SETTING
WORKPICE COORDINATE SYSTEM Z, input the measured data and press ENTER, the
system automatically set Z workpiece coordinate.
Note: The system workpiece coordinate system has been created after the above operations are
completed.
【Explanation】
1)Setting the workpice coordinate system operation only modifies the tool nose coordinates of
current point without changing the offset and the machine coordinates. The operation result is
that the offset between the workpice coordinate system and the machine coordinate system
is set again.
2)Setting the workpice coordinate system operation is executed once and is not set later after
the system is initialized or the workpiece type is changed(all offset values are cleared to
zero).
【Note】
The operator should set again the workpiece when the actual position of the tool is not consistent with
the workpiece coordinate system position because of the step-out caused by some reasons. After the
step-out, not only the workpiece coordinate system position changes but also the machine coordinate
system position also changes. In the case, only correcting the workpiece coordinate system instead
of modifying the machine coordinate system maybe bring the unexpected “Machine coordinate
software limit alarm”.
Proper operations after motor stepping-out as follows:
1)Select the reference point (the tool nose easily reaches and the operator can conveniently
observe it ) for one couple of tool, measure Z, X coordinates of the point.
2)Move the tool nose to some reference point(the known reference point coordinates);
3)Continuously press twice DELETE and close the drive unit when the tool nose coordinates are
not consistent with the reference point coordinates;
4)Input the field to move and make the tool nose coordinates be consistent with the reference
point coordinates(the coordinates change and the actual tool nose does not);
5)Press DELETE to start the drive unit.
So, the machine coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system are corrected
simultaneously.
47
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
conveniently. The program reference point can be set when the tool post stops at the position which is
called the program reference point(Program zero). The program reference point coordinates are
relative to the machine coordinate system.
【Format】
Press INPUT and the system displays SETTING, press 0 and the system displays Setting program
reference point?, at the moment, press ENTER, the system confirms Z/X/Y to be the program
reference point.
When the operator sets again the workpiece coordinates after setting the program reference point,
the previous reference point coordinates do not change in the new workpiece coordinate system, at
the moment, the operator should set again the program reference point. The initial value of the
program reference point is X=150 Z=150.
After the operator sets the program reference point, the program reference point return command
G26 and the program zero return operation by the system panel return to the point no matter what the
machine slide stops anywhere.
Press and X rapidly returns the program reference point from the current point.
Press and Z(or Y) rapidly returns the program reference point from the current point.
【Note】
1)Generally, each axis should stop at the program reference point in waiting for the machining.
2)After the system executes the program reference point return, the green icon of the
program reference point return before the corresponding machine coordinates are displayed as the
prompt.
4.4.2.6 Recovering the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point
In JOG working mode, the workpiece coordinate system and the program reference point have been
set. In AUTO working mode, when all executed blocks include G50, the workpiece coordinate system
and program reference point have been changed. The operator can use the following operations to
recover the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point set in JOG working mode.
【Format】
Input: G 5 1 ENTER. Recover the workpiece coordinate system and program reference point
set in JOG working mode.
48
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Press or input M 3 ENTER; the spindle rotates CW. The system displays the spindle state
and LED lights.
Press or input M 4 ENTER; the spindle rotates CCW. The system displays the spindle state
and LED lights.
◆ Spindle JOG control
The spindle stop key can switch the spindle JOG control state.
In the spindle stop state, press and the Spindle state icon is displayed in the highlight on the
screen and the system is switched to the spindle JOG control state. Press again, the system
is switched to the normal-regular state. In the spindle manual state, press or , the
spindle rotates at the specified speed in the specified time and then stops.(when the specified time is
too long, the operator can press to stop the rotation). In the spindle manual state, MDI
inputting the spindle control command M03, M04, M05 are invalid. The spindle manual speed is
specified by P309, the manual rotation time is specified by P308, and the spindle stops and LED
indicator is OFF when the manual time ends.
◆ Interlock between the spindle starting/stopping and chuck:
P402_d5=0: interlock relationship between the hydraulic chuck control and the spindle control
1)When the chuck clamps, the system forbids starting the spindle; otherwise, the system
alarms ”The chuck clamps and the system forbids starting the spindle”.
2)When the spindle rotates CW, the system forbids the chuck operations, otherwise, the system
alarms “The spindle does not stop and the system forbids operating the chuck”.
◆ Interlock between the spindle starting/stopping and tailstock:
P402_d3=0: Interlock between the tailstock control and the spindle control:
The system forbids operating the tailstock when the spindle is rotating; otherwise, the system
alarms “The spindle does not stop and the system forbids operating the tailstock”.
◆ Spindle starting/stopping execution process and signal output time sequence:
Note: Select the spindle control output signal by P410_d7. When P410_d7 is set to 0, the spindle controls
the level output. When P410_d7 is set to 1, the spindle controls the pulse output. The time sequence
49
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
between the spindle brake signal MSP and the spindle starting, stopping signal as follows:
1) In pulse control mode, M3, M4, M5, MSP output time sequence:
M03 pin t1
M04 pin t1
t1 t1
M05 pin
t2
MSP brake pin t3
2)In level control mode, M3, M4, M5, MSP output time sequence(it is used to other when M5 pin does not output):
M03 pin
t2
M04 pin
t2
MSP brake pin t3
t1: In pulse control mode, the hold time output by M3, M4, M5 is set by P326;
t2: The spindle stop brake delay time is set by P315;
t3: The durable time output by the spindle brake signal MSP is set by P316.
50
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Code
S00S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08 S09 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15
Output point
S01 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
S02 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
S03 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
S04 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
Note: “★” in the above table means the output of the corresponding output point is valid.
3) Lines controlled by the Actual output of spindle gear is specified by P310.
P310=4,actual output controlling points are S01, S02, S03, S04;
P310=3,actual output controlling points are S01, S02, S03;releasing S04, as other use;
P310=2,actual output controlling points are S01, S02;releasing S04, S03, as other use;
P310=1,actual output controlling points is S01, releasing S04, S03, S02, as other use;
P310=0,S does not output;releasing S04, S03, S02 , S01 as other use.
4) When the gear controls the signal code output (P410_d5 is set to 1) and the controlled lines
specified by P310 are less than 4, only the low gear control is valid, and the high code
control is released and is not controlled by the gear.
◆ Execution process and signal output time sequence of spindle S gear shifting:
When the system is turned on, it defaults S00, S01~S04 output are invalid. When the system
executes any one of S01, S02, S03, S04, the corresponding S signal output is valid and keeps, and at
the same time, the output of other 3 signals is cancelled. When the system executes S00, it cancels
S01~S04 output and one of S01~S04 is valid.
S01 pin
t1
S02 pin
Press once and the spindle speed circularly output according to S01~S04, or S00~S15
(in code output) . When there are two-gear spindle speed, the operator presses three times
after S02, and the system is switched from S02 to S01.
low torque, the system should 4-gear automatic gear shifting output signal to match the converter
working in the high frequency to make the machine get the low speed and big cutting torque. The
system uses M41/M42/M43/M44 to control the spindle gear control; S controls the spindle speed.
◆ Frequency spindle gear control
【Format】
M41 ;
M42 ;
M43 ;
M44 ;
【Explanation】
1)M41, M42, M43, M44 output gear control signal. Each gear signal corresponds to one output
point S01, S02, S03, S04.
2) Actual output controlled lines of spindle gear are specified by P310.
P310=4: actual output controlled point are S01, S02, S03, S04 ;
P310=3: actual output controlled point are S01, S02, S03; the system releases S04 as
other use.
P310=2: actual output controlled point are S01, S02,; the system releases S04, S03 as
other use.
P310=1: actual output controlled point are S01; the system releases S04, S03, S02 as
other use.
P310=0: actual all point doe not output; the system releases S04, S03, S02 , S01 as other
use.
3) The initial gear state of the system ON is M41.
【Execution process and signal output time sequence of spindle M gear shifting:
When the CNC is turn on, it states is controlled by P400_d6 (spindle gear memory) to whether it
memories the spindle gear or not.
1)When P400_d6 is 0, the system is turned on after it is turned off, the spindle gear is not
memorized and the system default the 1st gear of the spindle, and M41~M44 do not output;
2)When is P400_d6, the system is turned on after it is turned off, the spindle gear is memorized.
The system does not execute the gear shifting when the specified gear is consistent with the
current gear. If not, the system executes the gear shifting as follows:
① Execute one of M41, M42, M43, M44, the value (unit: millivolt)set by P314 (output voltage in
the spindle gear shifting) is output to the analog voltage to the spindle servo or the converter.
② The system closes the previous gear output signal after it delays P311 (frequency spindle
gear shifting time 1) ;
③ The system outputs the new gear signal after it delays P313 ( frequency spindle gear shifting
interval time);
④ When the system is connected with the checking gear shifting in-position input signal M41I,
52
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
M42I, M43I, M44I, and the gear shifting is not in-position, it always waits the gear shifting
in-position signal to execute the next step; when the system is not connected with the
checking gear shifting in-position input signal and directly executes the next step; M41I~
M44I input signals are defined by the interface parameters;
⑤ The system delays P312 (frequency spindle gear shifting time 2), and outputs the spindle
analog voltage according to the current gear based on P300~P303 (corresponding to gear
1~4), and the gear shifting ends.
◆ Speed control of frequency spindle
When the machine uses the frequency spindle, S controls the speed. The spindle standard
format consists of S+4-digit digital, 2-digit means the spindle gear number. There are 2 methods to
input the spindle speed input.
1)S sets the fixed speed of the spindle (r/min); when S is not changed, the spindle speed is not
changed, which is called Constant speed control.
2)S sets the tangent speed(m/min)of the tool relative to the workpiece outer, which is called
constant surface speed control. In the constant surface control, the spindle speed changes
as X tool nose coordinate value changing in cutting feed. The detailed is referred to
PROGRAMMING Constant Surface Control G96, Constant Surface Speed Control
Cancel G97.
【Command format】
G96 ; set the constant surface speed cutting state;
G96 S__ ; set the constant surface speed cutting state and specify the surface value;
range: 0~9999 m /min;
G97 ; cancel the constant surface state; G97 is modal
G97 S__ ; cancel the constant surface state and specify the speed value; range: 0~
9999 r /min;
S__ ; It is determined by the current state; it can be speed value or surface
speed value cutting.
【Operation example】
Input: S 2 0 0 ENTER; the system switches the speed into 0~10V analog voltage to
output the converter.
【Explanation】
1) In executing S, the system takes the max. spindle speed value of the current spindle gear as
the reference, counts the analog voltage value corresponding to the specified speed, and
then outputs to the spindle servo or the converter.
2)To make the spindle actual speed be consistent with the speed set by S, P300~P303 should
set the actual max. spindle speed value(output analog voltage is 10V) of each gear; the
setting method: input S_ according to the setting value of P300~P303, and modify P300~
P303 setting according to the actual displayed spindle speed value.
53
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
3)When the system is turned on, the analogy voltage output is 0v, the system outputs
corresponding analog voltage value after it executes S; it always keeps later(except for the
cutting feed state in the constant surface speed control and X coordinate value is not
changed). After S0 is executed, the analog voltage output is 0V. CNC resets in the emergency
stop, the analog voltage output keeps.
“0”, the system set Y working mode, displays Y operation icon ; in the state, the system permits Y
motion operations, forbids the spindle start/stop (M03/M04/05 is invalid and the system prompts the
alarm message).
When the system executes M48, it outputs APO signal and checks API signal; when API level is “1”,
the system set Y working mode, disappears; in the state, the system forbids Y motion operations,
permits the spindle start/stop (Y motion in AUTO working mode causes the alarm). The concrete
connections of APO and API signals are referred to CONNECTION.
In JOG working mode, directly operate the function on the panel or input M08/M09 to control the
cooling ON/OFF.
54
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Press to switch cooling ON/OFF; the State icon on the screen and LED indicator indicate its
corresponding state.
Input: M 8 ENTER ; cooling ON.
Input: M 9 ENTER ; cooling OFF.
1) In level control mode, M8, M9 output time sequence: (it is used to others when M9 does not output)
M08 pin
M08 pin t1
M09 pin
t1
t1:in pulse control mode, M08, M09 output hold time is set by P326.
【Relative parameter】
P410_d7: P410_d7=1: the system pulse output controls the cooling; P410_d7=0: the system
level output controls the cooling. The bit parameter shares with the spindle controlling output bit
parameter.
In JOG working mode, the operator can directly operate the tool change function key on the operation
panel or input T command to execute the tool change control.
◆ Tool change function operation
Press once, and the tool post rotates to the next tool number, and the system displays the
corresponding tool number ( is set to “Confirm” and the operator presses ENTER to execute the
operation).
◆ Input format of T command
The standard format of the tool function field consists of T+4-digit, the first 2-digit is the tool number,
and the second 2-digit is the tool offset number. It is not necessary to input the complete 4-digit or to
use the 2~4-digit.
【Format】
Txx ____ the first 1-digit is the tool number, the second 1-digit is the tool offset number;
Txxx ____ the first 1-digit is the tool number, the latter 2-digit is the tool offset number;
Txxxx ____ the first 2-digit is the tool number and the second 2-digit is the tool offset
number.
55
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Explanation】
Tool number range is decided by P319 (max. tool number: 1~16; when P319 is 4, the tool number
range is 0~4.
The input tool number is 0, which means the system keeps the current tool number.
The offset number range: 0~64; the input tool offset number is 0, which means the system cancels
the offset.
【Example】
Input: T 4 6 ENTER , execute No. 4 tool and No. 6 offset
Input: T 3 0 ENTER , execute No. 3 tool and cancel the offset
Input: T 0 6 ENTER , keep the current tool and execute No. 6 offset
Input: T 8 1 2 ENTER , execute No. 8 tool and No. 12 offset
Input: T 4 0 5 ENTER , execute No. 4 tool and No. 5 offset
Input: T 0 6 0 8 ENTER , execute No. 6 tool and No. 8 offset
Input: T 0 0 ENTER , do not execute the tool exchange and cancel the offset
Input: T 0 4 0 ENTER; keep the current tool and execute No. 40 offset
【Note】
1)Example: inputting T400 means the system executes No. 4 tool change and cancels the
offset.(note: cannot input T040).
2)When the electromotive tool post is failure, the system displays “Check tool signal overtime”,
which means the system cannot find the corresponding tool number in the specified time.
3)The system uses the absolute too change mode, each position on the tool post is fixed when
the system uses the electromotive tool post, the operator confirms the tool number on the tool
post to be consistent with the one displayed on the screen.
4)Set P318 to 0, and there is no tool change signal output in selecting the line-up tool post.
5)There are two methods to execute the offset: move the machine slider or modify the system
coordinate which is selected by P403_d6.
6)Set P403_d6 to 1, move the machine slider but do not change the coordinates in executing the
offset.
Set P403_d6 to 0, modify the coordinate display instead of moving machine slider.
7)When the tool change is failure or is broken in the tool change(reset, emergency stop), the
system confirms the tool is in the unconfirmed position and prompts the tool number flashing
in red, at the moment, the operator cannot start the machining program; the system can
recover the normal state when it executes one successful tool change operation and it is
turned on again.
8)When the system executes the tool change and the target tool number is the current one, the
system does not execute the tool change output operation but modifies the offset except for
the followings:
● After the tool change is failure, the tool displaying the red flash means that the displayed
56
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
tool number is not consistent with the actual tool; when the target tool number in next
executing the tool change is the current one, the system executes one tool change;
● After the system is turned on and executes the first tool change, and when the target tool
number is the current one displayed by the system, the system executes once tool
change.
◆ Execution process and signal output time sequence of T command:
The system has many tool change methods and the detail is referred to CONNECTION, 3.4 Tool
Change Control Function and Connection.
Machining one workpiece needs several different tools. Because of the tool installation and tool
shape deviation, its tool nose position is not complete consistent and has some offset when each tool
rotates to the cutting position,
Toolsetting is called that the system automatically memorizes the Offset to the specified tool Offset
number.
After the toolsetting, the operator is only based on the part drawing and machining technology to
compile the workpiece program without considering the tool deviation, and only specifies the
corresponding Offset number in the tool change in machining program.
The offset table can record 64 groups of tool offset, each tool offset number corresponds to one group
from 1~64. Each group separately records Z offset, X offset, tool radius, imagery tool nose number
and toolsetting record (refer to offset working mode).
Modify the specified Z offset, X offset and toolsetting in the toolsetting operation. Fill in advance the
tool radius, imaginary tool nose number because the system must refer to them in toolsetting,
otherwise, which causes the unexpected result (when the system uses the ball tool, tool radius,
imaginary tool nose number should be set to 0. Refer to OFFSET working mode.)
Toolsetting record is the system executes the toolsetting of the Offset number, it automatically
records the current Tool number. For the safety, the system scans the workpice by the toolsetting
record. Example: the toolsetting is T0409, and the workpice program has T0309, which is not
consistent with the Toolsetting record and which is danger, and the system pops-up the alarm
message.
【Notes before toolsetting】
1)According to the above, confirm the Offset to the Offset number, and confirm the content of
Imaginary tool nose number in advance.
2)For the same tool nose, memorize Z offset value and X offset value to the same one offset
number, otherwise, it causes the serious result.
3)Generally, it is better to use the sequence for No. 1 Offset number with No. 1 tool, No. 2 Offset
number with No. 2 tool, which is convenient to memorize them.
4)Firstly execute the Offset number, and then toolsetting. Example, firstly execute the T49
57
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
command when the system memorizes the Offset in No. 4 tool to No. 9 Offset number.
5)The system executes the toolsetting when the workpice coordinate system is normal,
otherwise, the result is not correct.
The system has the trial cutting toolsetting and fixed-point toolsetting as follows:
◆ Trial toolsetting method(method 1):
【Format】
Input: I MEASURED VALUE ENTER [TOOL OFFSET NUMBER] ENTER. Modify the
current X tool nose coordinate into the new one.
Input: k MEASURED VALUE ENTER [TOOL OFFSET NUMBER] ENTER. Modify the
current Z tool nose coordinate into the new one.
【Actual operation steps of toolsetting as follows:】
Install the trial cutting workpiece on the machine, execute the toolsettting operation of each tool
through the above process till the toolsetting of all tools are performed. The operation is fast and
convenient when a tool is regulated.
1. X toolsetting:
1)Install the trial workpiece reliably on the machine, and select a tool (usually select the first
one used in machining).
2)Select the proper spindle speed, and then start the spindle. Traverse the tool in JOG
Working mode, and cut a small sidestep of the workpiece.
3)X does not move but Z does to the safe position, and stop the spindle. Measure the
diameter of the cut sidestep.
4) Press I , and the system displays Toolsetting X ;input the measured diameter vale
and press ENTER.
5)The system prompts Confirm tool offset number:XX ;it automatically presets one
offset number, and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is
consistent with the input. Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset
number. The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the specified
offset number.
2. Z toolsetting:
1)Start the spindle again, traverse the tool to cut a small sidestep of the workpiece.
2)Z does not move but X does to the safe position, and stop the spindle.
3)Select one point as the reference point, measure Z distance from the cut end face to the
selected reference point.
4)Press K and the system display Toolsetting Z to input the measured data, and press
ENTER.
5)The system prompts Confirm tool offset number:XX ;it automatically presets one
offset number, and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is
consistent with the input. Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset
58
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
number. The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the
specified offset number.
3)X does not move, the operator presses and the system automatically memorizes
the tool nose position, and displays the toolsetting icon flashing; and then X moves
out the safe position and the spindle stops rotating. Measure the diameter of the cut
sidestep.
4) Press I and the system display Toolsetting X to input the measured data, and press
ENTER
5)The system prompts Confirm tool offset number:XX ;it automatically presets one
offset number, and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset number is
consistent with the input. Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after inputting offset
number. The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it to the specified
offset number; the system automatically cancel the toolsetting icon.
2. Z toolsetting:
1)Start the spindle again, traverse the tool to cut a end face of the workpiece.
2)Z does not move, the operator presses and the system automatically memorizes
the tool nose position, and displays the toolsetting icon flashing; and then Z moves
out the safe position and the spindle stops rotating.
3)Select one point as the reference point, measure Z distance from the cut end face to the
selected reference point.
4) Press K and the system display Toolsetting Z to input the measured data, and press
ENTER. The system prompts Confirm tool offset number:XX ;it automatically
presets one offset number, and the operator directly presses ENTER when the offset
number is consistent with the input. Otherwise the operator presses ENTER after
inputting offset number. The system automatically counts X tool offset value and stores it
to the specified offset number.
【Explanation】
1)In toolsetting icon flashing, the operator can execute the spindle start/stop, the coordinate
moving; in tool change, the system automatically cancels the toolsetting icon and does not
memorize the previous toolsetting point.
59
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
2)Without the toolsetting icon, the operator directly presses K or I , and the system takes the
current point as the toolsetting point.
◆ Fixed-point toolsetting mode:
Find one reference point on the machine or the workpiece. First set the reference point coordinates (Z,
X). Move all tool nose to the reference point to get the coordinates, and the system automatically
memorizes the tool Offset value. The toolsetting method is called the fixed-point toolsetting. i.e.
execute “MDI reference point coordinates” or “Modify reference point coordinates” to confirm the
coordinates; and then move the tool nose to the reference point, and execute “Fixed-point toolsetting”
to complete the toolsetting.
【Press hp1 to execute the fixed-point toolsetting operation】
1)Inputting reference point coordinates::
Input the current tool nose coordinates as the reference point coordinates; use the method when the
operator does not know the reference point coordinates and confirms the tool nose coordinates of the
current tool. Move the tool nose to the reference point, execute “Input reference point coordinates”,
i.e. the MDI operation is completed, and the system automatically saves the current tool nose point
coordinates as the reference point coordinates. When the tool is damaged or some tool is installed,
any one which has executed the toolsetting can be taken as the reference point.
2)Modify reference point coordinates:
Input Z/X reference point coordinates and press ENTER, and the reference point coordinates are
modified; generally, use the method when the operator knows the reference point coordinates.
3)Fixed-point toolsetting:
Move the tool which needs the toolsetting to the reference point, execute “Fixed-point toolsetting”,
press ENTER, i.e. the system completes the toolsetting operation of the current tool and
automatically creates the tool offset.
【Note】
1)When the system uses the optical toolsetting instrument, it must not start the spindle to place
the toolsetting point to the intersection of toolsetting instrument, other operations are the
same.
2)The system automatically creates the tool offset which can be displayed and modified in
OFFSET working mode. Refer to OFFSET working mode.
3)When the system uses the line-up toolsetting, and the tool is at the side of one workpiece, the
input X measured value should be negative in trial cutting toolsetting.
◆ Chuck operation
In JOG working mode, input M10/M11 to control the chuck clamping/releasing.
Input: M 1 0 ENTER ;chuck clamps. The system displays the spindle state.
Input: M 1 1 ENTER ;chuck releases.
60
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Input: M 1 2 ENTER ;cancel the chuck control signal. (use M12 for special chuck device).
【Relative parameters】
P409_d7= 0: the system has the hydraulic chuck control function.
P402_d5=0: interlock between the hydraulic chuck control and the spindle control.
P402_d4=0: the consecutive check of the chuck respond signal is close;
P402_d4=1: the consecutive check of the chuck respond signal is open
P409_d6=0: the hydraulic chuck is outer;
P409_d6=1: the hydraulic chuck is inner.
P409_d5=1: the hydraulic chuck needs the respond check; it is green when the respond signal is
normal, otherwise, it is yellow.
P409_d5=0: the hydraulic chuck does not need the respond check.
P409_d3=0: the hydraulic chuck control signal is controlled by the level;
P409_d3=1: the hydraulic chuck control signal is pulse control; the pulse width is defined by
P327 time.
P409_d1=0: the hydraulic chuck pedal switch input is valid; P409_d1=1, the hydraulic chuck
pedal switch input is invalid.
◆ Execution process of chuck command:
In outer chuck mode, After M10 is executed, the system outputs the chuck clamping signal from
M10 pin (the output pulse or the level signal is selected by the parameter) and the chuck
clamping operation ends without needing the respond check signal; when needing the respond
signal, the system waits the chuck clamping in-position; after it has checked the chuck clamping
in-position signal(interface pin RM10=0, and RM11=1) in the set time (P329: M responds check
time specifying), otherwise the system prompts “Alarm for chuck clamping respond check
overtime ”;
After M11 is executed, the system outputs the chuck releasing signal from M11 pin (the output
pulse or the level signal is selected by the parameter) and the chuck clamping operation ends
without needing the respond check signal; when needing the respond signal, the system waits
the chuck releasing in-position; after it has checked the chuck releasing in-position
signal(interface pin RM11=0, and RM10=1) in the set time (P329: M responds check time
specifying), otherwise the system prompts “Alarm for chuck releasing respond check
overtime ”;
In inner chuck mode: after M10 is executed, the system outputs the chuck clamping signal from M11
pin; after M11 is executed, the system outputs the chuck releasing signal from M10 pin, which is
opposite to the output pin in the outer chuck mode, and others are the same.
Besides using commands, the external pedal switch also can control the hydraulic chuck. The system
switches the clamping/releasing by M10/M11 when the pedal switch is stepped once. “Chuck pedal
switch” releases before the system is switched from other working mode to JOG or AUTO working
mode, otherwise, the system alarms.
◆ Time sequence of hydraulic chuck control signal output:
61
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Input signal
t1 t1
M10 pin
M11 pin t1
t1:M10, M11 signal output hold time is set by P327 in pulse control mode;
2)M10, M11 output time sequence in level control mode:
Executing M10 Executing M11 Executing M10
M10 pin
M11 pin
【Note】
1)When the hydraulic chuck control is valid, the system defaults the chuck releasing after power
on, the first control input of chuck is valid and the system outputs the signal of chuck
clamping.
2)When it is the interlock protection between the chuck and the spindle: in the spindle running,
the system forbids operating the chuck, otherwise, it alarms; in the chuck releasing, the
system forbids starting the spindle, otherwise, it alarms.
3)In automatic continuous run, the pedal switch operation is invalid no matter what the spindle
rotates.
4)When the chuck operation is failure or interrupted(reset, emergency stop), the system takes
the chuck is in the unconfirmed position, prompts the chuck flashing in red (M10 or M11), at
the moment, the system cannot start the machining programs; the system recovers the
normal state when the chuck operation is executed once again or the system is turned on
again.
5)The chuck respond signal consecutive check is to continuously check whether the chuck
abnormally releases in the normal or machining state. If the above is set the
alarm(P402_d4=1), the system stops the program machining and closes the spindle when
the chuck releases in machining.
6)When the chuck signal cancels (M12), the chuck state (M10 or M11) is displayed with the
underline, i.e. M10 M11.
◆ Tailstock operation
In JOG working mode, input M78/M79 to control the tailstock forward/backward.
Input: M 7 8 ENTER ; the tailstock goes forward.
62
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Input signal
M78 pin t1 t1
M79 pin t1
t1:M78, M79 output hold time is set by P328 in pulse control mode;
63
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
M78 pin
M79 pin
【Note】
1)When the hydraulic tailstock control is valid, the system defaults the tailstock backward after
power on, the first control input of chuck is valid and the system outputs the signal of tailstock
forward.
2)When it is the interlock protection between the tailstock and the spindle: in the spindle running,
the system forbids operating the tailstock, otherwise, it alarms.
3)In automatic continuous run, the tailstock control input is invalid no matter what the spindle
rotates.
4)When the tailstock operation is failure or interrupted(reset, emergency stop), the system takes
the tailstock is in the unconfirmed position, prompts the tailstock flashing in red (M78 or M79),
at the moment, the system cannot start the machining programs; the system recovers the
normal state when the tailstock operation is executed once again or the system is turned on
again.
5)The tailstock respond signal consecutive check is to continuously check whether the tailstock
abnormally releases in the normal or machining state. If the above is set the
alarm(P402_d2=1), the system stops the program machining and closes the spindle when
the chuck releases in machining.
6)When the tailstock signal cancels (M80), the tailstock state (M78 or M79) is displayed with the
underline, i.e. M78 or M79.
64
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
parameter and correctly connects with wiring; the system output the signal in the corresponding pin.
P502:LMP3:green (program run signal indicator 3);
P503:LMP2:yellow(program run signal indicator 2) ;
P504:LMP1:red, alarm indicator(program run signal 1) .
【Functional description】
1) It is valid in JOG /AUTO working mode; in other working modes, it is invalid.
2) The green indicator light means the program normally runs.
3) The green indicator closes and the red lights when the system alarms.
4) The red and green indicators close and the yellow indicator lights when the program stops
running without alarm.
65
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
electricity delay power-on control signal and keeps, at the moment, all press key operations are
invalid.
66
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
4.4.11 Appendix::
4.4.11.1 MDI input controlling M command table MDI
Note: When the operator inputs M command and the first digit is 0, it can be omitted. The command
functions are the same those of AUTO Working mode. The detailed is referred to
PROGRAMMING.
67
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Manual tapping function is to manually turn the spindle and the selected coordinate axis links along
the spindle to realize the tapping and thread run-out when the spindle stops.
In JOG working mode, the spindle stops stably. Press and the system enters the
spindle turn function state and prompts: “Inputting tapping axis (X/Y/Z).”
After pressing X/Y/Z to select the motion axis and pressing ENTER to enter the next operation, the
system prompts “Input tapping pitch (mm))”, input the pitch to press ENTER, the system enters the
manual tapping state. At the moment, the operator can manually control the spindle rotation, and the
tapping axis can rotate along the spindle rotation.
In manual tapping state, press ESC to escape the manual tapping state, the motion axis decelerates
to stop when the tapping axis escapes in the motion state.
【Functional description】
The function is valid in JOG working mode, the tapping in manual tapping state moves along the
spindle rotation.
The axis motion speed is determined by the spindle speed and the pitch, the axis motion
direction is determined by the pitch sign as follows:
When P is positive and the spindle turns CCW, the coordinate axis moves negatively; When the
spindle turns CW, the coordinate axis moves positively
When P is negative and the spindle turns CCW, the coordinate axis moves positively; When the
spindle turns CW, the coordinate axis moves negatively.
【Note】
1) When the speed in tapping is too fast or there is the limit alarm, the system automatically
escapes the tapping and alarms.
2) The pitch P is expressed with the metric, range: 0.001mm~500.000mm(the negative sign is
added to the front of the range, i.e. “dextrorotaion” or “levorotation” tapping).
In AUTO working mode, the system displays at the top right. Press it and the system pops-up the
operation key catalog in AUTO working mode; press it and the window closes; directly press other function keys,
and the window automatically closes.
Press and the system enter AUTO Working mode. The system completes the part machining
of the specified machining program in AUTO Working mode; the system runs from the first line of the
selected workpiece program, and gradually executes till the program ends.
The system combines the operator parameter table, offset value to analyze and precheck the part
68
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
programs. When the system prechecks the problem, executing the machining program causes the
serious result and the system closes the Cycle start key. In the condition, pressing CYCLE START
key is invalid and the system refuses to execute the program; the system can execute after the
program or the parameter is modified according to the alarm message.
The system provides many part program execution modes, and the operator must set before
running to get the safety of machining process.
◆ Main functions in AUTO Working mode:
1)Set SINGLE/CONTINUOUS run program
2)Set DRY RUN(without output) check run, and the system accelerates to execute the program
in DRY RUN mode.
3)Precheck the software limit alarm before running programs
4)Set blocks and execute the middle of the program
5)Spindle, cooling press key control
6)Execute machining programs by pause, block stop, end stop, cycle stop
7)Tune cutting speed override proportion
8)Correct offset in execution process
9)Real-time state display of machine, pop-up window real-time alarm
◆ display content on screen as Fig. 4-7:
Upper Top: display the execution mode (SINGLE/ CONTINUOUS, DRY RUN), current program
number, workpice count, machining time; system function operation method prompt key ;
Left top: display tool nose coordinates and machine coordinates, or tool nose path graph or
workpiece contour graph;
Left bottom: display machining block (pointer points to the current block);
Right middle: display the current state of machine, including spindle, cooling, lubricating, tool
post,
chuck, tailstock, speed, cutting speed and so on;
Pop-up window: display alarm message of execution program.
Upper top
AUTO Continuous %001 Workpiece count:1 Machining time:00:00:
Pop-up
window
X 0289.850
ESP alarm T 01 00
M41 S0500
G97 S0200r
Left bottom N0000 G00 Z300 X100 G98 F30
N0010 G01 W-50.000 U20.000 F100
F00100
69
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
In AUTO working mode, the system is in several mode according to execute workpiece programs;
when the system is in different states, it permits the functions are different; there are several states as
follows:
Initial state: it is the execution pointer of the program points to the first line but the system has not
executed; the system is just now switched from other mode to AUTO Working mode
to enter the initial state or returns the initial state after the program is executed or the
system alarms.
Run state: the system is executing the block and the coordinate axis is moving.
Pause state: the current block has not executed completely in the course of executing the axis
motion command to pause; the system waits the operator presses the key to execute
the operation.
Block stop state: the current block has been executed and the next has not executed, the system
waits the operator presses the key to execute the operation.
Press and the system switches SINGLE/CONTINUOUS circularly; (it is valid in any states).
In continuous execution, press the key and the system switches to SINGLE working mode, after the
current block is executed, the system stops, and continuously executes after CYCLE START is
pressed.
In CONTINUOUS working mode, press CYCLE START, and the program is executed from the
beginning to the end.
In SINGLE working mode, press CYCLE START key once and the system executes one block (for the
cycle command, the system only executes one operation; press CYCLE START, and the system
executes one operation).
Check all content of machining programs in dry run, which can ensure the machining workpiece is not
discarded because of some programming data error in the program.
Dry run/ machining run switch
Press , and the system switches dry run/automatic machining run mode
In DRY working mode, whether M, S,T is valid is set by the parameter, coordinates of each axis
automatically recover the previous before the Dry working mode.
Relative parameters in DRY Run working mode:
P401_d7:
70
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
0:When the system executes the miscellaneous command, it must output the signal, check the
signal, which is the same that of the normal machining.
1:The system does not output the signal and check the signal when the system executes the
miscellaneous command.
P401_d6:
0:The execution speed of feed command is set by the program, which is the same that of the
normal machining.
1:The execution speed of feed command is not set by the program, max. speed (P113) of cutting
feed displays the program path.
【Notes】
1) The dry run key is valid when the program is executed in the initial state. In the course of
program execution, the key is invalid and cannot be switched when the program does not end
and the system has not escaped the execution state.
2) P401_d7=0: in DRY RUN working mode, all miscellaneous command M, S, T are executed;
the system recovers to the previous state when it escapes from the dry run state.
3) P401_d7=1: in DRY RUN working mode, the system does not output and check the signal
when it executes the miscellaneous function; when the system executes T function, the tool
offset number is executed (when the previous is T11, it becomes T13 after T33 is executed),
the system recovers to the previous after it escapes from the DRY RUN working mode.
4) In DRY RUN working state, all macro command and M60~M74 are normally executed; after
the system modifies the offset and the system escapes from the DRY RUN working mode, the
tool nose coordinates of corresponding tool offset number are changed.
5) The workpiece counter does not automatically add 1 in DRY RUN working mode.
After entering AUTO working mode, the system enters the initial state, and the program pointer points
to the first block of the current program, and CYCLE START key is pressed to start the program to
automatically run.
The being executed block displays and flashes in poor color; the first line is the executed block, and
the 3rd line is to be executed; when the machining program is the conditional command, the skip or
call target is not well-defined, and the 3rd line may not be displayed.
71
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
In some special conditions, it is necessary to start to run from some block in a part program. This
system allows starting any one block of current part program. (it is valid in initial state)
1)Press INPUT, and the system pops-up the program browse window, displays the current
program and the pointer points to the first block of program.
When the part program is running, this system displays the running state, the dynamic run
coordinate, the workpiece planar solid graph, and the path of tool nose in the course of program
running, which is very convenient to monitor the running state of the machine and the program.
The display as follows:
The dynamic coordinates or the dynamic tool nose movement path graph or workpiece
contour graph.
Current block content.
Spindle, cooling, lubricating, tool, speed, chuck, tailstock, and machine miscellaneous
function state.
Feedrate override, rapid override.
Machining time.
Workpiece count.
72
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Because the display area of this system is limited, the different scale is employed to display the
whole graph of part. The length, the diameter of blank, the initial offset of tool and the display
scale are defined by the system. Press to define the above-mentioned data when the
system is in initial state as Fig. 4-8:
AUTO Auto Run %001 Pieces:1 Process:00:00:00
Z Size : 286 mm
X Size : 260 mm
Z Offset : 74 mm T 01 00
X Offset : 0 mm
Scale : 30 mm/grid
100%
Custom
Z 0273.595 100%
30mm/grid X0~300
: Z74~494
: X 0166.523 S01 S0500
S01 S0200 r
In graph display, the horizontal scale graduation line means Z coordinate dimension, the vertical
scale graduation line means X coordinate dimension; firstly confirm the display graph area, the
customized graph display area is as follow:
Z: (Z offset ~ Z offset +display proportion ×14);
X: (X offset ~ X offset + display proportion ×5×2);
Example:X:300 ← 600 Z:-200 ← 220
1)Intersection coordinates between Z scale graduation line and X scale graduation line
are called Z offset and X offset(unit: mm).
2)Z scale graduation line is divided into 14.5 grids. X scale graduation line is divided into
5 grids, and each grid is divided into two small grids.
3)Each grid length is called the display proportion, the display proportion is to confirm the
displayed workpice shape proportion which is not related to the actual machining
proportion.
4)When the workpiece dimension is too big, the system selects the proportion zoom in,
when it is too small, the system selects the proportion zoom out to get the excellent
display effect.
After the system enters the part contour graph, the machining workpiece blank lengths of Z scale
graduation line and X scale graduation line are Z length and X length (unit: mm):
Z: display proportion x Z grids of workpiece contour graph;
X: display proportion x X grids of workpiece contour graph x 2
The graph area is created by the customizing and the program. When the system the customizing,
the length, the offset, and the proportion can be modified; when the system selects the program
creation, they cannot be modified, at the moment, the area range preset by the system is the full
73
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
graph of program motion path, the length, the offset and the proportion cannot be modified and the
system enters the program setting execution state.
【Example】
Example: part blank length: 100mm; end face 2 is intersection of Z and X.
In the customizing mode, the set Z length is 100, X length is 40; Z offset is -100, X offset is 0;
proportion is 10.
20
100
In AUTO working mode without motion, press and the graph display data is as follows. Press
figure, and the cursor points to the required data to be modify. Press to delete the previous
data and input the data to modify.
● Input data (without decimal point) and press to delete the previous data, and then
input the new data. Press continuously and the graph data displays the window
cycle.
● Scale modification. When the cursor points to scale, press or to make the
Scale to circularly reduce or enlarge.
The system decided scale has 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500,
74
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
600. The user can select the proper display scale to get the best effect according to the actual
condition.
● Two kinds of selection of graph area: customizing and program creation. Press or
to select them. When the system selects the program creation: the modified data becomes
the changing state and the operator inputs the new data according to the need.
After rewriting the data, press ESC or ENTER and the system returns to AUTO working mode,
the system updates the displaying range of blank according to the set display data in the
graphics display mode.
When the set display data exceeds the screen displaying range, the system prompts X/Z
overlimit, and the display data must be rewritten again.
【Notes】
1) To correctly display the tool path, the initial position of the tool should be out of the display
range of the workpiece blank, otherwise, the system cannot correctly display the machining
process.
2) In program running, when the coordinate display is switched to the planar solid, the system
cannot normally display the workpiece shape until the next cycle start.
Workpiece count: when the program being executed once means the program ends (M02, M20,
M30), the machining quantity count adds 1, and max. count range is 99999,
and the count becomes 0 when it exceeds 0.
Machining time: record machining program execution time. When CYCLE START is pressed
and the system executes the program, the timing does not end till the program
ends. In running, the system pauses, and at the same time, the timing stops.
In SINGLE working mode, the system only records the run time of each block.
The system displays max. machining time range: 99 hours, 60 minutes and 60
seconds. When the machining time reaches the max. value, it automatically
becomes zero and continuously runs program and executes the timing again.
Workpiece count and machining time clearing: in initial state, continuously press twice and
the workpiece count clears; continuously press twice, and the machining time clears.
2)When P400_d5 is set to 0, spindle CW, CCW, stop key are valid:( invalid in run state).
3)In initial state, the spindle gear shifting key(speed change key) is valid.
4)In initial state, when the hydraulic chuck control function is valid, the external button or
pedal switch controls the hydraulic chuck clamping/releasing which interlocks with the
spindle.
5)In initial state, when the hydraulic tailstock control function is valid, the external button or
pedal switch controls the hydraulic tailstock forward/backward which interlocks with the
spindle.
CYCLE STOP: press CYCLE START to continuously execute the program after the cycle is
completed and the system pauses.
◆ Pause
1) Press CYCLE START and the system pauses in executing the command. After the system
responds, each motion axis decelerates to stop, which Pause is displayed on the
bottom-left.
2) In pause state, press CYCLE START, and the system recovers the program to continuously
execute the left; press ESC, the program escapes and the system returns to the auto Initial
state, and the pointer points to the first block of the current program.
【Notes】
1)After the pause, the system can control the spindle, the chuck and the tailstock; before
CYCLE START is pressed, ensure the spindle is started, the chuck and the tailstock have
been ready, otherwise, which maybe damage the machine and hurt the persons.
2)When the system follows the blocks for the spindle machining thread in executing G32, G33,
G34, G92, the press key is invalid.
◆ Single block stop
1)In continuously executing the program, press SINGLE and the system is switched to the single
block execution mode, and when the current block is executed, the system displays Single
block stop.
2)After the single block stops, press CYCLE START and the program continuously runs. Press
ESC and the system returns to the auto initial state and the pointer points to the first block of
the current program.
【Note】
1)In executing the fixed cycle command, the single block stop is valid after each step of the fixed
cycle is completed.
◆ Cycle end stop
1)In continuously executing the program, press hp6 and the system displays CYCLE STOP:
ON , and the system displays CYCLE STOP after M20 is executed.
78
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
slider when the knob is placed on the different position. Use the knob to control conveniently the
starting/stopping of spindle and the slide in debugging the program. There are three positions of feed
hold knob and its function as follows:
When the knob is rotated from 1 to 2, the slider stops and the spindle still keeps the previous
state.
When the knob is rotated from 3 to 2, the spindle recovers the previous state.
When the knob is rotated from 2 to 1, the slider starts to run.
The system will automatically escapes from the auto initial state after ESC or RESET is pressed
in the course of the feed hold and the spindle stopping. The previous state of spindle and the
unfinished commands cannot be reserved. Programs are restarted if the machining is executed
continuously.
pin.
P412_d7=0: the system external feed hold knob is invalid; the pin of input signal can be used as
others.
The external pause operation key signal (SP) has the same function with that of the feed hold
key (cycle pause key) on the machine panel; the external cycle start key signal (ST) has the same
function with that of the cycle start key on the machine panel. SP, ST are input to the system from
the machine, and they are valid when the low level is connected.
Before the system is switched from other working mode to AUTO working mode, “External start
button” is released (power-off), otherwise, the system alarms.
The detailed circuit connection method is referred to CONNECTION, Chapter 3 CNC Device
Connection.
The system pops-up the window to modify the offset value in machining and the operator must
be careful.
number; press and to select the required modification tool offset, and the
detailed operations are referred to OPERATION, 4.7 OFFSET Working Mode.
3)Press INPUT to input the data. Press ENTER when the input data directly replaces the
previous. Press ALTER when the operator modifies the previous data. Press ESC to cancel
the input data.
4)Press OFFSET or press ESC to escape the offset display window after the input is
completed.
80
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
【Notes】
1)In inputting the data, the system can be switched to the display window in AUTO working mode
and switched to the offset display window, the previous input data reserves and the system
can continuously input.
2)In offset display window, pause, modifying federate override operations are valid in AUTO
working mode. In pause, the system can be switched to the offset display window to modify
the offset.
The function is valid in any states in AUTO and JOG working mode.
In automatically machining part programs, the system pops-up the window to search the macro
variable, I/O variable and others in running process as follows:
Variable: search all common variable used in the program, and modify the common variable
value;
I/O variable: search the interface variable value (i.e. the system interface state);
Others: search the executed block quantity, the spindle wave range in the thread machining,
program nested call layers and program cycle in executing subprogram.
◆ operation method as follows:
1)In automatic running, press and the system pops-up the window to display the variable,
I/O variable and others), press ESC again and the system closes the window.
2)Press , to select the required searching items and the selected item is
displayed in black.
3)When there are many variables are searched, press to select the variable(it is pointed
by the pointer), at the moment, the macro variable cannot be changed; press or
81
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
to search the front or the latter one macro variable; press or to search
the variable in the page up or page down with 7 lines in each page; press to escape,
at the moment, the macro variable is displayed in black.
4)In auto initial state, press ENTER and the common variable pointed by the pointer can be
modified.
5)Press ESC to escape the display window.
【Explanation 】
1)Macro variable: display the running common variable edited to the program, including variable
number, variable name, variable value and state. The variable value is displayed in the
dynamic along the program changing in running, the number and variable name are sorted
from the small to the big. Variable r001~r040 are displayed in brown, r041~r99 in orange,
r100~r199 in green.
2)I/O variable: display in dynamic the interface state of current running program. Two kinds of
state value of input interface variable: 0 (LOW) or 1 (HIGH); the external signal valid and the
pin is connected with 0V in LOW; it is invalid in HIGH. The out interface variable state: when
the system output “0”, the external forms the conductive loop; when the system output “1”, the
system is in high-resistance, and the external cannot form the conductive loop. r1001~r1025
are the input interface states; r2001~r2025 are the output interface states; 8 groups to display,
the first line displays the first group: r1008, r1007, r1006, r1005, r1004, r1003, r1002, r1001
and others is in order reason by analogy.
3)Others: search the executed block quantity, the spindle wave range in the thread machining,
program nested call layers and program cycle in executing subprogram.
4)Before the system does not start the machining program, macro variable can be modified
manually, the modification method is to select the required modification macro variable, the
operator presses ENTER to input the value to change, presses ENTER again and the
modification is completed.
82
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
block of the program. At the moment, press CYCLE START and the system starts running the fist
block.
4.5.10 System reset and emergence stop signal processing in AUTO working mode
brightest; press the brightness regulation key increases LCD brightness, press
【Notes】
1)When LCD is LED in poor, the brightness regulation function is valid to LCD; when LCD is
CCFL in poor, the brightness regulation function is valid to LCD.
2)There is no operation in it when the brightness regulation window closes automatically in 10
seconds.
83
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
3)LCD brightness can be regulated in JOG working mode, and its regulation method is the same
with that in AUTO working mode.
Press to cancel the mistaken input when the input letter or digit is wrong.
Press to escape the current operation before confirmation when the operator executes some setting or some
operation or man-machine dialog.
Note: before the operator modifies the parameter, all parameter setting values in the system
must be saved(save them to personal PC). Once the parameter is changed by mistake or the
system, the system can recover by the saved data.
The system classifies the parameters: reference point coordinate parameter, motion parameter,
transmission parameter, miscellaneous function parameter, interface parameter, variable initial value
parameter and pitch parameter.
Press to enter PARAMETER working mode. (the system pops-up the window to
require inputting the password, the operator inputs the password or directly presses ENTER to
enter the parameter window).
M – Datum Co.
P000 Z reference point 303.698
X– Move. Para P001 X reference point 203.698
Z-– Driven para P002 Y reference point 0.000
S– Auxiliar P003 Z 2
nd
ref. point 200.000
T– Bit com. P004 X 2
nd
ref. point 200.000
nd
U– Interface P005 Y 2 ref. point 200.000
rd
W– Varaible P006 Z 3 ref. point 200.000
rd
P007 X 3 ref. point 200.000
F– Thread para
2) When the operator directly presses ENTER instead inputting the password, the operation
level is 4 to enter the parameter window in which the operator only reads but cannot modify
the parameter.
3) For the parameter input and display format, the decimal must has the decimal point, and the
negative number must has the negative sign; the system limits the valid digits to get the
convenient operation and using safety.
4) The operator can open the prompt message window of parameter data input range.
5) The system automatically checks the parameter data after power-on and automatically
prompts the initialization when it finds out the data in disorder.
6) The system set the applicable safety parameters and the operator can reduce the accidences
caused by the mistaken operation by the proper parameter setting.
85
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The parameter permitted to modify by the system is displayed in yellow and the forbidden is
displayed in white in the current privilege.
In the parameter window, some operation option is related to the privilege; press hp6 and the
forbidden functions are displayed in grey.
Prompt message display:
The parameter value range can be opened or closed when the operator input the parameter.
other display:
When the input exceeds the modification parameter, the system prompts No modification
privilege in the parameter setting area.
In the parameter window, when the successfully modified parameter has a remark “*” before it
parameter number, the system prompts the modification is completed successfully.
After the system executes some operations in hp6, the system displays the operation results and
the successfully modified parameter has a remark “*” before it parameter number to prompt the
modification having been completed successfully.
【Parameter privilege】
For the different privilege, the parameter which can be modified is displayed in yellow, the
forbidden is displayed in white. The parameter update (using the serial, USB to transmit the
parameters) is to modify the parameter data in the current privilege.
Privilege modification
The privilege modification is controlled by the password, and the password input is executed
when the system enters the parameter password input window. Whether the password can be
memorized is controlled by P416_d7. P416_d7=0: it is not memorized, and the system enters the
parameter window in other working modes and the parameter password input window is displayed as
follows:
1)Modify P416_d7=0;
2)Press the menu key in any working modes except for PARAMETER working mode;
3)Press PARAMETER to enter the parameter password input window;
4)Directly input the operation privilege password;
5)Press ENTER after the input is completed, and the system enters the operation level
corresponding to the password.
【Parameter save】
The successfully modified parameters are automatically saved to the system, and all parameters are
saved when the system escapes from the parameter window (entering the window in the other
working mode by press key). When the system is turned on every time, it reads the saved parameter
data. When the saved data in read exceeds the range, it is rewritten to the minimum in the range and
the system prompts it. The read parameter in disorder in power-on, the system prompts whether the
previous solidified parameter is read; when the parameters have not been solidified, the system
prompts to select the stepper/servo parameter to execute the parameter initialization and to save
them to the system. The main differences between the stepper and servo parameter are the different
86
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
The system parameter has been initialized before the factory delivery. The operator can modify
and regulate correspondingly the parameters according to the actual conditions of the machine.
The system displays the selected parameter number in highlight after the parameter is selected.
number which needs to search; the bit parameter: press , to left or right
move the cursor to select the different bit, and the bit definition of the selected bit changes.
Method 2:
Directly position to the required parameter as follows:
Press P and input the required parameter number which needs to search, and then press
ENTER. The system displays the parameter in highlight. Example: for searching P208, firstly input P,
and then input 2 0 8, press ENTER and the parameter P208 has been found.
③ Press to delete the mistaken data and input again the correct data.
④ Press ENTER to confirm the operation.
【Notes】
1)When the input data exceeds the parameter limit range, the input data is valid and the
parameter content does not change.。
2)After the data is input , ESC is pressed and the input data is invalid.
3)Bit parameter input is as follows:
① After the required parameter which needs to modify is selected, the operator can modify the
parameter bit by the left/right direction key (prompt the current bit explanation at the bottom
screen) .
87
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
② Single bit modification: directly input the data which needs to modify(“0” or “1”: pressing other
keys to input are invalid).
③ Modifying all bit: it is the same that of general parameter manual setting from left to right to
input. For example: input 11, the parameter after the operator presses ENTER is modified
into: 00000011; input 11000000, the parameter after the operator presses ENTER is modified
into: 11000000;
④ Bit parameter P411_d6: when it is changed, the pitch compensation parameter P1000~
P1900 is initialized to 0, and it covers the previous pitch compensation parameter value.
The operator can perform the communication, draw, solidifying, upgrade the system software,
and update the whole memory according to the password level; select “I” parameter to perform the
draw; select “K” to solidify the parameter; select “F” to upgrade the software (or by USB or RS232 to
upgrade the software); select “D” to update the whole memory.
When the system executes the data solidifying and draw, it must not be turned off, and the
operator cannot execute the other operations before the operation is performed. The data solidifying
and draw do not influence the part programs in the system.
88
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
90
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
91
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
draw command includes: stepper parameter initialization, servo parameter initialization and machine
manufacturer parameter draw.
【Explanation】
1 ) Before executing the parameter solidifying operation, the system should check the
corresponding parameter, and the system prompts the alarm message to require the
operator to modify the corresponding parameter when the system find the parameter
problem exists; after the parameter passes the check, it is saved to the system FLSAH to
solidify.
2) The parameter solidifying operation must be executed before the solidified parameter draw.
92
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
EDIT working mode to edit the current program once after the upgrade is completed successfully,
otherwise, the system alarms.
The parameters are described according to the functions and uses and their detailed definitions are
the followings.
The parameter is used to limiting the motion range of tool nose coordinates. It confirms the max.
positive/negative travel of tool post in Z, X, Y.
In JOG /AUTO working mode, the tool nose coordinates of Z, X, Y are more than or equal to the
positive tool nose software limit value, the axes only executes the negative instead of the positive
motion. Otherwise, the system alarms: positive tool nose software limit alarm. The negative motion is
also so.
【Positive/negative machine software limit of Z/X/Y】__reference coordinate parameter P015,
P016, P017, P018, P019, P020
The parameter is used to limiting the motion range of tool nose coordinates. It confirms the max.
negative travel of tool post in Z, X, Y.
In JOG /AUTO working mode, the machine coordinates of Z, X, Y are more than or equal to the
positive mechanical software limit value, the axes only executes the negative instead of the positive
motion. Otherwise, the system alarms: positive mechanical software limit alarm. The negative motion
is also so.
94
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
0: none. // it is set to 0 when the deceleration switch and block are not installed on the machine;
1: have. // it is set to 1 when the deceleration switch and block are installed on the machine.
d4__ Z has or not zero signal
d3__ X has or not zero signal
d2__ Y has or not zero signal
0: none. // it is set to 0 when the machine zero switch and block are not installed on the
machine;
1: have. // it is set to 1 when the machine zero switch and block are installed on the machine.
// The system has four kinds of zero return method and the detailed connection methods are
referred to CONNECTION as follows:
Zero return Deceleration Zero signal Remark
method signal
1 Have Have Use the deceleration signal and zero return signal to
return the zero coordinates of machine zero
2 Have None Use the deceleration signal to return to machine zero
3 None Have Use zero signal to return machine zero
4 None None Return to zero coordinates set by the parameter(no
machine zero)
【zero setting 2】__bit parameter P407(password class:1)
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 reserved
95
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
98
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
1: constant interval. // called the constant description method, each axis can be input 300
compensation points; the interval between two points is equal.
Because the compensation data formats of the inflection point description method and the
constant interval description method are different, the system prompts whether it confirms the
modification in modifying the bit parameter. When it confirms the modification, the previous
compensation data is cleared, the data is input according to the new format.
d5__tool nose radius compensation function
0: invalid. // tool nose radius compensation command G41, G42 are invalid.
1: valid. // tool nose radius compensation command G41, G42 are valid.
d4__tool radius compensation mode
0: linearity transition. // the system executing the closed angle mode is the linearity transition
in executing the tool nose radius compensation.
1: arc transition. // the system executing the closed angle mode is the arc transition in
executing the tool nose radius compensation.
d1__backlash compensation mode
0: low-speed. // Z/X/Y executes the backlash at the low speed, the low speed value is
P103, P104, P105.
1: fast. // Z/X/Y executes the backlash at the fast, the fast value is P100, P101, P102.
【F—pitch parameter】__pitch compensation parameter P1000~P1905
The pitch compensation parameters are divided into variable and constant interval according to
the setting of P411_d6.
The detailed is referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter 6 Pitch Error Compensation.
99
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
1: encoder. // the control signal of spindle gear is the encode output S00~S15.
// the parameter and P310 (spindle gear control covered lines) are used together. When the
setting is the direct output, each control line controls one gear, and the all gear quantity and P310
quantity are consistent; when the encode output is according to the used control line quantity, the
controlled total gear quantity is 2P310; max. setting 4-channel control line output is taken as the gear
control signal.
d4__switching the spindle and Y
0: do not switch. // the spindle does not work in the position control mode, forbid M47/M48.
1: switch. // the spindle switches between the position control mode and the speed control
mode, use M47/M48.
d3__spindle brake signal output
0: use. // output the brake signal MSP in executing M5.
1: do not use. // do not output the brake signal MSP in executing M5, MSP signal interface
is used to other interfaces control.
d2__spindle CCW signal output
0: use. // output the spindle rotation (CCW) signal M04
1: do not use. // forbid outputting the spindle (CCW) signal M04
When the spindle configuration is set to the frequency, M41, M42, M43, M44 execute the gear
shifting;
The system does not execute the gear shifting when the specified gear is consistent with the
current gear. The system executes the gear shifting when the specified gear is not consistent with the
current gear. Executing M41 outputs the analog voltage according to the parameter value; after
delaying (frequency spindle gear shifting time 1: parameter P311), close the previous gear output
signal and output the new gear shifting signal; execute the next block after the system has checked
the gear shifting in-position signal; delaying (frequency spindle gear shifting time 2: P312), output the
spindle analog voltage according to the current gear setting value, and the gear shifting ends.
When the spindle configuration setting is the gear shifting, S00~S15 execute the gear shifting;
S gear shifting encoder output: execute 2, 3, 4 bit encode according to the spindle gear
controlling the covered line quantity.
【max. speed of M41, M42, M43, M44】__ miscellaneous parameter P300, P301, P302, P303
The parameter is max. spindle speed of M41, M42, M43, M44. When the system uses the
converter controlling the spindle and the spindle gear is M41, M42, M43, M44 and the system outputs
10V analog voltage, it corresponds to the max. speed of the machine. P300 P301 P302 P303
are invalid when the spindle multi-gear switching controls the spindle. (unit: r/min)
【Lowest speed of spindle with constant surface】__ miscellaneous parameter P304
The parameter defines the lowest speed in the constant surface cutting, the calculation formula
according to the constant surface cutting speed:
Surface speed=spindle speed *|X|*π/1000(X unit:mm,spindle speed unit: r/min)
When X is less than some value and the calculated spindle speed is less than P304 value, the
100
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
102
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
104
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
1: invalid. // cannot select the big override (x0.1mm gear) to rotate the MPG in JOG
working mode.
d3__rapid position mode
0: alone traverse. // each axis rapidly positions separately in G00.
1: interpolation traverse. // rapidly position in the proportion mode in G00.
d2__arc across high point processing mode
0: precise. // execute the precise processing the backlash in arc across the high point.
1: smooth. // execute the smooth processing the backlash in arc across the high point.。
d1__MPG axis selection
0: keyboard axis selection. // keyboard axis selection is valid.
1: external axis selection. // the external MPG control knob is valid and the keyboard axis
selection key is invalid.
// In JOG working mode, press MPG to switch MPG mode and the indicator lights and the system
displays states of the external MPG control knob, the axis selection knob and the movement
knob. The coordinates of the selected coordinate axis is displayed in highlight state.
【Efficiency setting 】__bit parameter P401(password level:3)
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 reserved reserved
106
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
107
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
P401_ d5=1: G01 does not use the high-speed connection and execute the front
acceleration/deceleration processing, and directly executes the post acceleration/deceleration
processing.
Arc processing:
P400_ d2=0: the system executes the arc precision process when the arc crosses the high
point. The arc command has the front acceleration/deceleration function, reduces speed to the
initial speed across the quadrant, and then executes the backlash, and the machining path
transits to the next quadrant, raises speed, and reduces speed before the machining is
completed. And the system executes the post acceleration/deceleration processing.
P400_ d2=1: the cutting command executes the continuous and smooth transition; the arc
command directly executes the post acceleration/deceleration processing instead of the front
acceleration/deceleration processing.
2) P401_ d4=1: the cutting command decelerates to zero; the post acceleration/deceleration
function is invalid:
G01 processing:
P401_ d5=0: G01 has the front acceleration/deceleration function, G01 and G01 perform
the connection transition with the best speed; all G01 moves to the end point of the block and
decelerates to zero, exactly positions the end point of the block; when the cutting speed is high,
the linearity path is precise and the transition point is smooth. At the moment, the post
acceleration/deceleration function does not greatly influence the path precision.
P401_ d5=1:G01 has the front acceleration/deceleration processing, decelerates to zero
after each cutting command is executed.
Arc processing:
P400_ d2=0: the system executes the arc precision process when the arc crosses the high
point. The arc command has the front acceleration/deceleration function, reduces speed to the
initial speed across the quadrant, and then executes the backlash, and the machining path
transits to the next quadrant, raises speed, and reduces speed before the machining is
completed. And the system executes the post acceleration/deceleration processing.
P400_ d2=1: the system executes the arc precision process when the arc crosses the high
point. The arc command has the front acceleration/deceleration function; when the backlash is 0, the
machining does not decelerate across the quadrant.
decelerates to stop, and the coordinates are consistent with the actual position;
1: emergency stop. // when it is set 1, it meets the hardware limit alarm, the motion axis
decelerates to stop, and the coordinates are not consistent with the actual position;
d6__spindle abnormal stop rotation check
0: check. // the system stops the feed, closes the spindle and alarms in cutting.
1: do not check.
// In JOG /AUTO working mode, after the spindle starts, the system automatically check the
spindle speed, it prompts “spindle rotation abnormality” when the spindle starts abnormally.
When the system stops rotating accidently in cutting feed, the system stops the feed, interrupts
the program execution, closes the spindle and alarms.
// When the spindle works in the low speed (less than 1 r/min), the system alarms, at the moment,
the parameter should be set to “1”. For the frequency spindle ,when the programming speed
is less than S0, the system does not check and alarm.
d5__interlock between chuck and spindle
0: interlock. //when the chuck and the spindle are interlock, the spindle stops but the chuck
cannot be controlled; the chuck releases but the spindle cannot be started.
1: releasing interlock.//when the chuck is not interlock with the spindle, starting the spindle is
not influenced by the chuck state, controlling the chuck is not influenced
by the spindle state.
d4__chuck respond signal consecutive check
0: do not alarm.
1: alarm. // the bit means whether the system real-time check the chuck state, and alarms
when the chuck releases. The control bit is valid when the chuck has the
respond signal.
d3__interlock between tailstock and spindle
0: interlock. // /when the tailstock and the spindle are interlock, the spindle stops but the
tailstock cannot be controlled; the tailstock releases but the spindle cannot be started.
1: releasing interlock. // when the tailstock is not interlock with the spindle, starting the spindle
is not influenced by the tailstock state, controlling the tailstock is not
influenced by the spindle state.
d2__tailstock respond signal consecutive check
0: do not alarm.
1: alarm. // the bit means whether the system real-time check the tailstock state, and alarms
when the tailstock releases. The control bit is valid when the tailstock has the
respond signal.
d1__Automatic MPG control
0: invalid. // using MPG to control rapid/federate override is invalid in AUTO working
mode.
109
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
1: valid. // using MPG to control rapid/federate override is valid in AUTO working mode.
d0__Automatic MPG mode
0: mode 1. // use the mode 1 to control MPG rapid/federate override.
1: mode 2. // use the mode 2 to control MPG rapid/federate override. Mode 1 and 2 are
referred to OPERATION, Chapter 4.5 AUTO Working Mode.
【Safety setting 2】__bit parameter P403(password level:3)
d7 d6 d5 d4 Reserved d2 d1 d0
110
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
completed.
The trail again commands include: T, chuck control(M10/M11) and tailstock control (M78//M79).
When the system executes these commands, it has not checked the corresponding valid input
signals, and has not completed the command operations in the limit time, the system prompts
whether the operator tries again. The system is in pause state when it prompts the trial message; at
the moment, the operator should check the relative input signal and execute the troubleshooting.
After the failure is resolved, the operator presses R key execute again the command which is just
now failure. After the re-execution is completed, the system is in pause state, and the operator
presses “CYCLE START” to continuously the machine. When the re-execution is not correction, the
operator should press “ESC” to escape the machining program.
d0__wait for stable speed before machining the thread
0: do not wait. // whether the system checks the spindle speed is stable in machining thread.
1:wait. // the system automatically checks whether the spindle speed is stable in machining
thread, and waits the stable speed to machine thread.
// The parameter is valid to G33, G92, G32, G34.
// The system checks the spindle speed instantaneously; when the spindle raises speed or
reduces speed, the system waits for the process to end and then machines the thread. When the
system executes immediately the thread command after changing the speed, maybe the checking
spindle speed function is invalid.
Example: in S1000 stable state, the system executes S200, and immediately executes G33, the
system immediately executes the program for check speed being stable, at the moment, the system
judges by mistake in S1000 stable state it is “having been stability”; because there is the time
difference between the system command and the spindle speed. It should suggest that the operator
should delay 0.3s between S200 and G33.
When the spindle with the low speed (below 10r/min) executes the thread cutting, the system
cannot have checked the spindle speed stability for a long time; at the moment, the parameter should
be set to “0” to cancel the function.
【Debugging setting】__bit parameter P404(password level:2)
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
The parameter is set for being convenient to the system being debugging, must be set to the
valid state in power-on, otherwise, it cannot play a role in protection.
d7__emergency stop alarm
0: check. // the external emergency stop signal function is valid.
1: shield. // the external emergency stop signal function is invalid.
d6__hardware limit alarm
0: check. // the hardware limit alarm function is valid.
1: shield. // the hardware limit alarm function is invalid.
d5__drive unit alarm
0: check. // the drive unit alarm function is valid.
111
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
112
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
1: LOW. // “Drive unit alarms” when Z, X, Y drive unit alarm input signal is LOW.
d1__controllable axis
0: without Y. // forbid using Y movement command.
1: with Y. // the controllable axis has Y, permits Y movement command.
d0__motor raising speed control
0: linear. // the motor reducing speed uses the linear control.
1: exponential. // the motor raising speed curve is the exponential curve or the tuned
exponential curve.
d7__window language
0: Chinese. // display in Chinese.
1: English. // display in English. (the option is invalid presently)
d6__system parameter and programming
0: diameter. // X command value is input in diameter, and X coordinate is displayed in
diameter.
1:radius. // X command value is input in radius, and X coordinate is displayed in radius.
// X coordinate value is expressed in radius and diameter. When the bit parameter is modified,
the system prompts whether it changes the parameter, if done, it changes the reference
coordinate parameters P001, P004, P007, P011, P012, P017, P018, P022, P025.
// After the bit parameter is modified, the system executes toolsetting and programming again,
otherwise, X data is not correct.
d5__coordinate system setting
0: front tool post. // the front tool post coordinate system definition: as PROGRAMMING
Chapter One Fig. 1-1.
1: rear tool post. // the rear tool post coordinate system definition: as PROGRAMMING,
Chapter One Fig. 1-1.
// the parameter is used to displaying the imaginary tool nose number icon in manual toolsetting;
in the manual toolsetting, the system uses the parameter to judge whether the operator uses
the front or rear tool post coordinate system to correctly display the position relationship
between the tool nose center and imaginary tool nose.
d3__least command unit
0: metric. // the command value unit is mm.
1: inch. // the command value unit is inch. (the option is invalid presently)
114
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
115
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
When G76 is executed, the related parameters of G76 can get the relative information of the thread
machining in advance, and the system automatically arrange the thread cutting and finally machines
the qualified thread .
【G76 tool angle P】__miscellaneous parameter P336
The parameter determines the angle of the neighboring two teeth. The actual angle is determined by
the tool angle and so P336 angle should be same that of the tool. Unit: degree.
【G76 finishing times L】__miscellaneous parameter P337
The parameter determines the thread finishing times.
【G76 finishing cutting amount R】__ miscellaneous parameter P338
The parameter determines the cutting amount of thread finishing. Unit:mm.
【G76 least cutting amount Q in roughing】__miscellaneous parameter P339
The parameter determines the least cutting amount of thread roughing. Unit: mm.
【Note】
1) When the system executes G76 ①,it automatically loads separately the values of P, L, R, Q
fields in G76 ① to P336, P337, P338, P339, because it must need these parameters in
executing ②.
2) When some or all of P, L, R, Q in G76 ① are ignored,it executes G76② according to P336,
P337, P338, P339 setting values.
118
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
【Notes】
1)Bit parameter P409_d4 =1:when the tailstock control function is valid; the tailstock forward in-position check
RM78, RM79 interface are invalid.
2)Bit parameter P410_d6 =0:when spindle S gear shifting controls; gear shifting in-position signal M41I, M42I,
M43I, M44I interfaces are invalid.
Standard Function General Variable Note: the parameter defines the release to be the
signal I/O name name variable
name
+LT Z/X/Y positive limit UI32 r1032 P404_d6=1: shield hardware limit alarm
-LT Z/X/Y negative limit UI31 r1031 P404_d6=1: shield hardware limit alarm
DecY Y deceleration signal UI30 r1030 P405_d1=0: without Y
P406_d5=0: without Y machine deceleration switch
DecX X deceleration signal UI29 r1029 P406_d6=0: without X machine deceleration
switch
DecZ Z deceleration signal UI28 r1028 P406_d7=0: without Z machine deceleration switch
SP External pause signal UI27 r1027 P412_d7=0: without external start/ pause signal
ST External cycle start UI26 r1026 P412_d7=0: without external start/ pause signal
signal
MXZ1 Feed hold signal UI16 r1016 P412_d6=0: without external feed hold knob
MXZ2 Spindle/feed hold signal UI15 r1015 P412_d6=0: without external feed hold knob
RM10 Chuck clamping UI14 r1014 P409_d7=1: chuck control function is invalid
in-position check P409_d5=0: do not need the chuck respond check
RM11 Chuck releasing UI13 r1013 P409_d7=1: chuck control function is invalid
in-position check P409_d5=0: do not need the chuck respond check
TPS Tailstock pedal switch UI12 r1012 P409_d4=1: tailstock control function is invalid
input P409_d0=1 hydraulic tailstock pedal switch inputs
SHL Chuck pedal switch UI11 r1011 P409_d7=1: chuck function control function is invalid
input P409_d1=1: hydraulic chuck pedal switch input
PRES Pressure low check UI10 r1010 P412_d5=0: without pressure low check
TCP Tool post locking UI09 r1009 P318=0: line-up tool post
in-position signal P318=9:M60 customizes the command tool change
P408_d6=0: without tool post lock in-position signal
T8 Tool selection signal T8 UI08 r1008 P318=0 or 9: P320=0 release
T7 Tool selection signal T7 UI07 r1007 P318=0 or 9: P320<2 release
T6 Tool selection signal T6 UI06 r1006 P318=0 or 9: P320<3 release
T5 Tool selection signal T5 UI05 r1005 P318=0 or 9: P320<4 release
T4 Tool selection signal T4 UI04 r1004 P318=0 or 9: P320<5 release
T3 Tool selection signal T3 UI03 r1003 P318=0 or 9: P320<6 release
T2 Tool selection signal T2 UI02 r1002 P318=0 or 9: P320<7 release
T1 Tool selection signal T1 UI01 r1001 P318=0 or 9: P320<8 release
123
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Standard signal Function General Variable Note: the parameter defines the release to be the
name I/O name variable
M79 Tailstock UO16 r2016 P409_d4=1: tailstock control function is invalid
backward
M78 Tailstock UO15 r2015 P409_d4=1: tailstock control function is invalid
forward
M10 Chuck UO14 r2014 P409_d7=1: chuck control function is invalid
clamping
M11 Chuck UO13 r2013 P409_d7=1: chuck control function is invalid
releasing
TL+ Tool post CW UO12 r2012 P318=0: line-up tool
output P318=9:M60 customizes the command to tool change
TL- Tool post CCW UO11 r2011 P318=0: line-up tool
output P318=9:M60 customizes the command to tool change
M8 Cooling ON UO10 r2010
M9 Cooling OFF UO09 r2009 P410_d7=0: spindle control: level mode
MSP Spindle UO08 r2008 P410_d3=1: spindle brake signal output none
brake signal
M3 Spindle UO07 r2007
rotation CW
M4 Spindle rotation UO06 r2006 P410_d2=1: spindle CCW rotation signal needless
CCW
M5 Spindle stop UO05 r2005 P410_d7=0: spindle control: level mode
S04/M44 Spindle gear UO04 r2004 P310<4: release the signal cover 0/1/2/3 channel
output
S03/M43 Spindle gear UO03 r2003 P310<3 release the signal cover 0/1/2 channel
output
S02/M42 Spindle gear UO02 r2002 P310<2: release the signal cover 0/1 channel
output
S01/M41 Spindle gear UO01 r2001 P310=0: release the signal cover 0 channel
output
OFFSET working mode: the system executes the compensation to the tool offset. The system prompts the
corresponding intellective prompt message for each operation. At the same time, the operator can press the prompt
key hp2 at the right top, and the detailed offset operation key.
The relative settings, operation input formats and example descriptions are as follows: all required function
keys are expressed with icons; all input letter keys, or digit keys are expressed with underline; the system prompting
message is expressed with frame.
Press to cancel the mistaken input when the input letters or digits are wrong.
Press to escape the current operation before confirmation when the operator executes some setting or
some operation or man-machine dialog.
The system sets 64 groups of tool offset value T01~T64, each tool offset number corresponds to
one group. Each group separately records Z offset value, X offset value, R tool radius, T tool shape, S
toolsetting record.
◆ Main functions in OFFSET working mode include:
☆ Select, modify, clear tool offset data;
☆ Transmit tool offset data between U disc and CNC system by USB interface;
☆Transmit tool offset data between PC and CNC system by RS232 communication interface;
☆Transmit tool offset data between two CNC systems by RS232 communication interface;
OFFSET hp2
OFFSET No. Z X R T S
01 0001.111 -0001.111 0000.100 0 00
The tool offset value search, i.e. search the required tool offset value as follows:
Method 1: scan
The operator can search the concrete content of each tool offset value in OFFSET working mode.
Press , to search the previous or the next tool offset value. Press , to
search the offset value on the previous page or the next page and there are 7 lines in each page.
Method 2: search
P + offset number + ENTER .
4)Input the required data by keyboard. Press to cancel the mistaken input and input the
correct again.
5)Press ENTER to confirm the input, save the input data to the current selected too offset
number parameter area.
125
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
6)The data which has been modified has “*” before it , which means the modification is
successfully executed.
1)Select the OFFSET working mode; move the highlight to the required changing data.
3)Input data by keyboard. Press to cancel the mistaken input data and input the correct.
Press ALTER and the system operates the input data and the previous number value of the
selected parameter. When the input is positive, the system adds the input data to the
previous number value of the selected parameter to save the parameter area. When the input
is negative, the system subtracts the input data to the previous number value of the selected
parameter to save the tool offset parameter area corresponding to the current tool number.
U – USB interface
R – RS232 interface
Z – OFT clear zero
ESC – exit
126
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
compiled according to the required standard format and then are sent to the system, the concrete
rules are as follows:
1) On PC, the offset file name should be named to TXT or LST suffix, such for “OFT088.TXT”; it
is suggested that the user should use TXT suffix to operate the parameter file on PC.
2) The home of the file content must the offset mark: “CNC_GSK928TEA”;the item must exist.
TXT
3) The 2nd line is the annotation with “//” before it; list orderly the offset number, Z offset value, X
offset value, tool radius, tool shape, toolsetting record.
4) The offset content is listed from the 3rd line. The offset content must be meet the standard
format requirements.
For example: T01: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
◆ too number range(01~64)exceeds which is taken as the mistake;
◆ Offset number format: T + number(01~64) + : ,they are necessary;
◆ The offset data for each line must be separated by the comma;
◆ There are only 5 offset data in each line, exceeding 5 means there is the illegal character
in the offset data.
◆ When some line has not enough offset data(it is not composed of Z offset value,+ X offset
value + R tool radius + T tool shape + S toolsetting record), the offset processing arranges
the offset data from left to right: Z offset value, X offset value , R tool radius , T tool shape ,
S toolsetting record; the data before each line must be correct when the system updates
the data following each line. Z, X, R values do not excess its separate range.
【Example】
CNC_GSK928TEa
//tool number Z tool offset X tool offset tool nose radius imaginary tool nose locking tool
number
T01: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00002.000, 0, 00
T02: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
T03: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
T04: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
T05: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
T06: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
T07: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
………………………………………………………………………………..
T63: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
T64: 00000.000, 00000.000, 00000.000, 0, 00
127
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Press to enter the DIAGNOSIS working mode and the display is as Fig.4-12::
Firstly set P415_d3=1: search Chinese concrete content in each I/O in DIAGNOSIS working
mode according the prompt in diagnosis window; when the parameter setting is closed, the operator
cannot see the concrete Chinese content.
The system has 23-channel switching input signals, 18-channel switching output signals; each
signal has one name, which means to be the signal definition.
128
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
General signal name: the input signal names are UI01~UI32, the output signal names are
UO01~ UO32, each signal corresponds to one pin. UI17~UI25 are not exported and UO19~ UO32
are not exported in interfaces.
Standard signal name: is called exclusive signal name. For a special machine, once some signal
is covered by some special function, it has special name used for memory. The system set the
standard exclusive signal name for the used signal of all functions.
In the diagnosis display window, the signals used by the special functions are expressed with the
standard signal name; it means the set function is valid in the parameter. The initial parameter has
used most miscellaneous functions, so the displayed most pin signal number is the standard signal
name, the displayed unused signal are the general signal name.
Detailed explanation and connection method of general signal name and standard signal name
are referred to CONNECTION.
In input interface diagnosis display, when one external signal is valid, the corresponding bit
display is 0; when it is invalid, the display is 1. The input interface signal diagnosis is executed
circularly, the system anytime displays the current signal state.
Input interface signal definition is defined by the parameter, changing corresponding setting of
the parameter can change the input interface signal definition.
【Example】
When the standard configuration of the electronic tool post is 4 tool selections.
When the system allocates the electronic tool post with 4 tool selections, the diagnosis message
is as follows:
P320 is set to 4; P319 is set to 4; P318 is set 1:electronic tool post.
The top left displays T1 ~ T4 diagnosis message in the diagnosis input interface window.
Each bit display is 0 in the output interface diagnosis, the corresponding bit output is valid. When
the display is 1, the corresponding bit output is invalid. The output interface diagnosis display is the
current each output big hold state. When the signal is pulse, the bit is still 1 although the output is
valid.
Output interface signal definition is defined by the parameter, and changing the corresponding
setting of the parameter can change the definition of output interface signal.
Move the cursor by the direction key to the required writing output signal, press 1 or 0 to
change the output signal value where the cursor is, when it is different with the current value, it is
displayed in red; and it is the same with the current value, it is displayed in yellow.
129
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Note】
When the diagnosis output interface operation is used in the system debugging, the parameter
password level is more than 2 to perform the operations.
The system can check and display the pulse per rev of the spindle encoder, and the check result
automatically displays the encoder lines.
The encoder lines mean the pulse per rev of the encoder.
The spindle speed means the current spindle actual speed(unit: r/min).
【Explanations】
1)When the spindle doest not start, the spindle speed and encoder lines are displayed to zero.
2)When the checked encoder lines are not consistent with the P209 spindle encoder lines, the
system prompts: [Diagnosis check prompts]: the encoder lines are not consistent with the
parameter.
3)When the spindle encoder rotates synchronously with the spindle, i.e. when the spindle
rotates one circle, the encoder rotates one circle; otherwise, the checked spindle speed is
not consistent with the actual value.
Press 1- search the color encoder: display 256 kinds of color and codes. For example: 00 means
to be black and FF means to be white;
Press 2-keyboard test: test the keyboard;
Press 3-search CPLD pulse quantity: display X/Y/Z pulse quantity;
Press 4- version message: display the system version message: the software, CPLD version
message, software version load operation.
【Notes】
1) It is suggested that the user does not use hp6 function key.
2) For the safety, the password level should be more than 2 to execute the software upgrade.
Operate the miscellaneous function keys on the operation panel instead of the input commands
in DIAGNOSIS working mode to execute the machine miscellaneous function.
130
Operation Chapter Four System Operation
Press : the spindle rotates clockwise. P410_d7=0: LED indicator lights, M3 corresponding
bit in the output interface is displayed to 0. (P410_d7=1: LED indicator lights,
M3 output in the output interface is first value, and after the pulse output is
completed, M3 corresponding bit is displayed to 1).
Press : the spindle stops. (P410_d7=1: the diagnosis output interface window displays
M5.)
Press : switch cooling ON/OFF once. When the cooling is ON, LED indicator lights, M8
corresponding bit in the output interface is displayed to 0; when the cooling
is OFF, LED indicator is OFF and M8 corresponding bit in the output
interface is displayed to 1.
Press : the spindle motor circularly executes S01~S04 or S00~S15 (specified according
to P410_d5 setting)
Press : the tool post rotates to next tool selection, and the system displays the tool
selection state in the corresponding position of the input interface T1~T4.
【Note】
Press to circularly execute the spindle motor S01~S04 or S00~S15. Firstly, the spindle must
be the gear shifting spindle, i.e. P410_d6 is set to 0.
131
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The system transmits part programs, system parameters, system software, offset and so on by
RS232 and USB interface; the concrete operation methods of the system and the part program
transmission are referred to OPERATION, 4.3.3 EDIT Working mode; the concrete operations of
tool offset transmission is referred to OPERATION, 4.7.4 OFFSET Working mode.
RS232 communication is the serial interface communication mode, and the system realizes the
data exchange between CNC and PC, CNC and CNC by the serial communication cables.
Sending and receiving file between CNC and PC can be realized by the communication software
GSK928_COM.EX, which is simple and convenient, and has the high communication efficiency and
stability.
1)Requirements of PC:
Hardware: general PC with RS232, serial communication cable( three-line);
Operation system: Microsoft Windows 98/2000/2003/XP.
2)GSK928_COM.EXE communication software introduction:
The detailed is referred to communication software GSK928_COM.EXE on PC.
【Ready operations before communication】
1) Connect the communication cable when PC and CNC are OFF: insert DB9 socket into the
front cover RS232 communication interface of the CNC, and insert another DB9 socket into
PC pin 9 serial interface (COM1 or COM2);
2) PC selects the port and baud rate for communication. The communication baud rate is
determined by the sender setting.
◆GSK928_COM.EXE communication software port setting on PC:
Click “Port number” by left key to select the communication serial port after the
communication software runs.
◆GSK928_COM.EXE communication software baud setting on PC:
After the system runs the communication software, the user can click the left key to select
the “Baud rate”(setting: 38200 (unit: b/s)).
3) The CNC sets P414_d7, P414_d6 communication baud: the concrete parameter setting is
referred to OPERATION 4.6 PARAMETER Working mode.
132
Operation Chapter Five System Communication
For being convenient to the user, the system permits the mutual data transmission between two
CNC systems (they are both GSK928TEa), the CNC system to send the data is the sender, and the
one to receive the data is the receiver as follows:
CNC1 CNC2
Sender receiver
【Ready operations before communication】
1) Connect the communication cable when the two CNC systems are OFF: insert DB9 socket
into the front cover RS232 communication interface of the CNC, and insert another DB9
socket into PC pin 9 serial interface (COM1 or COM2);
2) PC selects the port and baud rate for communication. The communication baud rate is
determined by the sender setting. The CNC system sets P414_d7, P414_d6
communication baud rate: the concrete parameter setting method is referred to
OPERATION, 4.6 PARAMETER Working Mode.
【Data transmission notes between two CNC systems】
1) The sender and the receiver must be in the same working mode(EDIT, PARAMETER,
OFFSET);
2) The sender and the receiver must enter the corresponding operation privilege when the
system sends or receives the parameter;
3 ) The operation steps are the same those of “data sending” and data receiving” of
communication software.
【Notes】
1) Press “Cancel” button when the system stops the transmission; press RESET or ESC on the
CNC system.
2) Must not execute the power-off when the system executes the data transmission.
3) The communication cable between CNC and PC is the same that of the one between two
CNC systems.
For the USB operation, the user directly inserts the U disc into the USB interface of the system
panel, and the system automatically identifies and opens the U disc when the U disc requires to
create the file and the file name in the root catalog according to the system file catalog. At the same
time, the system window displays USB icon.
133
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Notes】
1)After the U disc is used, the user must firstly press ESC to close the U disc before pulling out it,
at the moment, the system displaying USB icon disappears, and then the user can pull out the
U disc from USB interface, otherwise, the mistaken operation damages the system hardware
and the U disc.
2)Must not pull out the U disc when its indicator flashes, because it is reading or writing the data,
otherwise it can damage the system hardware and data.
3)The U disc has the write protect switch, and the user switches it before inserting the U disc and
cannot do it when the U disc is working .
4)The user should reduce the storage content in the U disc, otherwise, it influences the
communication speed between the system and the U disc. It is suggested the user should not
use the USB interface or big movement storage.
5)When the U disc operation is fail, the user should press RESET and insert the U disc to
operate it again.
In USB communication, for transmitting the different data, the system requires the USB file
names are different, and the user creates the file name in the U disc catalog as follows:
Data Part program Parameter Offset data System software Memory whole
category data upgrade update
Name category
File name in U disc C928PRO C928PAR C928OFT C928DATA C928MEMO
root catalog
File name in file CNCxxx.TXT PARxxx.TXT OFTxxx.TXT DATAxxx.TXT MEMOxxx.TXT
134
Programming Chapter One Programming Fundamental
PROGRAMMING
Chapter One Programming Fundamental
The automatic machining of CNC machine is the course of edited part programs automatically
running. The programming is defined that the drawing and the technology of machining workpiece
are described with CNC language and are edited to the part programs.
Here describes the definition of command and the programming mode of CNC part programs.
Please read carefully these contents before programming.
This system has defined the controlled axis and its motion according to GB/T 19660—2005/ISO
841:2001 Industrial Automation System and Integration-Numerical Control of Machines-
Coordinate System and Motion Nomenclature. The two coordinate axes are named with X and Z,
which are perpendicular each other to form X—Z plane rectangular coordinate system as Fig. 1-1:
O
Z
Fig. 1-1 X—Z plane rectangular coordinate system 1(front toolpost coordinate system)
X:It is defined to be perpendicular with the rotary centerline of spindle. X positive direction is the
one that the tool leaves from the rotary center of spindle.
Z:It is defined to be coincident with the rotary centerline of spindle and Z positive direction is the
one that the tool leaves from the headstock.
X
O Z
Fig. 1-2 X—Z plane rectangular coordinate system 2 (rear tool post coordinate system)
The coordinate system in the manual defines X, Z based on Fig. 1-1(front tool post coordinate
system). Some commands of G codes must be converse when Fig.1-2(rear tool post coordinate
system) defines X, Z:
135
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
1)When G02 programming based on Fig.1-1,Fig. 1-2 uses G03 programming;when G03
programming based on Fig.1-1, Fig.1-2 uses G02 programming.
2)When G41 programming based on Fig.1-1,Fig. 1-2 uses G42 programming;when G42
programming based on Fig.1-1, Fig.1-2 uses G41 programming.
Machine coordinate system is reference for the system to count coordinates, and is fixed on the
machine.
Machine zero (or machine reference point) is a fixed point on the machine. Generally, it is set at
the position of X, Z max. stroke with the machine zero check device, and do not use the machine zero
return function or set bit parameters P406_d7, P406_d6, P406_d5, P406_d4, P406_d3, P406_d2 to
0, i.e. “no machine zero” when the machine zero check device is not installed.
In machine coordinate system, the operator should set a position where the tool post stops, the
tool changed is executed safely and installing workpiece is convenient. Program reference point is set
when the tool post stops at the position which is called program reference point(or program zero).
Program reference point coordinate is relative to machine coordinate system.
Once the reference point is defined, the tool can return to the reference point by executing the
reference point return function in JOG working mode or AUTO working mode. Even if the system is
switched off, the reference point still exists. If the stepper motor is employed, there is slight error
caused by the motor vibrating after the system is switched on again. Execute the reference point
return again to avoid the error.
The program reference point is automatically set to X=150, Z=150 without setting the program
reference point after the system is switched on firstly.
In the machine coordinate system, the operator can also set the 2nd, 3rd program reference
point. Their functions are similar to the program reference point, and the system has corresponding
commands to move the worktable to the 2nd, 3rd program reference point.
The workpiece coordinate system is defined that some point on the workpiece is considered as
the coordinate origin to create the coordinate system. Its axes are separately parallel with X, Z
axis in the same direction.
After the workpiece coordinates is created, all absolute coordinate values in programming are
the position values in the workpiece coordinate system. Generally, Z workpiece coordinate
system is set on the rotary center of workpiece.
According to the actual condition in programming, define the workpiece coordinate origin, i.e. the
136
Programming Chapter One Programming Fundamental
programming origin in the workpiece drawing and the coordinate origin of CNC system command.
The workpiece coordinate system is created by setting a workpiece coordinate.
The absolute coordinate value is the distance to the coordinate origin, i.e. the coordinate position
of the tool traversing to the end point as Fig. 1-3
Z
B
A
x
Fig.1-3 absolute coordinate value
The incremental coordinate value is the distance from the previous position to the next one, i.e. the
actual traversing distance of tool as Fig. 1-4:
Z
B
A
x
Fig.1-4 incremental coordinate values
Tool traversing from A to B uses the incremental coordinates as follows: U -30 W -40 (X with
diameter programming)
137
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The incremental coordinates and the absolute coordinates can be applied at the same time, but
one coordinate axis in one block can only be defined by one method, i.e. X , W or U , Z can be
applied, but the X ,U or Z ,W cannot be applied.
Tool traversing from A to B as Fig. 1-4, X is applied with the absolute coordinate and Z with the
incremental coordinate as : X 5 0 W - 4 0.
138
Programming Chapter One Programming Fundamental
139
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
2.1 Character
Character is the basic unit to compose the program. The character includes English letters, digits
and other signs.
English letters are address character of each command or data:D E F G H I J K L
M N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z r
Digit is the specific data of each address character: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
Macro:If then else and or = < > ()
If then else : select statement; example:If(x>y) then (z=0 ) else(z=1);
and :logic and ;
or :logic or ;
> :more than ;
< :less than;
= :equal to ;
Sign:% - + * . ㄩ / ;
% :start sign of program name ;
— :negative data or reduction;
+ :addition;
* :multiplication or modification;
. : decimal point;
/ : division in assignment statement, block skip sign in others ㄩ:blank space.
; : comment
2.2 Block
A word consists of an address character and the following numerical command. For example: N000
12.8 W-23.45. Rules as follows:
Each word must have an address character (English letter) and the following number character
string。
The invalid 0 of digital character string can be omitted.
The leading zero of command can be omitted. For example: G00 can be written to G0.
The positive sign must be omitted, but the negative sign must not be omitted.
140
Programming Chapter Two Program Structure
Block number is divided into two formats, i.e. it is with line number and without line number; block
number is a line number of block number which is automatically created and also manually input and
modified. A block number consists of the letter N and the following 4-digit integer(range: 0000-9999).
Block sequence can be at will, its interval also can be unequal. It is suggested that the block number
should increase or decrease progressively based on programming sequence in order to conveniently
search or analysis programs.
When manual input is executed, block number N * * * * (* is 0~9) is directly input at the beginning of
program line. When the integer following block number N is modified, please refer to the block
content modification mode in OPERATION 4.1 Edit Operation Mode to modify the integer of block
number.
When automatically creating a block number is executed, and P333 is not set to 0, the line number
can automatically create, otherwise, it cannot create automatically the line number. Please refer to
OPERATION 4.6 Parameter Operation Mode about parameter setting; each program includes many
blocks, and each block begins with block number“ N**** ”. after a new program is created, the system
automatically creates the first block number “ N0000 ” , and after each block is input to press ENTER,
the system automatically creates the next block number. The program number increment is defined
by P333 content. The system automatically creates block number for increment according to 1/4
integer of P333 content.
【Note】
1)When the system finds that current row has no line number, it will automatically create “N1000”.
2)When the commands M98, M97, M91, M92, M93, M94 related to block number are executed, there
are no repetitive block number, otherwise, the system will alarm. A block number can be repetitive
without executing the above commands.
2.4 Block
A block with line number is composed of block number and many words; a block without line number
has no block number. One block can contain 255 characters at most (including space between words).
It is necessary to have the block number generated automatically by the system and can be modified
in EDIT working mode.
A block can have or no many words. When a block has many words, one or more blank space must
be input between words.
A complete block is as follows:
N0120 G1 X130 W-40 F50 Enter
N0120 block number
G1 ready function
X130 W-40 motion data
F50 motion speed
141
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Enter end of block, displayed in the screen. But each program ends after pressing ENTER.
【Notes】
1)Each word of block is separated with a blank space generated automatically by the system,
but it is necessary to input the blank space manually by user when this system cannot
distinguish words.
2)A word can be placed on any position in a block.
Insert skip symbol “/” or comment symbol “;” before a block which is not executed (which is not
deleted) . The system skips not to execute the block in program being executed.
When each block adds comment symbol, it can adds comments which are edit by only English
letters and digitals on CNC; which can be edit by Chinese on PC, and CNC displays Chinese
comments after programs are downloaded to CNC.
The system skips the block with “/”at the row beginning to execute the next one.
The system skips the block with “;”at the row beginning or block beginning to execute the next
one.
Input “;”at the end of row and then input simple comments.
【Notes】
1) Press W to insert “;” or “/”.
2) Blocks following “/” or “;” will become green.
3) Besides the above first condition, the block at which the cursor becomes light green, and
becomes orange in other condition.
4) Chinese comments following “;”are input by only serial or USB instead of the system
keyboard, but the system can display Chinese. 5) “;” must be input in SBC(single byte
character) case when Chinese comments are input by serial or USB, and the system does
not support DBC (double byte character) case.
A block consists of commands arraying of one or several technology operations in the course of
machining. A part program consists of some blocks according to the machining technology orderly. A
block number (line number) is used for identifying blocks. A program name is used for identifying
programs.
Each part program consists of one program number and blocks. A program contains 9999 blocks at
most. A block number is composed of N and the following 4-digit integer. A program name is
comprised of % and program number (3-digit integer). General structure of program is as follows
Fig.2-1.
142
Programming Chapter Two Program Structure
A program consists of program comments, blocks; each block begins with block number (it can be
omitted), follows characters, words; a block has block skip symbol and comments.
【Example】
N0000 G50 X200 Z300 Having N****is the block with line number, no having N****is the
G00 X200 Z200 block without line number;
N0020 T11 Home of each row is blank space;
N0030 ;G00 X100 Z100 There is a blank space between line number and code for the
/N0040 G02 X150 Z150 R50 program with line number;
N0030 G01 X100 Z100 ;2008 / block skip
N0050 M30 ; the followings are comments .
143
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
This chapter introduces in detailed all MSTF functions and explanations of GSK928TEa.
M function is used to control some operations ON/OFF of machine and run sequence of
machine program, and consists of address symbol M and its following two-digit integer. The used M
functions in the system are as follows:
Command Function Programming Explanation
format
M00 Pause to wait for starting M00 Press CYCLE START
M02 End of program M02 Return to No.1 block
M20 End of program M20 L Return to No. 1 block to execute cycle
machine, L being cycle machine times
M30 End of program for spindle OFF and M30
cooling OFF
M03 Spindle CW M03
M04 Spindle CCW M04
M05 Spindle OFF M05
M08 Spindle ON M08
M09 Cooling OFF M09
M10 Workpiece clamped M10
M11 Workpiece released M11
M12 Chuck output signal cancel M12
M32 Lubricating ON M32
M33 Lubricating OFF M33
M41 Spindle gearing No. 1 M41
M42 Spindle gearing No. 2 M42
M43 Spindle gearing No. 3 M43
M44 Spindle gearing No. 4 M44
M78 Tailstock forward M78
M79 Tailstock backward M79
M80 Tailstock output signal cancel M80
M96 Call cycle execution M96 P Q L
M97 Program transfer M97 P Transfer entry block specified by P
M98 Subprogram call M98 P L Transfer entry block number specified
by P
M99 Subprogram return M99 M98/M99 specify the call times
M21 Set No. 1 user output to be valid M21 D Output signal keeping for the time
specified by D
M22 Set No. user output to be invalid M22 D Signal cancel after the time arrival
M23 Set No. 2 user output to be valid M23 D
M24 Set No. 2 user output to be invalid M24 D
M91 No. 1 user input is invalid until input is M91 P Transfer entry block number specified
invalid. by P
M92 Wait till No. 1 user input is valid M92 P Transfer entry block number specified
by P
M93 Wait till No. 2 user input is valid M93 P Transfer entry block number specified
by P
144
Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions
M94 Wait till No. 2 user input is valid M94 P Transfer entry block number specified
by P
M47 Set permissive operation state of Y M47
M48 Set inhibited operation state of Y M48
M60~M74 Customized commands Refer to PROGRAMMING, Chapter 10 Customized
Command Programming
【Note】
1) Leading zero of M can be omitted; Example: M00 can be written to M0, M0 and M00 are
valid.
2) Bit parameter P403_d2 setting: whether M function output is closed when the reset key is
pressed; P403_d2=0 indicates that the system does not close M03, M04, M08, M32 output
signals after the reset key is pressed.
3) M commands are not in the same block with other commands as follows:
M00, M02, M20, M30, M96, M97, M98, M99;
M21, M22, M23, M24;
M91, M92, M93, M94;
M47, M48;
M60~M74.
【Command format】
M00 ;program pause
【Explanation】
M00 pauses not to execute the program and the system prompts “PAUSE” in flash and program
continuously runs after CYCLE START is pressed.
Press ESC to escape from program running.
M00 functions are different from that of CYCLE START key. M00 is used to pause before some
block which is specified in advance, and CYCLE START is used to pause at random.
【Command format】
M02 ;end of program
【Explanation】
M02 indicates that program ends, and the system returns to the first block to wait.
【Command format】
M20 L ;return to the first block to execute the cycle machine, L is the cycle
machine times, range:
145
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Explanation】
L is the cycle machine times(when L is equal to 3, the actual machined workpiece is 4PCS)
The system defaults the limitless cycle machine when L is omitted.
M20 indicates that the program ends and the system returns to the first block to execute
repetitively, and is used when the system or machine is checked.
【Command format】
M30 ;Endo of program, spindle OFF, cooling OFF
【Explanation】
M30 indicates the program ends, spindle is OFF and cooling is OFF and the system returns to
the first block to wait.
【Command format】
M03 ;spindle CW
M04 ;spindle CCW
M05 ;spindle stop
【Explanation】
M05 output is valid when the system is turned on. When M05 output is valid, M03 or M04 is
executed, its output is valid and kept, and M05 output is closed; when M03 or M04 output is valid,
M05 is executed, its output is valid and kept, M03 or M04 output is closed.
When the system appears emergency stop, M03 or M04 signal output is closed, M05 signal is
output.
In JOG, AUTO or DIAGNOSIS working mode, CW, CCW, STOP key on the operation panel can
control spindle rotating clockwise/ counterclockwise and stopping. When the spindle is in JOG
working mode, M03, M04, M05 controlled by MDI command input is invalid in JOG working mode.
See OPERATION, 4.4 JOG Working Mode.
【Command format】
M08 ;Cooling ON
M09 ;Cooling OFF
【Explanation】
M09 valid and M08 output is invalid when the system is turned on. When M08 is executed, its
output is valid, and the cooling is ON; M09 is executed, M08 output is cancelled, and the cooling is
OFF. M09 has no corresponding output signal, and the system releases M08 output interface when
146
Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions
M09 is executed.
M08 signal output is closed when the system appears emergency stop. In Jog, Auto or Diagnosis
mode, the COOLING key on the operation panel can control cooling ON/OFF, see OPERATION, 4.4
JOG Working Mode.
【Command format】
M10 ;clamping workpiece
M11 ;releasing workpiece
M12 ;cancelling chuck output signal;(only some special check device can use M12)
【Explanation 】
M11 is valid and M10 output is invalid when the system is turned on.
The parameter can set M10/M11 to be valid/invalid, to be checked or not, to be pulse or level control
output, and to be inner or outer control mode. Interlock between M10/M11 and spindle is decided by
P402_d5: P402_d5=0, they are interlocked; P402_d5=1, their interlock is released. See
OPERATION, 4.4 JOG Working Mode.
【Command format】
M32 ;lubricating ON
M33 ;lubricating OFF
【Explanation 】
After the system is turned on, M33 is valid and M32 output is invalid. Parameter P330 sets
whether the system automatically controls lubricating.
See OPERATION, 4.4 JOG Working Mode.
3.1.9 M41, M42, M44, M43 — Spindle Automatic Gear Shifting Control
【Command format 】
M41 ;Spindle automatically shifting to No. 1 gear in conversion
M42 ;Spindle automatically shifting to No. 2 gear in conversion
M43 ;Spindle automatically shifting to No. 3 gear in conversion
M44 ;Spindle automatically shifting to No. 4 gear in conversion
【Explanation】
M41, M42, M43, M44 can be used when the machine uses the spindle with the conversion. See
OPERATION, 4.4 JOG Working Mode.
147
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
3.1.10 M78, M79, M80 —Tailstock going forward and retreating backward, cancelling tailstock
output signal
【Command format】
M78 ;tailstock going forward
M79 ;tailstock retreating backward
M80 ;cancelling tailstock output signal(only some special tailstock device can use M80)
【Explanation】
M78, M79 is set by the parameter to be valid or not, to respond the check or not, to be the pulse
control output or level control output. They are interlock with the spindle. See OPERATION, 4.4 JOG
Working Mode.
【Command format 】
M96 P**** Q**** L **** ;call cycle execution
【Field 】
P — inlet block number for calling program. The leading zero of the block can be omitted.
Q — call last block number. The leading zero can be omitted.
L — call times. Omit L or call it one time when L is 1. L value is 1~9999 times.
【Explanation】
Program group called by M96 can have M96, M98/M99, G22/G80 which can be embedded.
M96, M97 are embedded to avoid that the program returns to M96 to again run one time after
M96 is executed.
【Example】
Method 1 Method 2
N0010 G00 X100 Z100 N0010 G00 X100 Z100
N0020 M96 P70 Q80 L3 N0020 M96 P40 Q50 L3
N0030 G01 W-5 N0030 M97 P0060
N0040 U5 W-5 N0040 G02 U5 W-5 R5 F300
N0050 W-5 N0050 G03 U5 W-5 R5
N0060 M30 N0060 G01 W-5
N0070 G02 U5 W-5 R5 F300 N0070 U5 W-5
N0080 G03 U5 W-5 R5 N0080 W-5
N0090 M30
Method 1: after M96 specifies the call specified program three times, the cursor returns to N0030 and
continuously runs till the program ends.
Method 2: after M96 specifies the call specified program three times, the cursor returns to N0030 and then the
system uses M97 to continuously runs till the program ends. The results of method 1 and method 2
are the same.
148
Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions
【Command format】
M97 P ;program transfer
【Field】
P —transfer to block number. The leading zero of the block number can be omitted.
【Explanation】
M97 commands the program to transfer from the block to the program specified by P. Block
number specified by P appears in the block, otherwise the program alarms “E215:line number miss”
The block number specified by P is M97 block.
Generally, the death cycle must not be created in M97.
【Example】
N0030 G00 X100
N0040 M98 P0060
N0050 M97 P0090
N0060 G01 U2
N0070 W-5
N0080 M99
N0090 M02
Execute N0050 to directly do N0090 instead of N0060.
【Command format 】
M98 P **** L **
M99
【Field】
P — block which is in subprogram. Leading zero of the block number can be omitted.
L — call times of subprogram. Omit L or it is called one time when L is 1. L is 1~9999.
【Explanation】
Some fixed sequence which appears repetitively in the program is taken as a subprogram, so it
can be called instead of being compiled when it needs again.
When M98 calls the subprogram and there is M99 in the execution of the subprogram, the
subprogram call ends and the program returns to the main program to call the next block.
The subprogram generally follows M02 of the main program, and the last block of the
subprogram must be the subprogram return command M99. When the subprogram does not follow
the main program, it must command M97 to transfer the program.
【Notes】
1) M98 is used together with M99, and the subprogram call one time instead of L(L>1)times is
executed when M98 is used alone.
149
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
2) When the program has M99 without M98, the program does not end till M99.
3) M98/M99 is executed in the subprogram call, i.e. they can be embedded; the embedding can
up to 18-layer.
【Example】
x
Fig. 3-1 M98 M99 subprogram call cutting example
Two programming methods as Fig.3-1:
Method 1 Method 2
N0010 G00 X100 Z50 N0010 G00 X100 Z50
N0020 M03 S01 N0020 M03 S01
N0030 G0 X50 Z15 F500 N0030 G0 X50 Z15 F500
N0040 M98 P0060 L5 Call subprogram N0040 M98 P0080 L5 Call subprogram
N0050 M97 P0130 Transfer program N0050 G0 X100 Z50
N0060 G0 U-4 N0060 M05
N0070 G01 Z-10 F80 N0070 M02 End of main program
N0080 U20 Z-25 N0080 G0 U-4
Insert the subprogram in
N0090 Z-35 N0090 G01 Z-10 F80
the main program
N0100 G0 U2 Z1 N0100 U20 Z-25
Subprogram follows the
N0110 U-22 N0110 Z-35
main program
N0120 M99 N0120 G0 U2 Z1
N0130 G0 X100 Z50 N0130 U-22
N0140 M05 N0140 M99
N0140 M02 End of main program
Transfer the program with M97, otherwise the program The subprogram must follow the main program without
does not meet the actual machining M97
Method 1: When the system executes N0040, calls the subprogram and executes N006 0-N0120
five times, and then executes N0050,the program skips to N0130 at the moment and
executes the following blocks.
Method 2: When the system executes N0040, it calls subprogram and executes N006 0-N0120 five
times, and then executes blocks from N0050 to N007, and so the program ends.
【Command format】
【Field】
D — signal hold time.(unit: s 0~9999.999). When D is omitted, the output signal is being held.
【Explanation】
M21, M22, M23, M24 have not the concrete definition specified the system, and the user can
specify according to the concrete requirements. They separately correspond to the output signals
defined by the two users, and the corresponding commands can change the states of output signals.
User 1, user 2 output signals are defined in the interface parameter (M210, M230). See
CONNECTION after the output interfaces are defined.
【Notes】
2)M21~M24 can have D: when M21~M24 are executed with D, the corresponding output is
executed, the time specified D delays and the previous output is cancelled. When the
command has no D, the output signal is being kept.
【Command format】
M91 P ;
M92 P ;
M93 P ;
M94 P ;
【Field】
P—block which skips to the target block. It does not skip when P is omitted. The leading zero of
the block specified by P can be omitted.
【Explanation】
The definitions of input signals which correspond to M91, M92, M93, M94 are not confirmed,
and are defined by the user according to the requirements. They separately correspond to input
signals defined by the two user. User 1, user 2 input signals are defined in the interface parameter
(M911, M931). See Connection after the output interfaces are defined.
When P is omitted, the system orderly executes the next block when the state of the check input
signal meets the command requirement, and always waits when it does not meet.
P≠0:the system skips to the block specified P when the input signal state meets the command
requirement, otherwise orderly executes the next block.
P is omitted:
M91:check the state of No. 1 user. When the state is valid (the input terminal is connected with
0V), wait till the input is invalid.
M92:check the state of No. 1 user. When the state is invalid (the input terminal is broken with 0V),
wait till the input is valid.
M93:check the state of No. 2 user. When the state is valid (the input terminal is connected with
0V), wait till the input is invalid.
151
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
M94:check the state of No. 2 user. When the state is invalid (the input terminal is broken with
0V), wait till the input is valid.
when P≠0:
M91:check the state of No. 1 user. When the state is valid (input terminal connects with 0V), skip
to the block specified by P, otherwise the next block is executed.
M92: check the state of No. 1 user, when the state is invalid (input terminal cuts off 0V), skip to
the block specified by P, otherwise the next block is executed.
M93: check the state of No. 2 user, when the state is valid (input terminal connects with 0V), skip
to the block specified by P, otherwise the next block is executed.
M94: check the state of No. 2 user, when the state is invalid (input terminal cuts off 0V), skip to
the block specified by P, otherwise the next block is executed.
【Command format】
M47 ;
M48 ;
【Explanation】
See OPERATION, 4.4 JOG Working Mode.
【Command format】
M60 ;
…
M74 ;
【Explanation】
See PROGRAMMING, Chapter 10 Customized Command Programming.
152
Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions
【Command format】
S01 ~ S04 ;4-gear directly outputs, leading zero can be omitted.
S00 ~ S15 ;16-gear BCD code outputs, leading zero can be omitted.
【Explanation】
P410_d6=0: S function controls multi-speed spindle motor; when it controls the multi-speed
spindle motor, it selects the direct 4-gear control signal or outputs 16-gear BCD code signal.
P410_d5=0: spindle control is the 4-gear direct controlling output S01 ~ S04, each gear
corresponds one output signal.
P410_d5=1 spindle control is 16-gear BCD code output S00~S15.
P410_d6=1: S function controls the conversion motor. The system outputs 0~10V DC analog
voltage signal controlling inverter to realize the stepless speed regulating of the spindle motor
◆ Gear control of conversion spindle
【Command format】
M41 ;corresponding output signal S01
M42 ;corresponding output signal S02
M43 ;corresponding output signal S03
M44 ;corresponding output signal S04
【Command format】
G96 S__ ;setting constant surface cutting state, and specifying the surface speed value:
G97 S__ ;cancelling constant surface speed state, specifying speed value:
【Explanation】
1) In JOG and AUTO working mode, the system displays the actual spindle speed S_.
2) In JOG and AUTO working mode, the system displays the cutting constant surface control
G96 S___m,or constant speed control G97 S___r.
3) Parameters are related to the spindle speed analog voltage control as follows:
Data parameter P305: max. spindle speed of constant surface speed;
Data parameter P304: lowest spindle speed of constant surface speed;
Machining one workpiece needs several different tools. The motor tool post with 4~8 tool
selections can be controlled by the system. To avoid the error caused by the installation or the
wear and tear, each tool is placed in the different position when it is cutting the workpiece, the
tool change and the tool compensation are employed in the programming.
Toolsetting operation is executed before machining receives the position offset data of each
tool(called as tool offset). T command is executed in program running, the system
automatically executes the tool offset. So, each tool in programming according to the workpiece
drawing dimension is compiled instead of considering the position among each tool in the
machine coordinate system. The deviation of machining dimension caused by tool wear can be
changed according to the dimension deviation to modify the tool deviation.
【Command format】
Txx ____ the first 1- digit is the tool number, the second is the tool offset number;
Txxx ____ the first 1-digit is the tool number, the following 2-digit is the tool offset number;
Txxxx ____ the first 2-digit is tool number and the second 2-digit is tool offset number.
【Field】
Tool number r: it is determined by P319(most tool number: 1~16); Example: P319 is 4, the
tool number is 0~4; when the input tool number is 0, it is the current tool number.
1) Tool offset number: 0~64; the input tool offset number is 0, it is to cancel the tool
compensation.
【Explanation】
1)The system can select 16 tools and P319 sets the most tool number.
2)When the system executes the manual toolsetting operation, it automatically matches the tool
offset number to the tool number and save it to the tool compensation table. When P403_d4
is set to 1, the system automatically identifies the toolsetting record, the tool number of tool
change, and relationship of tool numbers; when there is fault, the system alarms to display
the program check prompt but does not lock the program running.
3)The system executes the toolsetting operation based on the trial cutting or fixed point
toolsetting in Jog mode. See OPERATION, 4.4 JOG Working Mode.
When T command is executed, the system executes the tool change to T tool, and executes its
tool compensation, at the moment, modifies the tool nose coordinates. The system uses two
methods.
154
Programming Chapter Three MSTF Commands and Functions
P403_d6 = 0: after the system executes the tool compensation and modifies the tool nose
coordinates, it does not execute the slide movement, i.e. the execution is
completed;
P403_d6 =1: after the system executes the tool compensation and modifies the tool nose
coordinates, it executes the slide movement and makes the too nose coordinate
recover(move to the position which is the previous and ensure the tool nose
coordinates is not changed).
Move the machine slide:
1) Move the slide in JOG working mode to make the tool nose coordinates recover. X, Y rapidly
move simultaneously.
2) In AUTO working mode, when the T command is an alone block, its execution mode is the
same that of JOG working mode, i.e. the system executes the slide movement to make the
tool nose coordinates recover. X, Y rapidly move simultaneously.
3) In AUTO working mode, when T and G00/G01 are the same block, the system executes the
tool change, and then adds the tool compensation value to X, Z coordinates of G00/G01 to
complete the movement. The system performs the rapid traverse in G00 and cutting speed
in G01.
When P403_d6=0, the tool compensation execution is to modify the system coordinates.
In JOG and AUTO working mode, the slide does not move after the system executes the tool
compensation and modifies the tool nose coordinates.
In AUTO working mode, after the system executes the tool compensation, the workpiece
program is in undefined state when the tool nose coordinates are changed and does not be
recovered. The troubleshooting is the followings when the system appears the different
consecutive commands:
1)When the consecutive command is G00 Z/X absolute coordinate positioning, the tool directly
traverses to G00 positioning point;
2)When the consecutive command is G00 W/U relative coordinate movement, the tool directly
traverses one relative amount;
3)When the consecutive command is G00 single-axis positioning, the other axis does not move.
【Notes】
1)Correct programming method: after the system executes the tool change, uses G00 to execute
Z/X positioning again, or uses G00 single-axis to orderly complete the positioning again.
2)To improve the machining efficiency, T command and G0 must be in the same block. For
example, 0 X100 Z200 T0202.
3)Adding the tool compensation to program command value is executed when G0/G1 and the
tool compensation command are in the same block.
155
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
It defines the feedrate of tool function i.e. the feedrate function(G98/G99, F command).
【Command format】
G98 F*****. *** ;Feedrate per minute
G99 F*****. *** ;Feedrate per rev
【Explanation】
Cutting feed: The system can control X, Z motion contributed that the motion path of tool and the
defined path by commands (straight line, arc ) is consistent, and also instantaneous
speed on the tangent of motion path and F word is consistent, which motion control is
called cutting feed or interpolation. The cutting feedrate is specified by F, the
system divides the cutting feedrate specified by F according to the programming path
into X , Z direction, also controls X, Z instantaneous speed to contribute that the
combined speed of X, Z vector is equal to F command value.
dx
fx = •F F is the combined speed of vector of X/Y instantaneous speed;
dx + dz2
2
dx is the X instantaneous(dt) increment,
fx is the X instantaneous speed in X direction;
dz dz is the Z instantaneous(dt) increment ,
fz = •F fz is the Z instantaneous speed.
dx + dz2
2
157
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Here describes the functions and the explanations of all G commands of the system
【Command format】
G00 Z(W)_ X(U)_ ;two axes rapidly move, i.e. Z/X, Z/Y, X/Y
【Field】
X, Z, Y: absolute coordinates of end point;
U, W, V:relative movement from starting point to end point;
Use relative or absolute coordinates, omit the coordinates which are not moved with G00 and
coordinate field.
【Field range】
X, Z, Y, U, W, V:(-9999.999~9999.999)mm
X, Z, Y, U, W, V:(-9999.999~9999.999)mm
【Explanation】
One, both or all of Z/X/Y move simultaneously.
When the tool change is executed, the tool compensation command and G00 are the same block,
adding the tool compensation value to G00 movement value are executed to improve the work efficiency,
so the tool change, tool compensation and G00 should be in the same one block.
G00 actual run speed is controlled by the rapid override. For example, when G00 rapidly traverses
in the alone movement mode, the actual speed is set by P100, P101, P102.
Z actual rapid speed = P100 × rapid override
X actual rapid speed = P101 ×rapid override
Y actual rapid speed = P102 ×rapid override
The actual max. speed of the machine is defined by its actual condition and matched motor. For
particular parameters, please see the manual from machine manufacture. G00 is the modal
command and can be omitted in the next same block. G00 can be omitted to G0, and G0 and G00
are equivalent.
【Relative parameters】
Parameters related to G00: P100, P101, P102, P103, P104, P105, P106, P107, P108, P112, P114,
P400_d3.
Each axis separately rapidly moves or simultaneously rapidly moves according to the proportion,
158
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
and their movement mode is defined by P400_d3: P400_d3=0, each axis rapidly positions (alone
movement mode) in G00 in the separately rapid mode; P400_d3=1, each axis rapidly positions
(interpolation movement mode)simultaneously in G00 in the proportion mode. P400_d3=0, the alone
movement mode is executed as follows(taking an example of Z)
① Raising speed stage: Z raises speed at the initial speed of P103;
② Raise speed to max. speed set by P100; the acceleration time in the raising speed phase is
P106 (Z raises speed at the initial speed P103 to 15000.000mm/min).
Each axis moves at the rapid speed, the actual speed displayed by the system is the compound
rapid traverse speed, and the displayed actual rapid speed of two axes moving simultaneously is more
than the value set by P100, P101, P102.
P400_d3=1: interpolation movement mode is executed as follows:
① Raising speed stage: raises speed at the initial speed of P112;
② The acceleration time in the raising speed phase is P114 (raise speed at the initial speed P112
to 15000.000 mm/min).
③ Compound speed of rapid interpolation is 10000.000 mm/min, the movement axes rapidly
move according to the proportion, and their actual speeds are controlled by P100, P101, P102.
【Note】
Ensure the tool is placed on the safe position to avoid the tools shocking each other when G00 is
executed.
【Example】
【Command format】
159
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The tool traverses at the set feedrate in G01 from the current point to connection line of the
specified point X(U),Z(W) or Y(V).
【Field】
X, Z, Y: absolute coordinates of end point;
U, W, V: relative movement from starting point to end point.
F: cutting federate. F value is modal, and can be omitted when it is not changed. At the same
time, it is controlled by the feedrate override.
【Field range】
X, Z, Y, U, W, V:(-9999.999~9999.999)mm
F:0.001mm/min~15000mm/min
【Explanation】
Z/X/Y can execute single-axis, two-axis or three-axis feed simultaneously.
G01 traverse speed is specified by F and controlled by the feedrate override.
Actual feedrate = F × feedrate override
G01 is the modal command and can be omitted in the next block.G01 can be omitted to G1, and G1
and G01 are equivalent.
【Relative parameters】
Parameters related to G01: P112, P113, P114, P401_d5, P401_d4
Interpolation traverse execution as follows:
① Raising speed stage: raises speed at the initial speed of P112;
② The acceleration time of raising speed stage is P114; at the same time, the system checks
whether the federate (Fx feedrate override) exceeds P113 limit, if it does, the feedrate is P113.
P401_d5, P401_d4 set in the cutting machining: the system uses high-speed connection mode,
continuous smooth transition or reducing speed to zero.
【Example】
The tool traverses from A to B in G01 at the speed 150 mm/min as Fig. 4-2:
160
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
【Command format】
G02 Z(W)_ X(U)_ I_ K_ F_ ;circle center coordinates programming, CCW arc
G02 Z(W)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;arc radius program, CCW arc
G03 Z(W)_ X(U)_ I_ K_ F_ ;circle center coordinates programming, CW arc
G03 Z(W)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;arc radius program, CW arc
G05 Z(W)_ X(U)_ I_ K_ F_ ;any point(I, K) on arc programming
The tool traverses from the current point X(U), Z(W) to the specified arc in G02, G03, G05 at the set
speed, the arc radius is R or the distance from the circle center to starting point is I, K(G02, G03), or any
point I, K(G05) on the arc.
【Field 】
F:cutting feedrate;
R:arc radius;
K:it is Z different value between circle center and starting point of arc in G02/G03;
I:it is X different value between circle center and starting point of arc in G02/G03;
【Field range】
X, Z, U, W:-9999.999 mm~9999.999mm
F:0.001 mm/min~15000mm/min
R:0<R≤1000000.000mm
【Explanation】
161
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Z/X programming in G02, G03, G05; the traverse speed is set by F and controlled by the
feedrate override.
F value is modal, and can be omitted when it is not changed. At the same time, it is controlled
by the feedrate override.
Actual feedrate=Fx feedrate override
G02, G03, G05 are modal, and can be omitted when there are the same in the next block. G02 can be
written to G2 and they are equivalent; G03 can be written to G3 and they are equivalent; G05 can be
written to G5 and they are equivalent. The fields are explained as follows:
Table 4-1
Field Specified content Meaning
G02 Arc rotation direction CCW arc in front tool post coordinate system/ CW arc
in rear tool post coordinate system
G03 Arc rotation direction CW arc in front tool post coordinate system/ CCW arc
in rear tool post coordinate system
X,Z Absolute coordinate Absolute coordinates of arc end point
U,W Relative coordinate Distance between starting point and end point of arc
I,K (G02,G03) Circle center Distance between circle center and starting point of
coordinates arc in G02 ,G03
R Arc radius Distance between any point and circle center
F Feedrate Speed along the arc
I,K (G05) One point on arc One point on arc( three points consists of one circle)
The tool traverses at the set speed in the specified arc path in G02, G03. G02/G03 arc direction
definition is referred to the circle center, their directions are reverse in the front/rear tool post coordinate
system as follows:
Z X
G02 G02
Front tool post Rear tool post
coordinate system G03 coordinate system
G03
X Z
X
G03
C
G02 G02
B
A Z G03
A Z
G03
G02 B
G02
C G03
X
X,Z or U, W specify the end point of arc. The end point is presented with absolute or relative
coordinates. The relative coordinate is the distance from the starting point to the end point of arc.
G02/G03: I,K specify the circle center coordinates of arc. I, K separately correspond to X, Z vector
from the starting point as the origin point to the circle center. I is X vector (in diameter), K is Z component.
K is positive when I, K directions are the same those of X, Z. otherwise, it is negative. Use R
programming without using I, K programming.
162
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
Z R
X K X I
Z Z
Center point of K
arc
X
Fig. 4-4 circle coordinate definition
G05: I, K specify the coordinates of one point on the arc. Three points consist of one circle: starting
point, end point and any one on arc as Fig. 4-5:
0 Z
End point
Any one point on arc
(I,K)
Starting point
X
【Related parameters】
Parameters related to arc interpolation: P112, P113, P114, P401_d4, P400_d2.
Interpolation movement execution as follows:
① Raising speed stage: raises speed at the initial speed of P112;
② The acceleration time of raising speed stage is P114; at the same time, the system checks
whether the federate (Fx feedrate override) exceeds P113 limit, if it does, the feedrate is P113.
P401_d4, P400_d2 set in the cutting machining: the system uses continuous smooth transition ,
deceleration to zero, front/post acceleration/deceleration or arc crossing top precision execution.
【Note】
1) I value is expressed with the diameter. The general drawing uses the radius value. Multiplex 2
in programming.
2) Max. arc radius is not more than 1000000mm, otherwise, it may be wrong in the system.
3) For the arc with very small R with great value of programming speed x feedrate, the stepping
angle in interpolation is not more than 1.5 degree, otherwise, the system automatically
decelerates and there is the difference value between the actual feedrate and programmed
speed.
4) The system automatically decelerates with great programmed speed in machining small arc.
5) Using K, I programming in G02, G03, the system checks the current coordinates(starting
163
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
point), end point coordinates and circle center coordinates; when the end point is not on the
circle, and Z deviation is more than 0.005mm or X deviation is more than 0.01mm, the system
alarms: Distances between E238 circle center to two point are not equal.
6) the system checks the current coordinates(starting point), end point coordinates and circle
center coordinates in using G05 programming; the system alarms: E239 three points are in
one line and cannot consist of one arc when the three points cannot consist of one triangle.。
7) The system alarms: E237 chord length is more than the diameter when the diameter 2R is
less than the distance between the current point(starting point) and end point in R
programming.
8) G02, G03, G05 must not be with T in one block. The system alarms: E205 is incompatible.
9) The arc cannot be more than 180° in R programming.
【Example 1】
A Z
Draw the full circle along the arc direction to
judge whether the machining arc is CCW or CW
interpolation. When it is CW, the system
executes G03; when it is CCW, the system does
G02.
B
164
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
Absolute programming:
N0000 G0 X18 Z0 ;
N0010 G02 X30 Z-15 R20 F100 ;
N0020 M30
Relative programming:
N0000 G0 X18 Z0 ;
N0010 G02 U12 W-15 R20 F100 ;
N0020 M30
Chamfering function is to insert one straight line or circular between two contours to make the tool
smoothly transmit from one contour to another one. The system uses the linear and circular chamfering
functions but only uses Z/X programming.
Two contours includes: the linear to the linear, the linear to the arc, the arc to the linear, the arc to
the arc. The linear to the linear is as the following figure. Firstly two straight lines to be tangent with one
circle(the circle can be properly adjusted) creates two tangent points, which are connected by a straight
line, i.e. the linear chamfering, and which are connected by a arc, i.e. arc chamfering.
Linear chamfering: insert one straight line in the linear contours, arc contours, linear contour and
arc contour. The command address of linear chamfering is L, behind which data is the length of
chamfering straight line. The linear chamfering must be used in G01, G02, G03 or G05
command.
1)Linear to linear
Command format: G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ L_ ;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ ;
Command function: insert one straight line between two linear interpolation blocks.
165
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
2)Linear to circular
Command format: G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ L_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
Or
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ L_;
G02/G03/G05 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
Command function: insert one straight line between the linear and circular interpolation blocks.
3)Circular to circular
Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ L_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_; (or G02/G03/G05 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
)
Or
G02/G03/G05 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ L_;
G02/G03/G05 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
(or G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;)
Command function: insert one straight line between two circular interpolation blocks
4)Circular to linear
Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ L_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Or
G02/G03/G05 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ L_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Command function: insert one straight line block between circular and linear interpolation
block.
166
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
Circular chamfering: insert one circular between linear contours, circular contours, linear contour
and circular contour, the circular and the contour line are transited by the tangent. The command of
circular chamfering is D, and the data behind the command is the radius of chamfering circular. The
circular chamfering must be used in G01, G02, G03 or G05.
1)Linear to linear
Command format: G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ D_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Command function: insert one circular between two straight lines, the inserted circular block
and two straight lines are tangent, the radius is the data behind the command address D.
2)Linear to circular
Command format: G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
or
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ D_;
G02/G03/G05 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
Command function: insert one circular between linear and circular, the inserted circular is
tangent to the linear and the circular, and the radius is the data behind the
command address D.
3)Circular to circular
Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
Or
167
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
4)Circular to linear
Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ D_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Or
G02/G03/G05 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ D_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Command function: insert one circular block between the circular and the linear, the inserted
circular block is tangent to the circular and the linear, and the radius is the data
behind the command address D.
168
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
B. Linear to linear: CNC alarms when the chamfering linear is too long.
L1 i is the linear 1, and the length is L1; l2 is the linear 2, its length is 2; the length of the
chamfering straight line which is formed by the interpolation connection is L3, CNC alarms
when the chamfering straight line length L is bigger than L3 and other end of L is not in the
interpolation linear L2(in the extension line of interpolation line) as follows:
CNC alarms when other end of the chamfering straight line is not in the interpolation
linear(in the extension line of the interpolation linear) as follows.
C. Linear(arc) to arc: CNC alarms when the chamfering straight line length is too long.
CNC alarms when the chamfering straight line length is L, other end of the caculated
chamfering straight line is not in the interpolation line.
2)Circular chamfering
A. The circular chamfering function is invalid when two interpolation straight lines are in the
same block.
169
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
D. The circular chamfering function is invalid when one circular and another one are tangential.
The circular chamfering function is valid when the circular tangency is as follows:
variable pitch thread cutting command G34, tapping cycle cutting command G32, thread cycle cutting
command G92.
The machine with the thread cutting function must be installed with the spindle encoder which lines
is set by P209. In thread cutting, X or Z moves to execute the thread machining when the system
receives the one-turn signal of the spindle encoder, so the system can execute the roughing, finishing for
many times to complete the thread machining without changing the spindle speed.
The system has many kinds of thread cutting function used to machining the thread without the tool
retraction groove, there is great pitch error in the thread cutting start and end when the system executes
X, Z acceleration/deceleration, so the system leaves the thread lead length and the tool retraction
distance in the actual starting point and the end.
When the thread pitch is confirmed, X, Z speed is determined by the spindle speed and is not
related to the cutting federate override. When the spindle override control in the thread cutting is valid
and the spindle speed changes, the pitch has the error because of X, Z acceleration/deceleration, so,
the system does not execute the spindle speed regulation and does not stop the spindle, otherwise,
which damages the tool and workpiece. The thread cutting command are Z/X programming.
【Command format】
G33 X(U )_ Z(W)_ P(E)_ K_ I_ Q_ H_ ;thread cutting
G33 Z(W)_ P(E)_ K_ I_ Q_ H_ ;axial straight-thread cutting
G33 X(U )_ P(E)_ K_ I_ Q_ H_ ;end face straight-thread cutting
【Field】
P —— metric thread lead.
E —— inch thread lead.
It is the axial thread and Z is the thread axis when P/E is positive value; it is the end face
thread and X is the thread axis when it is negative value.
X(U)/Z(W)—— absolute/relative coordinates of thread end point.
For the axis thread, Z movement is not 0; it is the axial straight-thread when X is omitted.
For the end face thread, X movement is not 0; it is the end face thread when Z is omitted.
K —— it is the length from the thread run-out starting point to the end point in the thread machining
axis.
K cannot be negative and must be less than the movement of thread machining axis.
I —— movement of thread run-out axis direction when the thread runs-out. (there is no thread
run-out when it is omitted).
For straight-thread, the thread runs-out positively when I is positive; the thread runs-out
negatively when it is negative.
For taper thread, the thread run-out direction is same that of the taper, I symbol does
not have effect.
171
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
For axial taper thread, the thread runs-out positively when U is positive; the thread runs-out
negatively when U is negative.
For end face thread, the thread runs-out positively when W is positive; the thread runs-out
negatively when it is negative.
Q —— initial angle. It is used to thread part when it is specified to 0°.
H ——(H_d7 ~ H_d2:reserved);it is used to selecting the thread run-out point.
H_d0 = 0:the system default is zero;
H_d0 =1:thread run-out when the long axis reduces speed, which is not controlled b K value.
H_d1: it is continuous thread machining raising/reducing speed mode, and the system default
to zero;
H_d1 = 0: in continuous thread cutting, between the neighboring two threads, the long axis
reduces speed from the machining speed to the initial speed, and then raises speed
to the thread machining speed. The thread pitch length changes in the raising and
the reducing speed.
H_d1 = 1: in continuous thread cutting, between the neighboring two threads, the machining
speed of the block suddenly skips to the one of the next thread without the process
from the thread machining speed reducing speed to the initial speed and from the
initial speed raising speed to the thread machining speed. So, when the difference
between two block thread pitches is great, there maybe make the motor step-out,
which does not meet the machining.
【Field range】
X,Z,U,W:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
I:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
K:0~9999.998mm
P:0.001mm~500.000mm(the negative sign can be added to the front of the range. The positive
value means to the axial thread, and the negative value means to the end face thread.)
E:(0.060~25400.000) tooth/inch(the negative sign can be added to the front of the range. The
positive value means to the axial thread, and the negative value means to the end face thread.)
Q:0°~360.000°
H:00000000~11111111
【Relative parameters】
Parameters related to G33: P100, P101, P103, P104, P106, P107, P113, P116, P117, P209, P306,
P307, P403_d0.
Taking example of axis thread, parameters related to G33:
① Before the system enters raising speed, it firstly checks whether the thread cutting speed
exceeds P113, if it does, the system alarms to terminate the thread machining;
② Raising speed phrase: Z raises speed at P103 initial speed; Acceleration time of raising speed
phase is P116;
③ When the system executes the thread run-out, X executes rapidly the thread run-out at P101
172
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
0 Z
D K1 B A
C K
E I
X
173
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Explanation】
1) G33 can machine metric/inch constant straight, taper and outer thread.
2) In the spindle rotating clockwise, the positive cutting is right-hand thread, and the negative is the
left-hand thread, and the spindle rotates counterclockwise, they are reverse.
3) Generally, the machining repeats the thread cutting many times in the same path from the
roughing to the finish turning when the thread is machined. The thread cutting starts after
receiving 1-turn signal from the spindle coder, and so the cutting points on the circle of
machining workpiece are the same when repeating the thread cutting many times, the spindle
speed must not be changed at the same time, otherwise there is the error of thread cutting.
4) The thread machining cutting speed is controlled by P113(max. cutting feedrate); when the
above speed exceeds the max. feederate, the system alarms. It is suggested that the thread
machining cutting speed should be less than 3000 mm/min; when the speed is too big, the
motor cannot response to cause the confused thread tooth.
Thread feedrate format is as follows:
inch thread speed =N×25.4 / E
metric thread speed=N×P
N — speed (unit:r/min)max. speed is less than 2000r/min.
P — thread lead (unit:mm)it is switched into the metric unit to count when it is the
inch thread.
5) In thread cutting start and end, the lead is not correct because of raising/reducing speed, so, the
commanded thread length should be longer than the actual required length. Generally, the
length in the raising speed > 1.3 mm.
6) For axial taper thread, the pitch P/E is the pitch of the thread axis(Z); for the end face thread, it is
the pitch of the thread axis(X).
【Note】
1) Start the spindle before machining the thread; otherwise, the system always waits and is not
fault.
2) The feed hold key and the feedrate override are invalid, the spindle stops and the feed also stops
in the course of thread cutting.
174
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
3) When the spindle starts just now, the system cannot machine the thread because of the unstable
spindle speed, otherwise, it influences the thread machining precision.
4) The photoelectric coder with 1200 or 1024 lines must be installed to rotate with the spindle
synchronously. The selected coder lines are the same as the actual installed ones. When the
coder lines are 1200, P209 is set to 1200; when the coder lines are 1024, P209 is set to 1024. If
P209 setting is wrong, the pitch will be mistake when the thread is machined.
5) For the thread with the thread run-out, the spindle speed, the pitch, the acceleration time of the
thread run-out axis, the initial speed and I value affect the thread run-out. The higher the speed
is, the bigger the pitch is; the lower the initial speed is, the smaller I value is, worse the thread
run-out effect is.
6) When the previous block and the current one are the thread cutting command, the system does
not detect the thread head signal (only one per revolution) but directly starts the cutting feed.
Example: G33 W-20 P3;the system detects 1-turn signal when the thread cutting is executed.
G33 W-30 P2; the system does not detect 1-turn signal when the thread cutting is executed.
7) The command must not be other command in the same block.
175
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
K/2
I
0 Z
5)G33 end face taper thread:
P is negative;
W sign decide the direction of the thread run-out;
I sign is invalid;
U/2 Example:G00 Z100 X20
G33 U20.7 W-8.3 K3 I1.6 P-2
M30
End point (Z90.10,X40.70)
X
K/2
【Example】
1)G33 axial straight thread: as Fig. 4-9
Fig. 4-9
I sign decides the direction of the thread run-out; there is no the thread run-out when I is omitted;
Example:G00 X100 Z100
G33 W-40 K3 I5 P2 ; end point(Z60,X105)
M30
2)G33 axial taper thread: as Fig. 4-10
Fig. 4-10
U sign decide the direction of the thread run-out; I sign is invalid;
176
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
Fig. 4-11
P is negative; W sign decide the direction of the thread run-out; I sign is invalid;
Example:G00 Z100 X20
G33 U20.7 W-8.3 K3 I1.6 P-2 ; end point(Z90.10,X40.70)
M30
Fig. 4-12
P is negative; I sign decide the direction of the thread run-out; there is no the thread run-out when I is
omitted;
Example:G00 Z100 X20
G33 U20.7 K3 I1.6 P-2 ; end point(Z101.60,X40.70)
M30
177
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Command format】
G34 X(U )_ Z(W)_ P(E)_ K_ I_ Q_ R_ H_ ;variable pitch thread cutting
G34 Z(W)_ P(E)_ K_ I_ Q_ R_ H_ ;variable pitch axial straight thread cutting
G34 X(U )_ P(E)_ K_ I_ Q_ R_ H_ ;variable pitch end face straight thread cutting
【Field】
P —— metric thread lead.
E —— inch thread lead.
When P/E is the positive, it means the axial thread, and Z is the thread axis, it is the
negative, it means the end face thread, and X is the thread axis.
X(U)/Z(W)——absolute/relative coordinates of thread end point.
Z movement of axial thread cannot be 0; X movement of end face thread cannot be 0.
K ——length from the starting point to the end point of thread run-out in the thread machining axis.
K cannot be negative and must be less than the movement of thread machining axis.
I ——movement of the run-out axis direction in the thread run-out. (there is no run-out when it is
omitted).
For the straight thread, I being positive means to execute the thread run-out positively; I being
178
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
179
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Command format】
G32 Z(W)_ P(E)_ H_ ;Z tapping
G32 Y(V)_ P(E)_ H_ ;Y tapping, only single-axis feeds
【Field】
Z(W),Y(V)
:end point coordinates of tapping or tapping length; Z/Y is separate Z/Y absolute
coordinate, W/V is separate Z/Y relative coordinate; the user only uses one
of the relative and the absolute coordinate, and the relative coordinate is
relative to the movement of the current position.
P:metric thread lead;
E:inch thread lead;
H:execution mode mark H0 or H1(H_d7 ~ H_d0:reserved(invalid))
【Field】
Y, Z, V, W:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
P:0.001mm~500.000mm
E:0.060 tooth/inch~25400.000 tooth/inch
H:0 or 1(reserved(invalid))
【Relative parameters】
parameters related to G32: P100, P102, P103, P105, P106, P108, P112, P113, P114.
【Explanation】
G32 Z tapping cycle execution process:
① Z tool infeed tapping.
② Close the spindle.
③ Wait the spindle to exactly stop.
④ The spindle rotates counterclockwise(reverse to the previous rotation direction)
⑤ Z tool retraction to the starting point of the cycle.
⑥ The spindle stops.
【Note】
1) Determine the spindle direction according to the possible tapping direction before tapping.
The spindle will stop after the tapping ends. Restart the spindle when continuously machining.
180
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
2) There is a deceleration time after the spindle is closed, at the moment, Z/Y rotates along the
spindle till the spindle stops completely. Therefore, the actual bottom hole of machining is
deeper than the actual required. The actual depth should be determined by the spindle speed
in tapping and by whether the spindle’s brake is installed or not.
3) The system forbids executing G32 when the system is in DRY RUN mode.
4) The other cautions are the same those of G33.
【Example】
The system directly modifies the current tool nose coordinates into the coordinate values set by G50
in G50 and sets the current machine coordinates to the program reference point.
After the system executes G50, the front of the machine coordinates of the corresponding axis has
green icon , which is taken as the program reference point return prompt.
The coordinate system created by G50 is taken as the workpiece coordinate system. After the
coordinate system is created, the position of absolute coordinate in the following command is the
coordinate values in the coordinate system.
Z of the workpiece coordinate system is defined in the rotary center of the workpiece when the
system creates the workpiece coordinate system, X is defined in the end face of the chuck or the
workpiece.
【Command format】
G50 Z_ X_ Y_ ;three-axis workpiece coordinate system setting
G50 Z_ X_ ;two-axis workpiece coordinate system setting
G50 X_ ;X workpiece coordinate system setting
G50 S_ ;max. spindle speed limit in constant surface speed refer to G96, G97 mode,
181
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Field】
Z, X, Y are absolute coordinate values. S is to limit max. spindle speed(r/min), refer to G96,
G97.
【Field range】
X, Z, Y:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
【Explanation】
1)Z/X/Y cannot be in the same block with S. Z/X/Y can select single-axis, two-axis or three-axis to
set the workpiece coordinate system.
2)G50 is alone in one block and cannot be in one block with other commands.
3)Because the system has created one workpiece coordinate system and one program reference
point, it uses the new workpiece coordinate system and the program reference point in Auto and
Jog working mode till it is replaced after the system executes G50.
【Relative parameter】
Parameters related to G50: P000, P001, P002.
【Example】
G50 X100 Z100 Y100 ; three-axis creating workpiece coordinate system
【Command format】
G51
【Explanation】
G51 is alone in one block without other commands.
Set the workpiece coordinate system and the program reference point in recovering Jog working
mode. When the set workpiece coordinate and the program reference point in Jog working mode are
replaced after G50 is executed, the recovering can use G51. After recovering, the system uses the
previous workpiece coordinate system and the program reference point in Jog working mode and Auto
workpice mode till it is replaced.
return to the program reference point through the middle point, rapidly traverse in G00.
【Command format】
G26 Z(W)_ X(U)_ ;Z/X rapidly moves to the program reference point through the middle
point
G26 Z(W)_;Z rapidly moves to the program reference point through the middle point, and other axes
do not move
G26 Y(V)_;Y rapidly moves to the program reference point through the middle point, and other axes
182
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
do not move
【Field】
X, Z, Y: absolute coordinates of middle point;
U, W, V:relative movement from the starting point to middle point.
【Field range】
X, Z, U, W, Y, V:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
【Explanation】
1) After the command is executed, all specified coordinate axes move to the point defined by
G50. they moves the program reference point defined in the Jog working mode without using
G50. After the corresponding axes execute the reference point return, the fronts of their
machine coordinates have the blue icons as the prompts.
2) The command and other commands cannot in the same block。
3) The execution mode of the command is the same that of G00; Relative parameter is referred
to G00, G50.
4) Z/X/Y can select single-axis, two-axis or three-axis simultaneously to execute the program
reference point return.
【Example】
G26 Z150 X100 Y100 ; return to program reference point through the middle point
(Z150,X100,Y100)
G26 U0 ; X directly returns to program reference point and other axes
do not move
【Command format】
G28 Z(W)_ ;Z rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes
do not move
G28 X(U)_ ;X rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes
do not move
G28 Y(V)_ ;Y rapidly moves to machine zero through the middle point and other axes
do not move
【Field】
X, Z, Y:absolute coordinates of middle point;
U, W, V:relative movement from starting point to middle point.
【Field range】
X, Z, U, W, Y, V:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
【Relative parameter】
183
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Main parameters related to G28: P021~P026, P109, P110, P111, P406 and P407.
【Explanation】
1) When the machine zero check devices(zero switch and deceleration switch) are not installed
on the corresponding coordinate axis, P406 corresponding bit parameter is set to 0; in
executing G28, the system does not check the zero signal and deceleration signal, and the
axis moves the middle point and returns to its zero coordinate position.
2) When the machine zero check devices(zero switch and deceleration switch) are installed on
the corresponding coordinate axis, P406 corresponding bit parameter is set to 1; in executing
G28, the axis rapidly moves to the machine zero from the starting point and does not go
through the middle point; i.e. the above machine zero return is the same that of Jog working
mode.
3) The machine zero return in G28 is referred to PROGRAMMING, 4.4 Machine Zero Return in
JOG working mode.
4) G28 is non-modal G command, its execution is the same that of G00; other relative parameters
are referred to G00.
5) After the corresponding axes execute the machine zero return, the fronts of their machine
【Command format】
G30 P2 Z(W)_ X(U)_ ;Z/X rapidly moves to execute the 2nd program reference
point return through the middle point
G30 P3 Z(W)_ X(U)_ ;Z/X rapidly moves to execute the 3rd program reference
point return through the middle point
G30 P2 Z(W)_ ;Z rapidly moves to execute the 2nd program reference point
return and other axes do not move
G30 P2 Y(V)_ ;Y rapidly moves to execute the 2nd program reference point
return and other axes do not move
【Field】
184
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
【Command format】
G04 D__ ;dwell
【Field】
D — dwell time。
(unit:s) G04 defines the meantime between two blocks.
【Field range】
D:0~9999.999 s
【Explanation】
1) The command and other command cannot be in the same block.
2) In G04, press CYCLE START and the dwell ends and the system orderly executes the next
command.
【Example】
4.13 G96 —Constant Surface Speed Control, G97 —Constant Surface Speed Cancel
【Command format】
185
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
186
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
【Relative parameters】
Main parameters related to G96, G97: P410_d6, P304, P305;
P410_d6 setting determines whether the system executes the constant surface speed control in
G96;
Min. and Max. speed limit P304, P305 of constant surface speed control.
【Note】
1) The system alarms S value cannot be zero in E272- G50 in programming G50 S0。
2) The spindle speed is controlled actually by the constant surface speed control function when the
system adopts the spindle controlled by the converter, i.e. P410_d6 = 1. Do not execute the
constant surface speed control in G96 if the system uses the gear shifting spindle.
3) The constant surface speed control is executed anytime in G00, G01, G02, G03, G05, G90,
G94, G71, G72; the constant surface speed control is invalid in G32, G33, G92; when X
coordinate is changed in G50 or executing the tool offset, the spindle speed is valid in the next
command.
4) Min., max. speed of constant surface speed control is set by P304, P305.
5) The rotary axis in the constant surface speed must be set in Z(X=0) of the workpiece coordinate.
6) G96 is modal command. When G96 is valid, the single S command is taken as the new surface
speed data.
7) In DRY RUN mode, the constant surface speed control is valid. Whether the single S command
renews the previous surface speed is controlled in Dry run by P401_d7: P401_d7= 0: renew the
previous surface speed; P401_d7=1: do not renew the surface speed.
8) The constant surface speed control is invalid to get the constant spindle speed in thread cutting.
9) In G96, when the system defaults S field, the system automatically counts the surface speed as
S value according to the current spindle speed(the last speed is taken as the current speed
when the spindle does not start, the spindle initial speed is taken as the current speed when the
system is switched on just now) and X absolute coordinate value of tool nose.
10) The system automatically count the speed as S value according to the current constant surface
cutting speed and X absolute value of tool nose when the system defaults S field in G97.
11) In AUTO working mode and the initial state of the program execution in G96, the system
automatically changes G96 into G97 after CYCLE START key is pressed, the constant surface
cutting is valid in machining the arc and the straight line in the course of machining.
12) In Jog working mode, move X coordinate in feed state (rapid/feed indicator OFF) in G96, G96 is
valid, the spindle speed changes along X coordinate value, and is invalid in rapidly feed
state(rapid/feed indicator ON).
13) S value of G96 is limited by S value of G50 Sxxxx and P304, P305, S initialization of G50 is
P305, their limit relationship is as follows:
●G50 Sxxx<P304: G50 Sxxx is invalid, the spindle speed is regulated in G50 Sxxx<P304 in
G96 .
●G50 Sxxx>=P304: G50 Sxxx is valid, min. spindle speed range is limited by P304 and max.
speed range is limited by the smaller between G50 Sxxx and P305.
187
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Example】
P304 value is the lower limit of the spindle speed in constant surface control. When the spindle
speed counted by the surface speed and X coordinate value is lower than P304 value, the lower limit of
the spindle speed is the actual spindle speed + the limit.
Example:as Fig. 4-17; surface speed is 300m/min which can count the spindle speed annotated in
Table 4-2.
Fig. 4-17
Table 4-2:
(Spindle rotates clockwise, the constant surface speed control is valid and the
N0010 M3 G96 S300;
surface speed is 300 m/min)
N0020 G0 X100 Z100; (Rapidly traverse to A point with spindle speed 955 r/min)
N0030 G0 X50 Z0; (Rapidly traverse to B point with spindle speed 1910 r/min)
N0040 G1 W-30 F200; (Cut from B to C with spindle speed 1910 r/min)
N0050 X80 W-20 F150; (Cut from C to D with spindle speed 1910 r/min and surface speed 1194 r/min)
N0060 G0 X100 Z100; (Rapidly retract to A point with spindle speed 955 r/min)
N0110 M30; (End of program, spindle stopping and coolant OFF)
It is necessary to cut repeatedly the same machining path in the course of some special roughing.
To simplify the programming, improve the programming and the machining efficiency, the canned cycle
is set. The tool will automatically return to the coordinate position before execution when executing the
canned cycle once. If the cycle is executed again, do not alter the cycle commands but execute the
programming of feeding data again. Return to the starting point of cycle after the system executes the
cycle. If other commands G are contained in the block behind the cycle ones, the cycle automatically
ends. The single canned cycle only uses Z/X programming.
4.14.1 G90 —outer cylinder face turning cycle (axial cutting cycle)
【Command format】
G90 Z(W)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;inner/outer cylinder face turning cycle;
X(U)_ F_ ;G90 cycle consecutive command; cycles once
G90 contour.
【Field】
188
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
X(U)Z(W)— cylinder(taper) end point, The two axes must be given and the incremental
coordinates cannot be zero.
R —diameter difference between the starting point and the end point of cycle. It is the axis surface
cutting if R is omitted.
F —feedrate.
【Field range】
X,Z,U,W,R:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
F:0.001mm/min~15000mm/min
【Command execution process】
Fig. 4-18a outer/inner cylinder (taper) face turning cycle Fig. 4-18b the system alarms in mistaken
programming contour
coordinate, and the system executes the cycle once based on G90 contour; U in the
consecutive command is relative to the cycle starting point. For example, when the system
only defines again X end point coordinate (X/U), it executes the above cycle according to the
new X(U) coordinates. The cycle contour of the consecutive command must be consistent with
the direction in G90, otherwise, the system alarm.
5) There is only the single X(U) field (with F command) in the cycle consecutive command; the
next block of the consecutive command can follow the consecutive command; when the next
block is not the single X(U) instead but other G command, the system cancels the cycle; when
the next block is not the single X(U) but M, S, T, the system prompts the alarm message.
6) When G41/G42 are compiled with G90 in the same block, the system executes the tool nose
radius compensation in G90; the system automatically executes the compensation according
to the motion path, which is referred to PROGRAM Chapter 5 Tool Nose Radius
Compensation.
7) In single block running, press CYCLE START to execute one cycle step. The single block stops
at the end point of each step.
8) Besides G41, G42, the command is in the alone block without other commands.
9) Explanations of G94, G92 cycle contour are the same those of G90.
10)Relationships between the data behind U, W, R and the tool path are as follows:
(1)U<0,W<0,R<0 (2)U<0,W<0,R>0
Z Z
U/2
U/2
W W
X X
X from A to B is negative, so U<0; X from A to B is negative, so U<0;
Z from B to C is negative, so W<0; Z from B to C is negative, so W<0;
X from C to B is negative, so R<0. X from C to B is positive, so R>0.
(3)U>0,W<0,R<0 (4)U<0,W<0,R>0
X
X from A to B is positive, so U>0; X from A to B is positive, so U>0;
Z from B to C is negative, so W<0; Z from B to C is negative, so W<0;
X from C to B is negative, so R<0. X from C to B is positive, so R>0.
190
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
【Example】
G92 executes the thread cycle cutting. The system executes the thread cycle cutting from the
starting point, and finally returns to the starting point.
【Command format】
G92 X(U )_ Z(W)_ P(E)_ K_ I_ R_ L_ H_ ;thread cutting cycle.
【Field】
P —— metric thread lead.
E —— inch thread lead.
When P/E is positive, the system executes the axial thread and Z is the thread axis; it is
negative, the system executes the end face thread and X is the thread axis.
191
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
192
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
speed and the pitch. The system alarms when the value exceeds P113 value(max. cutting
feed speed). Before it, the user must ensure the spindle speed must be stable, otherwise, it
can cause to be the disorder thread tooth.
② X rapidly moves from A to B: X(U)+R position(starting point B of thread).
③ X,Z execute the thread cutting to C.( including thread run-out); the process is the same
that of G33.
④ X rapidly returns to D.
⑤ Z rapidly returns to A( starting point).
⑥ Multi-thread, repeat the above step 2~4 to execute the multi-thread cutting
【Relative parameter】
In G92, the relative parameter for rapid traverse is referred to G00, the one for thread cutting is
referred to G33.
【Explanation】
1)It is necessary to execute the cutting feed many times, at the moment, only alter X coordinate value
of end point of cutting feed (or the increment value compared to the starting point). The coordinate
position is still on the starting point when the thread cycle ends.
2)The command cannot be in the same block with other command.
3)G92 recycle consecutive command means the system executes one time the contour in G92; when
P(E)is positive, G92 recycle consecutive command is only X(U); when P(E)is negative,
G92 recycle consecutive command is only Z(W).
4)The axial thread machining is limited by the diameter difference between the starting point and the
end point of the thread in cutting taper thread; it is limited by Z coordinate difference between the
starting point and end point of the cycle in cutting taper thread.
5)Notes are the same those of G33 thread cutting.
6)For axial taper thread, the pitch P/E is the pitch in the thread axis(Z); for the end face thread, it is
the pitch in the thread axis(X).
7)The relationship between R, K, P and tool path is as follows:
193
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
194
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
I W
【Example】
1)G92 axial straight thread: as Fig. 4-24
Fig. 4-24
195
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
P is positive; I sign determines the direction of thread run-out; there is no the thread run-out
when I is omitted;
2)G92 axial taper thread: as Fig. 4-25
P is positive; R sign determines the direction of the thread run-out; I sign is invalid.
Example:G00 Z100 X100
G92 W-60 U-50 R-10 K3 I6 P2
U-50.5
U-51
M30
Fig. 4-25
3)G92 end face taper thread: as Fig. 4-26
P is negative; R sign determines the direction of the thread run-out; I sign is invalid.
Example:G00 Z100 X10
G92 W-10 U60 R10 K3 I1.5 P-2
W-10.5
W-11
M30
Fig. 4-26
196
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
Fig. 4-27
5)Compound example:as Fig. 4-28
Z
B
R114 G B3
B2
B B1
C C F E
A D A(45,5)
D X
a inch straight thread b taper outer thread
Cutting feed
X Rapid feed
Fig. 4-28
Example 1: Metric straight thread as Fig. 4-28 a.(G1 14 :11 teeth,D=41.910, D2=40.431,
D1=38.952)
N0010 G00 X45 Z5 ;rapidly position A
N0020 M03 S600 ;spindle CW,600 rev/min
N0030 G92 X41 Z-50 E11 ;the first tool infeed,cutting 0.91 cm
N0040 X40.2 ;the second cutting 0.8 cm
N0050 X39.6 ;the third cutting 0.6 cm
N0060 X39.2 ;the fourth cutting 0.4 cm
N0070 X38.952 ;the fifth cutting to the required dimension
N0080 M30
The tool is still on A after executing the above-mentioned blocks.
Example 2: Outer taper thread as Fig. 4-28 b (R1 14 : D=41.910, D2=40.431, D1=28.952, P=2.309, the
197
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
N0030 G92 X40 Z-19.1 P2.309 R-22.6 ;the first tool infeed to cut
N0040 X36 ;the second tool infeed to cut
N0050 X32 ;the third tool infeed to cut
N0060 X28.952 ;the fourth tool infeed to cut
N0070 M30
The tool is still on A after executing the above-mentioned blocks.
【Command format】
G94 Z(W)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;end point coordinate. The coordinates of two axes
must be given and the incremental coordinates cannot be zero.
Z(W)_ F_ ; G94 recycle consecutive command; expresses the
system executes the recycle once according G94 contour
【Field】
X(U)Z(W)—end point coordinate. The coordinates of two axes must be given and the
incremental coordinates cannot be zero.
R —Z coordinate difference between the starting point and the end point. It is the face
cutting if R is omitted.
F — cutting speed
【Field range】
X, Z, U, W, R:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
F:0.001mm/min~15000mm/min
【Command execution process】
Fig. 4-29a G94 end face turning cycle Fig. 4-29b the system alarms because of mistaken programmed
contour
G01.
【Explanation】
1) G94 follows the re-cycle consecutive command to set again Z end point coordinate, the system
executes the cycle once according to G94 contour; W in the consecutive command is relative to
the cycle starting point. For example, after the system redefines Z end point coordinate(Z/W), it
executes the cycle process repeatedly according to the new Z(W) coordinates. The consecutive
command cycle contour must be consistent with that of G94, otherwise, the system alarms.
2) There is the alone Z(W) in the cycle consecutive command; the next block of the consecutive
command can follow the consecutive command; when the next block is not the alone Z(W) but
other G command, the cycle is cancelled; when it is not the alone Z(W) but M,S,T, the system
prompts the alarm message.
3) When G41/G42 and G94 are compiled in the same block, the system executes the tool nose
radius compensation in G94; the system automatically compensates according to the motion
path, which is referred to PROGRAMMING, Chapter 5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
4) G94 is in the alone block except for G41, G42 without other commands.
5) Other explanations of G94 are the same those of G90.
6) Relationships between the data behind U, W, R and the tool path are as follows:
Z Z
U/2
U/2
R W R W
X X
X fro m B to C is n e g a tive , so U < 0; X fro m B to C is ne g a tive , so U < 0;
X fro m A to B is n e ga tive , so W < 0; X fro m A to B is n e g a tive, so W < 0;
X fro m C to B is n e g a tive , so R < 0. X fro m C to B is po sitive , so R > 0.
(3)U>0,W<0,R>0 (4)U>0,W<0,R<0
Z Z
U/2
U/2
R W
W
X X
X from B to C is p o sitive , so U >0; X fro m B to C is p o sitive , so U >0;
X from A to B is n eg a tive , so W <0; X fro m A to B is n e g a tive, so W <0;
X from C to B is p o sitive , so R >0. X fro m C to B is n e g a tive , so R < 0.
【Example】
199
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Z
Z
C2 C1 C D
C D
A(62,45) G F
A(55,5)
B2 B1 B A B B4B3B2B1 E
X R
a X
b
Fig. 4-31 G94 cutting example
Example 1:Fig. 4-31a, the first feed= 5 mm, the second feed= 1.5 mm, F=80 mm/min, and its
programming as follows:
N0010 G00 X62 Z45 ;rapidly position to A point
N0020 G94 X25 Z40 F80 ;the first cycle A B C D A
N0030 Z35 ;tool infeed 5mm, the 2nd cycle A B1 C1 D A
N0040 Z33.5 ;tool infeed 1.5m, the 3rd cycle A B2 C2 D A
N0050 M30
Example 2: Fig. 4-31b, feed R=-5 mm once, feedrate=100 mm/min and its programming as follows:
N0010 G00 X55 Z5 ;rapidly position to A point
N0020 G94 X30 Z-5 R-5 F100 ;the first cycle A B1 C D A
N0030 G94 X30 Z-5 R-10 ; tool infeed 5mm, the 2nd cycle A B2 C D A
N0040 G94 X30 Z-5 R-15 ; tool infeed 5mm, the 3rd cycle A B3 C D A
N0050 G94 X30 Z-5 R-20 ;tool infeed 5mm, the 4th cycle A B4 C D A
N0060 G94 X30 Z-5 R-25 ;tool infeed 5mm, the 5th cycle A B C D A
【Command format】
G74 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ R_ E_ F_ ;Deep Hole Machining Cycle on End Face
【Field】
X(U)Z(W)—coordinates of hole bottom. It is the deep hole drilling cycle when X coordinate
is omitted.
I —Z tool infeed once(Z axis)
K — Z tool retraction once(Z axis)
R —pecking cycle or deep hole cycle. When R is omitted or R=0, the distance of retraction is
only K, i.e. pecking cycle. When R=1, retract to the starting point of the first drilling hole
once, i.e. deep hole drilling cycle
E —X offset value once(diameter value).
F — federate.
【Field range】
X, Z, U, W:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
I, K:0~9999.999mm
200
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
E:deep hole drilling cycle is 0~9999.999 mm; end face deep hold machining cycle is
0.001~9999.999 mm
R:0 or 1
F:0.001mm/min~15000mm/min
【Explanation】
R≠0,G74 cycle process as follows:
⑤ Z rapidly retracts to A.
⑨ The tool still stops the starting point of the cycle when G74 cycle ends.
【Relative parameter】
In G74, the relative parameter of rapid traverse is referred to G00, the cutting feed is referred to G01.
【Note】
1) In G74, the system is not relative to the tool width, the end point X should be the actual
subtracting or adding the tool width(it is determined by the tool infeed direction).
2) I, K, E are no sign. The system executes the operation according to K =I when K is more than I.
3) G74 is in the alone block without other commands.
4) In the end face deep hole machining cycle, E cannot be 0, otherwise, the system appears
E269 alarm; in the deep hole drilling cycle, E can be 0, which is valid.
【Example】
The end face deep hole machining cycle as Fig. 4-34: tool width= 5 mm, tool infeed =6 mm once,
tool retraction= 2 mm, offset= 5 mm once, F=100 mm/min.
【Command format】
G75 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ E_ F_ ;Grooving Cycle
【Field】
X(U)Z(W)—end point coordinate of slot. It is the cutoff cycle when Z coordinate is
omitted.
202
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
【Relative parameter】
It is the same that of G74.
【Note】
1) In G75, the system is not relative to the tool width, the end point Z should be the actual
203
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
subtracting or adding the tool width(it is determined by the tool infeed direction).
2) I, K, E are no sign. The system executes the operation according to K =I when K is more than I.
3) G75 is in the alone block without other commands.
4) In the outer grooving cycle, E cannot be 0, otherwise, the system appears E269 alarm; in the
outer cutting cycle, E can be 0, which is valid.
【Example】
Fig. 4-36 grooving cycle: tool width= 5 mm,tool infeed mm,retracting= 2mm once,offset=
5 mm once,F=150 mm/min.
To simply the programming and reduce the counting, the compound cycle is applied. Although the
system only defines the path of finish machining in programming, it can automatically specify the tool
path in the course of roughing.
Using the command can realize the compound cycle cutting of one group of slope command
collection. The system firstly starts from the starting point to rough the blank along the axial, and then cut)
along the command group path, and at last returns to the starting point, and the roughing is completed.
When the roughing offset value(roughing allowance) is set in advance before executing the roughing
command, the system automatically offsets one offset to execute the roughing. The finishing tool can
be used before executing the roughing command. Use G710 to execute the finishing.
G71 includes the following 3 commands:
① G71 U W ; use U, W to specify roughing offset value
② G71 X(U) I K F P Q ; G71 axial roughing cycle
204
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
G71② is called the axial roughing cycle command to realize the compound cycle roughing of one group
of slop command group. The system executes the gradual roughing along the axial(called sidestep
roughing), and execute the cutting along the command group path(called as contour first turning), and at
last returns to the initial point, and the roughing is completed. The chapter describes the execution
process of G71 roughing command.(imagine the offset value of ① roughing is: W0, U0).
【Command format】
G71 X(U)_ I_ K_ F_ P_ Q_ ;Inner/outer roughing compound cycle
【Field】
X(U)— X coordinate value of finishing contour starting point
I — X tool infeed once without sign; I cannot be 0. K — X tool retraction once without sign.
P, Q — finishing contour starting and final path block line.
F — roughing cutting speed.
【Field range】
X,U:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
I:0.001mm~9999.999mm
K:0~9999.999mm
P,Q:1~9999
F:0.001mm/min~15000mm/min
【Command execution process】
⑥ Repeat the above step ② ~ ⑤ and gradually cut till X reaches the specified finishing
contour starting point.
⑦ X, Z executes the cutting at the separately specified speed according to the final path and
machine the shape described by the final path.
⑧ Last, Z rapidly returns to starting point, and X rapidly returns to the starting point.
【Relative parameters】
In G71, the relative parameter of rapid traverse is referred to G00, the cutting feed is referred to G01.
【Explanation】
1) When the system executes G71, it can automatically searches and executes P~Q blocks;
after executing them, it executes the next program following G71. But, when P~Q are
complied following G71, the system returns to the starting point and then executes the block
following Q.
2) In P~Q, there are only G command: G00, G01, G02, G03, G05, G04, G96, G97, G98, G99;
the system permits the general input/output to control M command instead of other commands
(T, transfer, call command). The system only uses Z/X programming. The path quantity in P~
Q cannot exceed 1000.
3) F, S in P~Q are invalid when it executes the roughing, and they are valid in the final path; so F
speed should be specified in advance or F is programmed with G71 in the same block.
4) In P~Q, X, Z dimension data must change monotonously in the slope (always increasing or
reducing) ; X starts from the finishing contour starting point B to monotonously change to G71
starting point A.
5) The address I, K have no sign, the tool infeed direction is automatically determined by the
system, the smaller I is, the more the roughing layer is.
6) I range is related to X(U); I, U range meets that U/I must be less than 10000.
7) When the system executes the single, it pauses after it runs the end point of the current step
path.
8) When G41/G42 is compiled with G71 in the same block, the system executes the tool nose
radius compensation in roughing the blank and cutting the final path; the system automatically
compensates according to the motion path, which is referred to PROGRAMMING Chapter Tool
Nose Radius Compensation.
9) Besides G41, G42, the command is in an alone block without other commands.
10)G71 cutting has the following four shapes as Fig. 4-45; the tool cuts from G71 starting point A
and the tool parallels with Z to rough the blank till B.
11)Generally, X of BCD section should be in the range between B and A; when D exceeds A, the
system does not rough the exceeding.
12)Do not use the chamfer command in the compound cycle command (G71, G72), otherwise, the
system alarms.
13)There are four shaper in G71: Fig. 4-38, A is G71 starting point, B is the finishing starting point, D
206
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
Fig. 4-38
【Example】
As Fig. 4-39: rod Φ82,tool infeed = 4 mm once, tool retraction= 2.5 mm once, F= 60mm/min
N0000 G00 X115 Z155 ; position to the starting point
N0010 M3 S02 ; start the spindle, set to the high speed
N0020 M8 ; cooling ON
N0030 G00 X83 ; X tool infeed approaches workpiece
N0040 G71 X0 I4 K2.5 F100 P0090 Q0160 ; define roughing cycle parameter
N0050 G00 X115 Z155 ; return to tool starting point
N0060 M5 ; stop the spindle
N0070 M9 ; cooling OFF
N0080 M2 ; end of program
N0090 G01 Z145 F60 ;
N0100 X15 ;
N0110 W-30 ;
N0120 G03 X55 W-20 I0 K-20 ;
Define the final path
N0130 G01 W-25 ;
N0140 G01 X80 W-20 ;
N0150 W-50 ;
N0160 X81 ;
80
50 20 25 20 30 10
G71 includes 3 commands. When using ① sets the roughing offset value(roughing allowance) before
the roughing command ② is executed, the coordinate axis firstly offsets automatically one offset value to
execute the roughing path, i.e. the roughing path creates the whole offset to leave the allowance for the
next finishing. When ① is ignored, the roughing offset value is W0,U0. After the roughing, the finishing
tool can be changed and the command ③ is executed to the finishing.
207
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
208
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
Fig. 4-40
Using the command can realize the compound cycle cutting of one group of slope command collection.
The system firstly starts from the starting point to rough the blank along the axial, and then cut) along the
command group path, and at last returns to the starting point, and the roughing is completed. When the
roughing offset value(roughing allowance) is set in advance before executing the roughing command,
the system automatically offsets one offset to execute the roughing. The finishing tool can be used
before executing the roughing command. Use G720 to execute the finishing.
G72 command group includes 3 commands:
① G72 U W ; U, W specify roughing offset value
② G72 Z(W) I K F P Q ; G72 end face roughing cycle
③ G720 Z(W) P Q F ; G720 finishing
The followings are introduced separately.
G72② is called the axial roughing cycle command to realize the compound cycle roughing of one group
of slop command group. The system executes the gradual roughing along the axial(called sidestep
roughing), and execute the cutting along the command group path(called as contour first turning), and at
last returns to the initial point, and the roughing is completed. The chapter describes the execution
process of G72 roughing command.(imagine the offset value of ① roughing is: W0, U0).
【Command format】
G72 Z(W)_ I_ K_ F_ P_ Q_ ;End Face Roughing Cycle
【Field】
Z(W)—Z starting point coordinate of finishing.
I — Z tool infeed once without sign; I cannot be 0.
K — Z tool reaction once without sign.
P, Q — line number to describe finishing initial and final path. F — roughing cutting feedrate.
【Field range】
Z,W:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
I:0.001mm~9999.999mm
K:0~9999.999mm
P, Q:1~9999
209
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
F:0.001mm/min~15000mm/min
【Relative parameter】
It is the same that of G71.
【Explanation】
1) G72 is to cut the blank according to the tool parallel to X.
2) Other explanations are the same those of G71.
【Command execution process】
G72 cycle execution process as Fig. 4-40:
① Start from G72 starting point A, Z rapidly feeds the distance I.
② X cuts feed and its end point being defined automatically by the system.
③ Z retracts the distance K at F speed.
④ rapidly retracts to the starting point.
⑤ Z rapidly feeds the distance I+K.
⑥ repeat the above steps ② — ⑤ till Z reaches the starting point B of finishing contour
specified by Z.
⑦ Execute the final path to machine the shape described by the final path at the
specified speed.
⑧ Last, X rapidly returns to the stating point and then Z rapidly returns to the starting
point.
【Example】
210
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
As Fig. 4-42 : rod Φ163: tool infeed 5mm once, tool retraction 3 mm once, F=80mm/m
N0000 G00 X180 Z50 ; position to the starting point
N0010 M3 S02 ; start the spindle, set to the spindle speed 2
N0020 M8 ; cooling ON
N0030 G00 X165 Z5 ; tool infeed approaches workpiece
N0040 G72 Z-125 I5 K3 F80 P0100 Q0150 ; define roughing cycle parameter
N0050 G00 Z50 ; Z returns to the starting point of machining
N0060 X180 ; X returns to the starting point of machining
N0070 M5 ; stop the spindle
N0080 M9 ; cooling OFF
N0090 M2 ; end of program
N0100 G01 X160 ;
N0110 Z-55 ;
N0120 X80 Z-35 ;
Define the final path
N0130 Z-20 ;
N0140 X30 Z0 ;
N0150 X0 ;
G72 includes 3 commands. When using ① sets the roughing offset value(roughing allowance) before
the roughing command ② is executed, the coordinate axis firstly offsets automatically one offset value to
execute the roughing path, i.e. the roughing path creates the whole offset to leave the allowance for the
next finishing. When ① is ignored, the roughing offset value is W0,U0. After the roughing, the finishing
tool can be changed and the command ③ is executed to the finishing.
【Command ① format and meaning 】
G72 U_ W_ ;specify roughing offset valu
U — X offset value; U range:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm;
W — Z offset value; W range:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm.
【Command ③ format and meaning 】
G720 Z(W) _ P_ Q_ F_ ;G720 finishing
211
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Fig. 4-43
Using the command can realize the closed compound cycle roughing and finishing. The system
gradually cuts the blank and cuts along the command group path, and at last returns to the starting point,
and the roughing is completed. When the roughing offset value(roughing allowance) is set in advance
before executing the roughing command, the system automatically offsets one offset to execute the
roughing. The finishing tool can be used before executing the roughing command. Use G730 to
execute the finishing.
G73 starting point is the same with the end point, and the command is applied to the roughing of
formed blank. G73 is non-modal and its path is as Fig. 4-44.
G73 command group includes 3 commands:
① G73 U W ; U,W specify the roughing offset value
② G73 X(U) Z(W) I K F P Q L ; G73 closed roughing cycle
③ G730 X(U) Z(W) P Q F ; G730 finishing
212
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
G73 ② is called the closed roughing cycle command to realize the compound cycle roughing of one
group of close command group. The system firstly executes from the starting point to gradually cut the
blank(called step roughing), and cuts along the command group path(called contour first turning) and
returns to the initial point, and the roughing is completed.
The chapter describes the execution process of G73 roughing(imagine the command ① roughing offset
value is W=0,U=0).
【Command format】
G73 X(U)_ Z(W) _ I_ K_ L_ P_ Q_ F_ ;closed roughing cycle
【Field definition】
X(U)— X coordinate value of starting point B of contour in roughing.
Z(W)— Z coordinate value of starting point B of contour in roughing.
P —line number of initial block in roughing contour.
Q —line number of the last block in roughing contour.
F — cutting feedrate in roughing.
I — X tool retraction A1 in the first roughing with sign.
K —Z tool retraction A1 in the first roughing with sign.
L — cutting times, i.e. gradual cutting layer quantity.
X(U),Z(W),P,Q describe ABCA closed path, i.e. the tool rapidly positions from A to B, and then C
when the system executes PQ block, and rapidly returns to A. ABCA is the path of the last roughing.
I, K describe the system firstly offsets IK value and then executes the first roughing; i.e. executes
A1B1C1 A1 path.
L describes the L layers from the first roughing, and the system executes the last roughing; the
cutting amount of each layer should be even, i.e. X is I/L, Z is K/L, and the cutting is executed from
A1B1C1to ABC. The actual cutting times is L+1.
【Field range】
X,U,Z,W:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
I,K:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm
P,Q :1~9999
L:1~9999
F:0.001mm/min~15000mm/min
【Execution process】 as Fig.4-44. Suppose L=2 layers.
① A→A1:rapidly traverse, offset I, K, to A1;
② the first roughing, A1→B1→C1 :
A1→B1:rapidly traverse to B1;
213
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
B1→C1:cutting feed;
③ C1→A2:rapidly traverse;
④ the second roughing,A2→B2→C2 :
A2→B2:rapidly traverse;
B2→C2:cutting feed;
C2→A:rapidly traverse;
The last roughing:
A→B:rapidly traverse;
B→C:cutting feed;
C→A:rapidly traverse to starting point.
【Command explanation】
1) In P~Q blocks, it is different with G71/G72,which cannot ensure X, Z dimension data
monotonously changes.
2)The tool retraction direction is determined by I, K signs.
3) The tool nose radius compensation usages in G73 command group are different with
G71/G72;the tool nose radius compensation command G41/G42 cannot be compiled with G73
in the same block; the system can create, cancel or use them together in P~Q blocks; the
system alarms when it cancels the tool nose radius compensation in other blocks except for
P~Q.
4)After the tool nose radius compensation is created in P~Q,the roughing and finishing are valid
214
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
in G73.
5)Other explanations are referred to G71, G72.
G71 includes 3 commands. When using ① sets the roughing offset value(roughing allowance) before
the roughing command ② is executed, the coordinate axis firstly offsets automatically one offset value to
execute the roughing path, i.e. the roughing path creates the whole offset to leave the allowance for the
next finishing. When ① is ignored, the roughing offset value is W0, U0. After the roughing, the finishing
tool can be changed and the command ③ is executed to the finishing.
【Command ① format】
G73 U_ W_ ;specify the roughing offset value
U— X offset value; U range:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm;
W— Z offset value; W range:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm。
【Command ① field definition】
U:X offset value (roughing allowance) means X coordinate offset of the last roughing path relative to
the finishing path;
W: Z offset value (roughing allowance) means X coordinate offset of the last roughing path relative
to the finishing path.
【Command ③ format and definition】
G730 X(U) _ Z(W) _ P_ Q_ F_ ;G730 finishing
Or G730 ;ignoring it means to be consistent with the
roughing command ②
X(U)— X coordinate value of contour starting point in finishing.
Z(W)— Z coordinate value of contour starting point in finishing.
P,Q — line number of the block from the initial to the final in finishing contour.
F — finishing cutting feedrate.
【Explanation】
1) G730 other explanations are same those of G71, G72 roughing offset commands and G710,
G720 finishing commands.
2) When the system executes G730, it cuts along the command group path and returns to the
starting point, the finishing is completed.
3) G73 command group finishing positioning point is different with the roughing positioning point,
the tool movement path automatically coincides.
4)Coordinate offset direction in left roughing allowance:
I, K, U, W express the coordinate offset and cut-in direction in roughing and finishing; generally,
K and W signs are consistent each other, and there are four kinds of composition as Fig. 4-45:
215
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
A is start-up tool point, B→C is the workpiece contour, B’→C’ is the roughing contour, and
B’’→C’’ is the finishing path.
1)I<0 U<0 ,K>0 W>0; 2)I>0 U>0, K>0 W>0;
Z Z
B”
A B’
C A’
C’ B
A”
C”
C”
B C’ A”
B’ C A’
A
X B” X
Z B ’’ Z
B’
A
C B
A’
A ’’ C’
C ’’
C ’’
A’’ C’
A’ C
B A
B’ X
X B ’’
Fig. 4-45
【Example】
14
14.5
14.5
(200,30)
Fig. 4-46
216
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
G76 thread cycle cutting path is the same that of G92. The difference is that G92 completes the
cutting depth by the consecutive command but G76 informs the last cutting face and the gradual
cutting depth information in advance and is arranged by the system to execute the gradual
cutting-depth and to machine the qualified thread.
G76 command group includes 2 commands:
① G76 D_ I_ Q_ P_ L_ R_ ;G76 cycle information
② G76 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P(E)_ I_ K_ R_ L _ H_ ;G76 thread cutting
The followings are introduced separately.
G76 ② is called the multi thread cutting cycle command to realize the multi thread cutting.
When the thread angle is 0°, each thread cycle is from the starting point to the cut-in point, the
thread axis does not move, and the single axis of the non thread axis moves to the cut-in point, and
the cut path is the completely same with that of G92.
【Command ② format】
G76 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P(E)_ I_ K_ R_ L _ H_ ; G76 thread cutting
【Command ② definition explanations】
Field definitions, data range are the same those of G92 as Fig. 4-47:
Starting point(end point):position before the block runs and after the run stops, is expressed
with A.
Thread end point: the thread cutting end point defined by X(U) Z(W) is expressed with
C.
Thread starting point: Z absolute coordinate is same that of A, the difference between X
absolute coordinate and that of C is the thread taper, expressed with
E. When the defined thread angle is not 0° , the tool cannot reach E in
cutting.
Tool retraction end point: after the thread cutting is completed in each thread roughing cycle
217
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
and finishing cycle, the end point of the radial(X) tool retraction is
expressed with D.
when I× n - the last cut depth)<Q, Q is taken as the cutting amount of this roughing,
i.e. the thread cut depth is(the last cut depth+Q). setting Q is to avoid the small roughing
cutting amount and too many roughing times because of thread cutting amount gradually
decreasing.
P:it is the angle between neighboring two threads. The actual thread angle is determined by
the tool angle, and so P value should be consistent with the tool angle.
L:Thread finishing times.
R:cutting amount in thread finishing is equal to the difference between the thread finishing
cut-in point Be and X absolute coordinate of the last thread roughing cut-in point Bf. In the
thread finishing, the first cutting amount is R and the following finishing amount is 0.
【Command ① explanation】
1) When the system executes the command, it loads P, L, R, Q values to their corresponding
parameter, because the several parameters must be used when the system executes the
command ②.
2) When the system executes the command, D, I are memorized to the system internal and are
used in G76②.
3) The system must firstly execute one G76① command,and then can execute one or more
G76② commands, otherwise, it alarms because of lacking some necessary information.
218
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
4) P, L, R, Q can be omitted all. When they are omitted, the system runs according to P336, P337,
P338, P339 setting values in executing G76②;but D, I cannot be omitted.
Relative definitions:(as Fig. 4-47)
Thread cut depth reference point: Z absolute coordinate of the thread cut depth reference point
is the same that of E, the difference between X absolute coordinate and X absolute coordinate
of E is D (total cut depth of the thread), which is expressed with B. B thread cut depth is 0, and
is the reference point of the system counting each thread cut depth.
Thread cut depth: the cut depth of each thread cut cycle. It is the intersection between the
inverse extension line of each thread cut path and the linear BE, the difference value(no
sign) between the intersection and X absolute coordinate of B. the thread cut depth of each
roughing is n ×I, n is the current roughing cycle times, and I is the thread cut depth of
the first roughing.
Thread cut amount: the difference between the thread cut depth and the last: ( n - n −1 )
×I. Cut amount cannot be less than the least cut amount Q.
Thread cut-in point: the actual start thread cut point in each thread roughing and finishing is
expressed with Bn (n is the current roughing cycle times), B1 is the first thread roughing
cut-in point, Bf is the last thread roughing cut-in point, Be is the thread finishing cut-in
point. The replacement formula of Bn relative to X, Z of B is as follows:
p | Z axis replacemen t |
tg =
2 | X axis replacemen t |
P:thread angle
【Command ② execution process】
① Rapidly traverse to B1 from the starting point, the first thread cut depth is I. P=0: only X
moves;P≠0:,X and Z move simultaneously, and their movement directions are the same
that of A→C;
② The thread in a parallel with E→C cuts to the insect of C→D(when there is the thread
run-out, there is the thread run-out process);
③ X rapidly traverses to D;
④ Z rapidly traverses to A,and the single roughing cycle is completed;
⑤ Rapidly traverse again to Bn(n is the current roughing cycle times),cut depth( n ×I),the
bigger value in (the last cut depth +Q),when the cut depth is less than(D-R),the system
executes ②;when the cut depth is more than or equal to(D-R),the tool infeed is executed
in the cut depth(D-R)to Bf,and the system executes ⑥执 the last thread roughing;
⑥ The thread in a parallel with E→C cuts to the insect of C→D(when there is the thread
run-out, there is the thread run-out process);
⑦ X rapidly moves to D;
⑧ Z rapidly moves to A,the thread roughing cycle is completed to start the thread finishing;
219
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
⑨ The thread finishing is executed after the tool rapidly moves to B(thread
e cut depth is D, the
cut depth is R),and the last the system returns to A to complete the thread finishing cycle;
⑩ When the finishing cycle times is L, the system executes ⑨ to complete the finishing cycle,
the thread cut depth is D, the cut amount is 0; when the finishing cycle times is L, G76
compound thread machining cycle is completed.
Fig. 4-47
The cut-in method is as Fig. 4-48:
Fig. 4-48
220
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
【Command ② explanation】
1. Using G76 thread cycle cutting command group can complete the specified tooth height(total
cut depth) of the thread cutting by multi thread roughing and finishing; when the thread angle
defined by the command ① is not 0°, the cut-in point of thread roughing moves to the thread
tooth bottom from the thread tool top and the angle between neighboring two teeth is the
defined thread angle.
2. G76 command group can machine the straight and taper thread with the thread run-out to
realize the one-sided tool edge thread cutting which can reduce the tool wear and improve the
thread precision.
3. G76 command group can machine multi-head thread, end face thread. When G76 machines the
multi-head thread and the tool executes one time the cut depth, the tool cuts each thread with
the same cut depth, and it executes the next cut depth till the multi-head thread cut is
completed.
4. When the thread angle defined by G76 ① is not 0, X, Z move simultaneously, the thread axis
reaches the cut-in point, and then the single-axis for non-thread axis moves to the cut-in point in
G76 ② thread cycle from the starting point to the cut-in point; other cut path is the same that of
G92 as Fig. 4-47.
【Example】
Example:Fig. 4-49,thread is M68×6.
68
60.64
Fig. 4-49
Program:
G50 X100 Z50 M3 S300 ;set workpiece coordinate system, start the spindle and
specify its speed
G00 X80 Z10 ;rapidly move to the machine starting point
G76 D7.36 I3.6 Q0.3 P60 L2 R0.2;thread tooth height 7.36,the 1st thread cut depth 3.6;
;the least cut-in depth 0.3,tool angle 60°,
;repetitive finishing 2 times, finishing cutting amount 0.2.
G76 X60.64 Z-62 P6 I0.5 L3 ;pitch 6,3-head thread
G00 X100 Z50 ;return to program starting point
221
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
In the course of actual machining, for the part of workpiece or the formed parts, the part cycle
command is employed to simplify the programming. The cycle body of part cycle is defined by part
programming. The coordinates of end point are determined after executing this cycle.
【Command format】
G22 L_
……
Cycle body program
……
……
G80
【Field】
G22 defines the starting of cycle body;
L: defines the cycle times, range 1~9999;
G80 defines the end of cycle body.
【Explanation】
Command execution process:
① G22 defines the starting of cycle body and L defines the cycle times.
② Execute the cycle body program.
③ Cycle times L subtracts 1 when G80 cycle body ends. Execute the cycle body program again
when L ≠0;when L=0 , the cycle ends and the following program is executed.
【Note】
1) G22 and G80 must be used at the same time, There is no G22 in the cycle body, i.e. G22 cannot
be embedded; the single G22 is embedded into G22, G80 cycle body, the program is valid, but it
cannot form the cycle body.
2) The subprogram can be called in the loop body. It can have M96 and M97. Regarding as the
component which shape has already determined and needs to the roughing, using G22 and G80
programming is very convenient and can improve the processing efficiency.
3) For axis needing creating the cycle offset, the program in the cycle body uses the relative
programming. There is the offset between the exit coordinates and inlet coordinates of the cycle
body to get the same cycle program and machining contour, and the different machining path
every time.
4) G22, G80 can embed G90, G92, G94, G71, G72 and other cycle command.
【Example】
Machining the workpiece as Fig. 4-42a cycle programming with G22, G80 as follows:
N0000 G50 X100 Z100 ; Define a coordinate system
N0010 M3 S01 ;Start the spindle, set to the low speed
N0020 M8 ;Cooling ON
222
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
N0030 G00 X10 Z30 ;Rapidly position to the starting point of the cycle
N0040 G22 L3 ;Program cycles three times
N0050 G01 W-5 F50 ;Z negatively cuts 5mm,F=50mm/min
N0060 U5 W-5 ;X positively cuts 5mm,Z negatively cuts 5mm
N0070 G80 ;End of cycle body
N0080 G26 ;X, Z rapidly retracts to program reference point
N0090 M5 ;Stop the spindle
N0100 M9 ;Cooling OFF
N0110 M2 ;End of program
10 20 30
Fig. 4-42
Machining the arc as Fig. 4-42b the cycle programming with G22, G80 as follows:
N0000 G00 X36 Z-5 ;Rapidly position to the starting point of arc
N0010 G22 L3 ;Program cycle three times
N0020 G01 U-2 F50 ;X executes the tool infeed 1mm
N0030 G03 W-14.28 R10 ;X, Z executes the tool infeed, cutting concave arc
N0040 G01 W14.28 F500 ;Z executes the tool retraction to starting point of arc
N0050 G80 ;End of cycle body
N0060 M30
The above two examples are programmed according to the actual shape, Fig. 4-42a: its
programming can be used to the roughing including smithing and moulding, which can improve the
machining efficiency. Fig. 4-42b: it can be used to machining the rod
F:0~15000.000mm/min
0~15000.000mm/r
【Note】
1) G98/G99 must be matched with F word,otherwise the system alarms:“F leaves out information”.
2) G98/G99 is the modal command and it is valid before being changed. The single F can be taken
as the new feedrate.
3) G98 is the initial state of system and the system automatically sets as G98 (mm/min).
4) F=0: the system alarms and prompts the alarm message when it executes the machining
programs.
5) In G99, when the spindle speed is 0, the feed automatically pauses and the system displays
“Pause: the spindle speed is 0”, keeps the state till CYCLE START is pressed, and the system
recovers the execution.
6) In G99, generally, when the spindle is started just now, the system should delay time properly to
wait the spindle speed stably and executes the cutting, otherwise, the system has not checked
the spindle speed, displays “Pause: the spindle speed is 0”.
【Example】
…
N0100 G98 F800 ; define the feed per minute,F feedrate: 800 mm/min;
…
N0160 F50 ; F feedrate: 50 mm/min;
…
N0200 G99 F2.1 ; set the feed per rev,F feedrate: 2.1 mm/rev;
…
N0250 F0.56 ; F feedrate: 0.56 mm/rev.
…
The execution of G31 is the same that of G01, and the difference is that G31 constantly check the
external input interface signal(G31I)state. When the signal meets the condition, the coordinate axis
stops the feed and continuously executes the next command, otherwise, the coordinate axis feeds to the
end point.
【Command format】
G31 Z(W)_ X(U)_ Y(V)_ F_ H_ ;Z/X/Y three-axis feed simultaneously
G31 Z(W)_ X(U)_ F_ H_ ;Z/X two-axis feed simultaneously, or Z/X, Z/Y, X/Y
two-axis feed simultaneously
G31 Y(V)_ F_ H_ ;Y single-axis feeds
【Field】
X, Z, Y: end point coordinates after the command ends.
U, W, V: incremental value counted by the theory end point.
224
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
F:feedrate. F is modal and can be omitted when it is not changed; it is controlled by the feedrate
override.
H:command bit parameter(H_d7 ~ H_d1:reserved); the system defaults it to be 0 when it defaults.
H_d0=0: G31I LOW meets the skip condition;
H_d0=1: G31I HIGH meets the skip condition;
【Field range】
X, Z, Y, U, W, V:(-9999.999~9999.999)mm
F:0.001mm/min~15000mm/min
【Explanation】
Z/X/Y can execute single-axis, two-axis, or three-axis feed simultaneously.
G31 traverse speed is specified by F and controlled by the feedrate override.
Actual feedrate =F x feedrate override
G31 is non-modal command, and can be omitted in the next block when it is the same.
【Note】
1) G31 input check function is non-standard pin input control; when the function is needed, the
user can define its pin in the interface parameter P5532(G31I)and correctly connects with the
wirings. The concrete interface parameter definitions are referred to OPERATION, 4.6
Parameter Working Mode; the concrete wiring connection is referred to CONNECTION,
Chapter 3 CNC Device Connection.
2) To get the exact position, the run decelerates once the system has checked the external input
interface signal change. So, the actual feedrate in G31 is not too high and it is suggested that it
should be less than 1000mm/min, otherwise, G31 cannot realize the skip function because it
cannot check the interface signal.
【Relative parameter】
Interface parameter P532 defines the input interface pin.
The relative parameter of cutting feed is referred to G01.
【Example】
Current: X=100 Z=100;
G31 Z30 F500;
The move distance is Z70, Z moves at 500mm/min continuously to Z30 when G31I signal cannot
meet the skip condition; Z=68.37: G31I meets the skip condition and Z immediately stops
running and the system executes the next command.
When Y is used to control the rotary axis, the system has no the function specially for 0~360
automatically cycle change of the rotary axis, but G52 can clear the integer and leave the remainder of
the rotary axis coordinates in JOG, AUTO working mode.
225
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
In G52, when “absolute values of tool nose coordinate of the current Y ≥ the rotary angle, the system
clears the integer coordinate value and leaves the remainder. The machine coordinate of Y also clears
the corresponding coordinate value.
【Command format】
G52 Y(V)_ ;rotary axis coordinate clearing
【Field definition】
Y:absolute coordinate of rotary axis;
V:relative movement of rotary axis.
【Field range】
Y,V:-9999.999mm~9999.999mm (sign of value is meanless)
【Explanation】
1)when the system parameter sets Y(P405_d1=1),G52 is valid.
2)G52 is only in the single block and cannot be in the block with other commands.
3)absolute value of the number following Y(V) means the rotary angle per revolution. When it is 0,
it defaults to be 360.000 degree.
4)there is no data field following G52, the system defaults to be G52 Y360.000.
【Relative parameter】
Parameter related to G52: P405_d1.
【Example】
G00 Y20
G01 Y136.6
G52 Y100 ; rotary axis coordinate clearing the integer 100,Y coordinate value
is 36.6
Whether the additional axis(Y) function is valid is determined by P405_d1; P405_d1=1: the
additional axis(Y) function is valid.
【Main relative parameters】
The main relative parameters setting the additional axis: P405_d1, P410_d4.
226
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
227
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
228
Programming Chapter Four G Commands and Functions
229
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
5.1 Application
5.1.1 Overview
Part program is compiled generally for one point of tool according to a workpiece contour. The point
is generally regarded as the tool nose A point in an imaginary state (there is no imaginary tool nose point
in fact and the tool nose radius can be omitted when using the imaginary tool nose point to program) or
as the center point of tool nose arc ( as Fig. 5-1). Its nose of turning tool is not the imaginary point but
one arc owing to the processing and other requirement in the practical machining. There is an error
between the actual cutting point and the desired cutting point, which will cause the over- or under-cutting
affecting the part precision. So a tool nose radius compensation is needed in machining to improve the
part precision.
Fig.5-1 tool
B tool compensation is defined that a workpiece contour path is offset one tool nose radius, which
cause there is excessive cutting at an intersection of two programs because of executing motion path of
next after completing the previous block.
To avoid the above-mentioned ones, the system uses C tool compensation method (namely, tool
nose radius compensation). The system will read the next block instead of executing it immediately after
reading a block in C tool compensation method, and count corresponding motion path according to
intersection of blocks. Contour can be compensated precisely because reading two blocks are
pretreated as Fig. 5-2.
G
4
0
x
Thick unbroken line is the tool center path
Workkpiece
G
4
1
r
Arc is tool nose
r is tool nose radius
230
Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)
【Explanation】
1)Whether the tool nose radius compensation function is valid is set by P411_d5: 0: it is invalid; 1: it
is valid.
2)The tool nose transition mode is set by P413_d4: 0: linear transmission; 1: arc transition.
3)The front t/rear tool pose coordinate system is set by P413_d5.(position relationship between tool
nose center and imaginary tool nose.)
4)The system uses C tool radius compensation mode.
5)For the ball tool using tool nose radius compensation, the displayed is the imaginary tool nose
coordinates, the graph is the path.
6)Tool nose radius R≤0.001mm: the tool radius compensation function is invalid.
G40
G00 X Z ;
G41
G01
G42
The tool radius compensation application must determines the compensation direction according to
the relative position between the tool nose and the workpiece as Fig. 5-3:
The tool nose radius compensation is created by the first movement command following G41/G42.
observe from the starting point to the programming path of the command as follows:
In front tool post coordinate system:
1)In G41, the tool center cuts one tool nose radius in the right of the programming path direction, at
the moment, the tool center is in the right of the programmed path.
2)In G42, the tool center cuts one tool nose radius in the left of the programming path direction, at
the moment, the tool center is in the left of the programmed path.
In rear tool post coordinate system:
1)In G41, the tool center cuts one tool nose radius in the left of the programming path direction, at
the moment, the tool center is in the left of the programmed path.
2)In G42, the tool center cuts one tool nose radius in the right of the programming path direction, at
the moment, the tool center is in the right of the programmed path.
231
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
0 z x
x 0 z
G 2
4
1
G
4
2
G
4
G
4
1
Starting point of
Starting point of
compensation
compensation
G
4
2
G
4
1
Starting point Starting point
G
4
1
G
4
2
of compensation of compensation
When the initial state CNC is in the tool nose radius compensation cancel mode, the system
creates the tool nose radius compensation offset mode in G41 or G42. In the compensation start,
the system prereads 2 blocks, and the next block is saved to the tool nose radius compensation
buffer register in executing it. In single block running in AUTO working mode, the system reads two
blocks, and stops after executing the end point of the first block. In continuous execution in AUTO
working mode, the system prereads two block, i.e. the system is in the block and its following two
blocks which are being executed. The programming must follow as follows:
【Programming rules】
1)Before creating the radius compensation, Z/X should confirm the initial position; otherwise, which
causes the identifying compensation direction of the system is abnormal.
2)Creating the tool nose radius, the motion command following G41/G42 (or in the same block) only
uses G00 or G01 instead of G02 or G03 or G05; otherwise, the system alarms E251 only use
“ G00/G01 to create the radius compensation” And G00 or G01 has enough movement to create
the radius compensation(the movement is more than or equal to the tool nose radius) to avoid the
system alarming.
3)In radius compensation state, only G00, G01, G02, G03, G05 can be permitted to execute,
otherwise the system alarms “E248 does not cancel the tool nose radius compensation”.
4)In radius compensation state, the system permits the call, the transfer, M, S, F command; it does
not execute T command, otherwise, the system alarms “Forbidding the tool change in E249
tool nose radius compensation”.
5)After G40 cancelling compensation command (or in the same block), the system only uses G00
232
Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)
or G01; otherwise, the system alarms “E250 only uses G00/G01 to cancel the radius
compensation. G00 or G01 has enough movement to cancel the radius compensation to avoid
the system alarming.
6 ) Before executing M30, M02, M20, the system must firstly cancel the tool nose radius
compensation.
7)In G90, G94, G71, G72, the system executes the tool radius compensation; the compensation is
compiled with G41/G42 in the same block.
8)In radius compensation state, G00, G01 permits Y programming, the compensation axis is only
Z/X.
9)G40, G41, G42 must not be in the same block with T.
10)In executing G41/G42, the system cannot directly switch G42/G41; when they are switched, the
system must use G40 to cancel the current compensation direction to execute the switch.
【Programming format sample】
G00 Z X ;imaginary tool nose moves to Z/X position
G42(G41) ;specify the tool nose radius compensation mode, left or right
G01 Z X ;create the tool nose radius compensation; the tool center offsets
;the tool center does not move to the Z/X of the command, the side of the tool
moves to the position
G01 ;
……
G02 ;
G40 ;specify the tool nose radius compensation cancel
G00 Z X ;cancel the tool nose radius compensation
……
G41 G71 ;before switching the compensation direction(from G42 to G41), the system uses
G40 to cancel the tool nose radius compensation
……
M02 ;
Machine the workpiece as Fig. 5-4. Use the tool number T0101, the tool nose radius R=2, imaginary
tool nose number T=3.
The toolsetting is completed in the offset cancel mode, Z offsets one tool nose radius value, and the
tool direction is related to the toolsetting point based on the imaginary tool nose direction, otherwise, the
system overcuts one tool nose radius value in starting tool.
Program:
%110
T0101 ; tool change
G00 X100 Z50 ; tool center moves to (Z50.0, X100.0)
G00 X0 Z3 ; tool center offsets, actually moves to (Z3.0, X0)
G42 ; create the tool nose radius compensation
233
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
… … … … … …
006 … … … … …
007 … … … … …
R6
X
Fig. 5-4 machining example
For the ball tool, the displayed by the system is the coordinates of the imaginary tool nose. But in fact,
the system cannot move the tool nose radius center to the toolsetting point, so, it imagines one “tool
nose which is to move to the toolsetting point. The position relationship between the tool nose radius and
imaginary tool nose corresponds to the one between the tool nose radius center and the toolsetting
point.
In the actual toolsetting, there are 9 kinds of position relationship between the tool nose center and
imaginary tool nose, and the system uses the imaginary tool nose number 0~8.
The tool nose number 0 means the tool nose center is consistent with the imaginary tool nose.
234
Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)
The following table is the tool nose number 0~8 conditions, explaining the position relationship between
the tool nose center and imaginary tool nose, the arrowhead end point is the imaginary tool nose.
【Explanation】
1)Before the ball toolsetting, the imaginary tool nose number and the tool nose radius value of
each tool must be preset in the tool compensation table. In the tool compensation table, R is the
tool nose radius value, and T is the imaginary tool nose number.
2)In the ball toolsetting, the user should move the “imaginary tool nose point” to the toolsetting
point, and then input the actual coordinates of K/I toolsetting. In executing the program, the
system automatically executes the tool nose radius compensation according to the preset
imaginary tool nose number and the tool nose radius value in advance 。
3)When the system executes the tool nose radius compensation, its motion path is directly related
to T imaginary tool nose number; only inputting the correct imaginary tool nose number can get
the expected compensation result.
Position relationship between tool nose center and imaginary tool nose (front tool post
coordinate system )
O
Z
front tool post coordinate system
Tool nose
235
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Position relationship between tool nose center and imaginary tool nose (rear tool post
coordinate system )
O Z
Inside is defined that an angle at intersection of two motion blocks is more than or equal to 180°;
Outside is 0~180°.
236
Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)
3 steps to execute tool nose radius compensation: tool compensation creation, tool compensation
execution and tool compensation canceling.Tool traverse is called tool compensation creation (starting
tool) from offset canceling to G41 or G42 execution.
Note 1: The tool nose transition method is set by P411_d4.
Note 2: Meanings of S, L, C in the following figures are as follows:
S――Stop point of single block; L――linear; C――circular.
(a)Tool movement around an inner side of a corner (α≥180°)
r
G42 r G42
L
S
S Tool nose center path
L C Programmed path
L
Tool nose center path
Fig.5-6a Linear —linear(start-up l inner side) Fig. 5-6b Linear —circular(start-up l inner side)
Fig.5-8a (start-up outer side)arc transition at angle Fig.5-8b (start-up outer side)linear transition at
237
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Offset mode is called to ones after creating tool nose radius compensation and before canceling it.
The offset path of the tool nose radius compensation is as follows:
(a) Tool movement around an inner side of a corner(α≥180°)
1)Linear —linear 2)Linear —arc
α Programmed path α
r L
r
G41
G41 S Tool nose center path
S
L C
Programmed path
L
Tool nose center path
Fig. 5-9a Linear —linear (movement inner side) Fig. 5-9b Linear —linear (movement inner side)
3)Circular—linear 4)Circular—linear
α Programmed path α
r r
G41 L
G41
S Tool nose center path S
C C Programmed path
C Tool nose center path
Fig. 5-9c Circular —linear (movement inner side) Fig. 5-9d Circular —circular movement inner side)
G41 G41
L
L
r Programmed path
r α
α Programmed path
r L
r
S S Tool nose center path
L Tool nose center path
2)Linear —Circular
L
G41 L G41
r r
α α
S r r
S
C
Programmed path Tool nose center path C
Tool nose center path Programmed path
238
Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)
3)Circular—Linear
C G41
C G41
r Programmed path
α r Programmed path
α
r
L r
L
S Tool nose center path L
S Tool nose center path
Fig. 5-12a arc transition at angle Fig.5-12b linear transition at angle
4)Circular—Circular
r r
α α
r r
S S
Tool nose center path
C Tool nose center path C
Fig. 5-13a arc transition at angle Fig. 5-13b linear transition at angle
In compensation mode, when the block uses G40, CNC enters the compensation cancel mode, and
the block operation is called the compensation cancel.
In C compensation cancel, the system cannot use G02, G03 and G05. When there is the arc
commands , the system alarms and stops running.
In compensation cancel mode, the system controls the block execution and the block which is in the
tool nose radius compensation buffer register. At the moment, the system stops after executing one
block in SINGLE working mode. Press CYCLE START and the system executes the next block instead
239
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
of reading the next block. In the following compensation cancel mode, the next block which is to be
executed reads to the buffer register and the system does not read the following block to the tool nose
radius compensation buffer.
(a)Tool movement around an inner side of a corner (α≥180°)
1) Linear→Linear
α α
L
G40 L
Fig.5-15a Linear—Linear 1(inner side, canceling offset)
r
G40
S
C
Program path Tool center path L
2)Circular → Linear
L L
G40 S G40 S
r r
α α
r r
240
Programming Chapter Five Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)
“Interference” is defined that the tool cuts workpiece excessively and it can find out excessive
cutting in advance, the interference check is executed even if the excessive cutting is not created, but
the system cannot find out all tool interferences.
A. Fundamental conditions
1) The tool path direction is different that of program path (angle is 90°~270° ).
2) There is a big difference (α>180°) for two angles between starting point and end point of tool
nose center path, and between starting point and end point of program path.
Example :linear machining
Tool nose center path
Programmed path
Directions of two paths(180°)
r r
Programmed path
A C
Directions of block B and tool nose radius compensation path are opposite without the actual
interference, the tools stops and the system alarms.
241
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
A C
B
Directions of block B and tool nose radius compensation path are opposite without the actual
interference, the tools stops and the system alarms.
5.2.6 Particulars
C. The system executes the compensation based on the imaginary tool nose direction(T0~T9
imaginary tool nose direction), and the motion path deviates the tool nose radius vector, and the
intersection should be counted in the cycle.
(2) Compensation methods of G71, G72 executing the tool nose radius compensation(G73 is referred
to G71, G72):
A. Gradually machine the blank and reserve the tool nose radius; execute the tool nose radius
compensation in the finishing contour.
B. The offset directions in G41/G42 are the same as the following figures.
C. The system executes the compensation based on the imaginary tool nose direction(T0~T9
imaginary tool nose direction), and the motion path deviates the tool nose radius vector, and the
intersection should be counted in the cycle.
243
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The memory pitch error compensation function is used to compensating the affect on the
machine transmission precision caused by the pitch error. The system compensates the controllable
axis Z, X, Y.
The chapter describes the pitch error measure, pitch information description method, pitch error
compensation method and notes.
Measuring the pitch error should be executed after the machine geometrical precision(machine
horizontal parallel and vertical conditions) are regulated to reduce the affect on the positioning
precision caused by the geometrical precision.
Measure the pitch error of the leading-screw should use the precise instrument(such as laser
interferometer), take the terminal in the leading-screw direction as the measure starting point,
and measure the leading-screw error curve in the positive direction of the axis, draft the revised
curve according to the error curve, select the proper compensation interval to input the
compensation value of each point to the pitch compensation parameter table. The system
revises the compensation according the pitch compensation parameter table in executing the
axis motion.
2) Pitch value description method is set by P411_d6: 0: inconstant interval; 1: constant interval.
3) Pitch compensation parameter value: P1000~P1905。
【Note】
1) The pitch compensation function should be closed when the system measures the pitch error,
otherwise, the measure is not correct when there is the data in the pitch compensation
parameter table.
2) The pitch compensation point must be in the positive direction related to the measured
starting point in the machine coordinate system.
The pitch compensation parameter table uses two methods to describe the data, i.e. constant
interval and inflection point description method(set by P411_d6).
In the constant interval description method, each axis is up to 300 compensation point; the
interval between two points is equal, which is called the compensation interval. The
compensation interval is generally referred to max. machine travel which is up to 1000mm, the
compensation interval is set to 4mm (1000mm/300 points=3.33, valuing is the integer 4), the
compensation interval is 4, each axis only uses 250 compensation points and other
compensation point cannot be used temporarily.
Parameter definition in the pitch compensation table in the constant interval description method:
P1000~P1299:deviation value of Z 300 points;
P1300~P1599:deviation value of X 300 points;
P1600~P1899:deviation value of Y 300 points.
【Example】
P1903=4.0 ;Taking example of z, the valid length of leading-screw is 1000mm, and the
compensation interval is set to 4mm;
P1000=1 ;deviation value to the measured starting point 4mm is 1um; (the first point which
is the nearest to the measured starting point)
P1001=1 ;deviation value to the measured starting point 8mm is 1um;
P1002=1 ;deviation value to the measured starting point 16mm is 2um;
P1003=2 ;deviation value to the measured starting point 16mm is 2um;
……
P1072=15 ;deviation value to the measured starting point 292mm is 15um;;
……
P1249=12 ;deviation value to the measured starting point 1000mm is 12um;
P1250=12 ;do not use the points P1250~P1299,which are the same values as the positive
end point.
……
P1900=-20.0 ;the concrete position of Z measured starting point in the machine coordinate
system is -20.000 mm.
245
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
【Explanation】
1) P1900~P1905 must be set in the constant interval description method.
2) P1903~P1905 compensation interval is 0.256 mm~999.999mm in the constant interval
description method, otherwise, the input is invalid.
3) Max. compensation length cannot be more than 10m.
4) The detailed parameter setting method is referred to OPERATION , Parameter Working
Mode.
The constant interval description method inputs too much data but cannot describe the inflection
point information of leading-screw error curve, and so it is suggested that the inflection point
description point should be used.
Each axis can input 150 groups of inflection point information in the inflection point description
method. Each group inflection point information includes: the distance from the point to the measured
starting point and the deviation value of the point.
parameter definitions in the pitch compensation table:
P1000_P1299:Z 150 groups of inflection point information;
P1300_P1599:X 150 groups of inflection point information;
P1600_P1899:Y150 groups of inflection point information;
Even number parameter is the distance to the measured starting point and the odd
number parameter is the deviation value.
【Example】
Taking example of Z, the valid leading-screw length is 1000mm;
P1000=80.000 ;deviation value from B to the measured starting point 80mm is 6um; (the
first point which is the nearest to the measured starting point) ;
P1001= 6 ;
P1002=290.000 ;deviation value from C to the measured starting point 290mm is 15um;
P1003=15 ;
P1004=450.000 ;deviation value from D to the measured starting point 450mm is 30um;
P1005=30 ;
……
P1014=1000.000 ;deviation value from B to the measured starting point 1000mm is 12um;
P1015=12 ;
P1016=0.000 ; end mark(the distance from the compensation point which is not the first
being 0 means the end of pitch compensation point setting);
……
P1900=-20.0 ;the concrete position of Z measured starting point in the machine
246
Programming Chapter Six Pitch Error Compensation
When the pitch compensation function is valid, the system uses the inflection point, and executes
the input according to the lead theory position and offset value in the pitch compensation parameter.
P1000=80,P1001=6; (the previous data is the theory position value of the measured lead, the
247
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
following data is the offset value between the actual and the theory value)
P1002=290,P1003=15;
P1004=450,P1005=30;
P1006=520,P1007=24;
…
When the pitch compensation is valid, the system divides the data of each pitch compensation
point in the linear mode. The user can learn the pulse quantity change sent by the system through
observing the data of servo drive unit pulse. The coordinate axis separately moves to B, C, E from A
and the system sends the actual pulse as follows:
Note: compensation value in the interval unit 0.256mm cannot exceed 7um, otherwise, the system alarms:
E027:axis pitch compensation is invalid.
【Example 2】
Suppose that X leading-screw error curve is as Fig.6-1, X is in diameter programming
mode(P413_d6=0), X electronic gear ratio is set to 1:1.
Sampling point A, B, C, D, E are as follows:
Sampling point A B C D E
Displayed machine 0 160 580 900 1040
coordinates(mm)
Leading-screw theory
0 80 290 450 520
position(mm)
Actual measured data
0 80.006 290.015 450.030 520.024
(mm)
Deviation value(um) 0 6 15 30 24
When the pitch compensation function is valid, the system uses the inflection point description
method; in the pitch compensation parameter, the system executes the input according to the
leading-screw position and deviation value:
P1300=80,P1301=6; (the fore data is the theory position value of the measured leading-screw, the later
is the deviation value between the actual and the theory of leading-screw)
P1302=290,P1303=15;
P1304=450,P1305=30;
248
Programming Chapter Six Pitch Error Compensation
P1306=520,P1307=24;
…
The coordinate axis moves separately from A to B, C, E and the system sends the actual pulse
as follows:
Note: When the system parameter and programming setting are in the radius mode, and X coordinate
movement is equal to the input deviation data, the system compensates fully the deviation value of
the point; when it is in the diameter mode and X coordinate movement is the double of the input
deviation point data, the system compensates fully the deviation value because the actual
movement is only the half of the displayed coordinate value.
249
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The command compiling must meet the rules in one block, which can be convenient to the system
identifying them; it is suggested that the command character should be in the fore and the data field
should be in the later. The system executes the Programming Rule Check, and the program meeting the
programming rules can be compiled; the system alarms and prompts Not Meet Programming Rule when
there is wrong.
1) There is no repetitive command in one block, otherwise, the system alarms “E202: Repetitive
command”;
Mistaken example:N0200 G00 G00 Z30;
2) The command character must be followed by the valid digital command, otherwise, the system
alarms “E201, Illegal command”;
Mistaken example: N0200 G23 Z30 ;no the command.
3) There must no be the repetitive data field in one block, otherwise, the system alarms “E234: the
data field is repetitive” ;
Mistaken example:N0200 G00 Z20 Z30;
4) There must no be the mutually contradictory data field, otherwise the system alarms “E210; the
excessive fields”;
Mistaken example:N0200 G00 Z20 W30;
5) The command character and field character must be followed by the valid digit without the blank
space, otherwise the system alarms “E204: the command format error”;
Mistaken example:N0200 G00 Z 20 ;
N0200 G 00 Z30 ;there is no blank space between G and 00
6) The required data in the block cannot be omitted, otherwise, the system alarms “E206: leakage
message”;
Mistaken example:N0200 G90 X100 ;
7) There must no be the fields, letters and digits unrelated to the command, otherwise, the system
alarms “E203: illegal message”;
Mistaken example:N0200 G00 X W 100 ;surplus character W
8) The number of the data field must be in the valid range, otherwise, the system alarms “E211: the
data exceeds the range”
Mistaken example:N0200 G00 X100 Z99999 ;the data 9999 exceeds the range.
9) It can be omitted when the first digit is zero in the command.
Example: G00 can be written to G0.
250
Programming Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples
Programming rules for commands in one block mean that there are many commands in one block
simultaneously, but all commands are not in the same block. The system executes Programming
rule check, and the programs meeting the programming rules can pass the compiling; the system
alarms and prompts Not meet rules in the same block. And the rules are as follows:
1) commands only in single block:
G50, G51, G26, G28, G30, G31;
G32, G33, G34;
G04;
Program lock cycle: G22, G80;
Single fixed cycle:G92, G74, G75;
Single fixed cycle:G90, G94;(can be in the same block with G41/G42);
Compound cycle:G71, G72;(can be in the same block with G41/G42);
M00, M02, M20, M30, M96, M97, M98, M99;
M21, M22, M23, M24;
M91, M92, M93, M94;
M47, M48;
M60~M74.
2) The system cannot judge them when some commands have mutually contradictory operations
and the same data. To avoid the above, M, G commands which cannot be in the same block are
divided into many groups and the commands in the different group can be in the same block as
follows:
M commands which can be in the same block are divided into many groups as follows:
Group 1:M03, M04, M05;
Group 2:M08, M09;
Group 3:M10, M11, M12;
Group 4:M78, M79, M80;
Group 5:M32, M33;
Group 6:M41, M42, M43, M44.
G commands which can be in the same block are divided into many groups as follows:
Group 1:G00, G01, G02, G03, G05;(G02, G03, G05 cannot be in the same block with
T command)
Group 2:G40, G41, G42;(they cannot be in the same block with T command)
Group 3:G96, G97;
Group 4:G98, G99.
【Note】
1)The commands which can be in the alone block cannot be in the same block with other
commands, otherwise, the system alarms “E205: there are not compatible commands”, and they
do not meet the rules for the commands in the same block;
2)The commands in the same group cannot be in the same block, otherwise, the system alarms
“E205: there are not compatible commands”;
251
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
3)T command cannot be in the same block with G02, G03, G05, G40, G41, G42, otherwise, the
system alarms “E205: there are not compatible commands”; and they do not meet the rules for
the commands in the same block;
4)T command automatically calls M60 when the tool type is 9, so, T command is only in the alone
block, otherwise, the system alarms.
5)G41, G42 can be in the same block with G90, G94, G71, G72;the detailed is referred to
Programming Chapter 5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
M32 Cooling ON
M10 Clamping workpiece
M78 Tailstock going forward
M41, M42, M43, M44 Spindle gear shifting 1st, 2nd, 3rd,
4th gear
S function Spindle gear shifting or rotating
speed
M03, M04 Spindle ON
M08 Cooling ON
G98/G99 F function
G96/G97 S function
T function Tool change
G40/G41/G42
G00/G01/G02/G03/G05 Motion command
252
Programming Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples
【Example】
N1000 T11 M03 M10 G00 X50 M08
Sublevel execution sequence: M10, M03, M08, T11, G00 ;
All used time for executing the whole block is equal to the sum of single command execution
time.
◆ Synchronous execution for many commands in the same block
P401_d3=1,synchronism; P401_d2=0: forbid rapidly jumping block to execution
In the synchronous execution, M, S, T before the motion command must be executed with the
motion command, M command after the motion command cannot be executed till the motion
command is executed, and the system executes the next block after all are executed.
The commands which are not relative each other are almost executed simultaneously, are not
executed orderly. The system automatically orderly executes M command which is interlock
according to the parameters.
【Example】
N1000 T11 M03 M10 G00 X50 M08
When the parameter is set to firstly and then start the spindle(P402_d5=0), the system follows
the interlock relationship and its execution process is as follows:
1)Simultaneously start executing T11/ G00 X50/M10/M08;
2)Execute M03 after M10 is executed;
3)Execute the next block after all are executed.
When the parameter is set to the spindle without firstly be clamped, the execution process is as
follows:
1)Simultaneously start executing T11/ G00/M10/M08/ M03;
2)Execute the next block after all are executed.
All used time for executing the whole block is equal to the longest single execution time.
◆ Synchronous execution for many commands in the same block and rapidly jumping block to
execution
P401_d3=1,synchronism; P401_d2=1,rapidly jumping block to execution
In the mode, the system rapidly skips to the next block after the axis motion commands of the
current block are (do not wait other M, S, T having been executed).
【Note】
1)The system follows the rule: wait the others to be executed when other commands in the same
group are executed.
2)The system meets “The command only in an alone block” , it waits to execute it after the
previous is executed; and it executes the next block after “The command only in an alone
block” is executed.
3)When the user needs to execute the next after the previous all commands are executed, he
needs to insert one G04 D0 command.
253
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Example 1:workpiece in Fig. 7-2. Rod: Φ64×105 mm. No. 1 tool is used for roughing, No. 2 for finishing.
(G90 inner/outer cylindrical surface turning cycle).
254
Programming Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples
N0155 G00 X45.5 ; X rapidly traverses the starting point of next cycle
N0160 G90 X40.5 Z65 ; turn Φ30mm with cylindrical surface cycle command
N0170 X35.5 ; tool infeed 5mm and cycle again
N0180 X30.5 ; tool infeed 5mm and cycle again
N0190 G00 X100 Z150 ; retract tool to safety position
N0200 T22 ; execute No.2 tool change
N0210 S2 ; set to the spindle high speed
N0220 G00 Z103 ; tool approaches the workpiece
N0230 X32 ;
N0240 G01 X27 ; tool infeed to starting point of chamfer
N0250 X30 Z101.5 F60 ; finish chamfer 1.5mm
N0260 Z65 ; finish outer 30mm
N0270 X45 ;
N0280 Z35 ; finish outer Φ45mm
N0290 X60 ;
N0300 Z0 ; finish outer Φ60mm
N0310 G00 X100 Z150 ; tool returns the origin point
N0320 M5 ; close the spindle
N0330 M9 ; cooling OFF
N0340 M2 ; end of program
Example 2:as Fig. 34. Rod: Φ30×100 mm, No. 1 is roughing tool, No. 3 is parting tool, No. 4 for 60°
threading tool. 。
Example 3:Cut the multiple threads with M98, M99 subprogram call and its return instruction. Fig. 7-4a:
metric multiple thread. Fig. 7-4b: inch multiple thread. Example: the thread heads is 3 as
follows:
a(Metric multiple threads):
N0010 G00 X100 Z50 ;set a workpiece coordinate system
N0020 M03 S600 ;Spindle rotates (CW) with 600 r/min
N0030 T44 ;change No. 4 tool and execute its offset
N0040 G00 X25 Z5 ;rapidly approach the workpiece
N0050 G92 X19.5 Z-30 P4.5 L3 ;execute No. 1 thread cycle,P= thread lead
N0060 X19 ;tool infeed 0.5mm, execute the 2nd thread machining
256
Programming Chapter Seven General Programming Rules and Examples
N0070 X18.5 ;tool feed 0.5mm, execute the 3rd thread machining
N0080 X18.35 ;tool feed 0.15mm and execute the 4th thread machining
N0090 G00 X100 Z50 ;rapidly return to program origin
N0100 M05 ;stop the spindle
N0110 M02 ;end of program
257
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
R2
M40 3
0
1 45° 1 45°
Blank appearance
R2
0
185
Reference point
Example 5:Fig. 7-6. Rod: Φ50×100. Machining with 3 tools:No.1: outer turning tool;No.2: pointed tool;
No.3: grooving tool with 3mm width.
259
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
261
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User
Manual
All the warning information in this CNC system are simply prompted in the screen by Chinese
characters, making corresponding disposal according to the prompting content. Each alarm meaning
is shown in the following table.
The alarm number starts by uppercase letter E and the following is three numbers. The classification
is as follows:
E001~E009: Alarm in PARAMETER, OFFSET working mode;
E100~ E199:Alarm in EDIT working mode;
E200~ E299:Alarm in PROGRAM COMMAND;
E600~ E699:Alarm in PROGRAM CHECK;
E300~ E399:Alarm in JOG, AUTO working mode executing relative operation;
E400~ E499:Related Alarm in JOG, AUTO working mode executing relative statement.
The stop operation in system emergency, please refer the details in OPERATION, 4.1.4.3
Emergency Alarm.
262
Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message
OFT. NO exceed The tool offset number in tool Modify or delete the exceeded tool
E034 1—64 compensation transmission file compensation number, change them to
exceeds (1~64) range the specified range
Illegal data Tool compensation data in tool Delete the illegal character
E035 compensation transmission file
has illegal character in
Input data error The tool compensation input data Check data according the tool
E036 in tool compensation transmission compensation communication file format
file has mistake and correct it
File symbol error File type mark in tool
Modify the file type according to the tool
E037 compensation transition file is
compensation file format
wrong
Send OFT fail Sending tool compensation file according to
sending tool compensation file
E038 failure or be manually cancelled
the correct tool compensation file format
and operation method
Receive OFT fail Fail in receiving tool Receive the tool compensation file
E039 compensation file or delete according the correct tool compensation
manual file format and operation mode
File is too big The length of received file is out of Modify the file according the file format,
E040 the maximal length of buffer zone correct the received file according the
requirement
E041 Z/X/Y pitch Known from system internal Change the pitch compensation value of
~ compensation value arithmetic, in the 0.254mm length pitch compensation parameter to small
of Z/X/Y axis, the calculated
E043 out of range
departure value is out of 7um
263
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User
Manual
Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting
No.
E044 Ratio of magnify & Ratio between multiplication and Modify parameter: multiplication or division
~ coefficient exceed division is out of (1/128~128)
E046 (1/128-128) range
Para set conflict, The corresponding pin in Release the occupied input pin in interface
E047 function is occupied parameter, or set other free input pin
input port was used
Para set conflict, The corresponding pin in inputting Release the occupied output pin in
E048 output port was used function is occupied interface parameter, or set other free output
pin
(33)
E049 Abnormal, ESC In reading the USB process, it is Operate the USB device over again
disordered
E050 Not support USB file The system only reads FAT16 or Check or change USB device
formula FAT32 file format
E051 USB memory is too The system only supports the Change the USB device
big maximal 8G USB device
E053 USB fails to transmit, Failure in USB data transmission Press system reset key and try again, or
reset process operate the USB device again
E110 RS232-fail to send RS232- failure in communication Check the command control unit
program sending serial system tool or hardware
interface
E111 Received prog NO is The program number range Check the receiving program’s
wrong doesn’t in (0~254) number
E112 Received prog is void No content in program Check and modify the program
E113 RS232-fail to receive RS232- failure in communication Check the command control unit
prog receiving serial system tool or hardware
interface
E120 Not support USB The system can’t identify this USB Use the USD equipment which can
device be identified by the system
E121 USB is removed The system is identifying the USB wrong operation, forbidden these
equipment, the equipment is operation
moved suddenly
E122 Not insert USB Don’t insert the USB equipment Insert the USB device
E123 Stop opening USB Manual operation, press Manual operation, stop to open the
emergency or reset key USB device
E124 Fail to save prog in The USB is failed in saving
USB program Check the USB device
E126 Surplus space in USB The U disc doesn’t have enough Change the bigger U disc or tidy U
is not enough rest room disc to release more room
E127 Contents fail The U disc creates specified Check the USB device
catalogue failure
264
Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message
E142 Prog is too long, Program error Check the program error again
delete extra part
E143 Prog is too long, Check the program error again
delete it Program error
E144 Current prog is void, The current program is empty and Edit the program first
so can’t rename can’t change the name
E145 USB-prog to receive The USB receiving program does No this program in the USB
doesn’t exist not exist equipment, create this program again
E147 Not support file The U disc isn’t FAT16 or FAT32 Suggest using FAT32 file system
system in USB, use file system
FAT32
E160 Prog NO is wrong Only (000~254)program can be Modify the input program number
input
E161 Copied prog exist The program to be copied has The program has existed, this
existed operation can’t go on
E162 Prog is void & can’t The current program is empty and Edit the program first
copy can’t be copied
E163 Editing 253 prog The 4M program editing storage Can’t go on the next edit, except the
exceed memory room is full editing program can release some
storage room
E164 Exceed prog memory, Power-off protection program Delete some programs in system
fail to save storage area is full and can’t
protect any more
E165 No deleting all The system parameter enactment Modify the enactment parameter
programs can’t delete all program according to the privilege
E166 Renamed prog exist The program to be changed the
name has been existed, can’t Please delete the old program firstly
change the name
E167 Fail to erase FLASH System hardware: storage CMOS Contact the supplier, change the
chip has problem storage CMOS chip
E168 Fail to write FLASH System hardware: storage CMOS Contact the supplier, change the
chip has problem storage CMOS chip
E169 Editing prog exceeds The storage room of 800k program Can’t go on the next edit, except the
memory editing area is full editing program can release some
storage room
E171 No command in help Command input error, or don’t Check the command to be looking for,
support this command input the correct command again
E172 Prog line too long Edit and replace error Check the replacing content again
E173 Replace failed,no Edit and replace error Check the replacing content again
content replace
265
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User
Manual
Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting
number
E174 Processing prog Set the bit parameter P416_d0 to Set the bit parameter P416_d0 to
locked, no rewriting be 1 be 0
E175 Para set no line Set the P333 to be non zero value
Set the P333 to be 0, the system again
number,no arrange compositor again function is invalid
again
8.4 Emergency Alarm Program Alarm Table (i.e.E200~ E299, E600~ E699)
The type of alarm in program is divided to: Alarm in PROGRAM COMMAND, Alarm in PROGRAM
CHECK two kinds.
Alarm in program command, means there is wrong command in working program and then alarm, it
can be eliminated by inputting the correct command, and it has little relation to the parameter.
Alarm List in programming command
Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting
number
E201 Illegal command The system undefined command Input again according system
appears in block command list
E202 Command repeat The same command is input repeatedly in Delete the repeated command
the program
E203 Illegal information The system unidentified command Delete the wrong command,
appears in block Input the correct command
E204 Command format The command format is wrong in the Input again according the correct
wrong block command format
E205 Command isn’t Two or more commands incompatibility Delete the unwanted command
compatible appear in the same block or line input
E206 Lack of information Missed the command needed content in Input the command needed
the block content according the correct
format
E207 Tool tip radius too tool nose radius is too big or path is too Modify program or tool nose
much short, can’t make the tool nose radius radius(happen in running)
compensation
E208 Brackets is miss Without brackets in the statement Brackets are added to the source
program
E209 Too many The command character in same block is Modify source program, or line
commands & over 20 input
characters
E210 Surplus characters Unwanted field is input in the block Delete the unwanted field in the
block
E211 Data exceeding The value in the block is over the Modify the is wrong data again
range specified range
E212 Errors in data The data don’t meet the standard Modify the is wrong data again
E213 Single block is too The whole line number of part program is Modify the source program
long over the range
E214 Use command some commands are in an alone block Modify the source program
independently without others
E215 Lack of line number The specified program line number of Modify the source program, input
command G71, G72, M96, M97, M98 the correct block line number
doesn’t exist in this program i.e. the
system has not found the line number for
the call or the transfer
E216 Line number repeat Repeated program line number in There is repeated program line
program makes the block number in modifying program
266
Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message
E224 Buffer area file too The editing single program is too big Modify source program
big
E225 Orbit data can’t Edit error, can’t make the tool nose Modify source program
compensate radius compensation
E226 Coordinate fields Coordinate field repeat Delete one field of them
repeat
E227 Data format wrong F value format / range error, it must match Modify source program
the G98/G99 command
E228 Program hasn’t end The program don’t have the ending Modify source program, add the
command command M02 or M20 or M30 ending command
E232 Errors in command The followed command data don’t meet Modify source program
data after G92 the format
E233 No user-defined At first make program for the needed Write M60 program, then harden
command user-defined command M60, then harden it
it
E234 Data field repeat The same field in block is input repeatedly Delete the repeat data field
E235 G71/G72 not inc & The coordinate data in block which is Modify source program
dec relations followed command G71/G72 doesn’t meet
the condition of increase or decrease by
degrees
E236 Forbid com exist Modify source program
The block followed G71/G72 command
G71/G72 (forbid doesn’t include the motion command
commands exist in beside G01/G02/G03
G71/G72)
E237 Chord is longer than Arc uses R program, the distance from Modify source program
diameter starting point to end point is longer than
diameter
E238 Dis (cen to 2 points) When the arc command G02 and G03 Modify source program
not equal use K.I program, the data can’t form the
correct arc section
(distances from
center to 2 points
aren’t equal)
E239 G05 data can not The data by G05 can’t form the correct arc Modify source program
form arc section
E240 Too many prog Excessive nested call in the program Modify source program
nested calling layers
E241 #254 not use 254 program has used motion command Modify command or system
traverse com parameter
E243 Too many data after The data behind the decimal point At most three data is behind the
decimal exceeds the limited range decimal point
E244 Too many decimal in Wrong data is input i.e. 0.343.44 Modify data
data
267
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User
Manual
Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting
number
E245 Lack of data after The decimal point is input, but no data Delete the decimal point
decimal followed
E246 Not input nega The negative is used in this field Check the notebook, modify the
(negative) NO in the data
field
E247 Too much leading The data like 000033 is used Omit the needless zero in the
zero front
E248 Not cancel tool Don’t cancel the tool nose radius The cancel command G40 is
radius compen compensation function before using added in the proper place
compound command
E249 No change in tip In the state of tool nose radius Delete the radius compensation,
radius compen compensation, there is operation of then change the tool
changing tool
E250 G00/G01 cancel The command beside G00/G01 is used to Modify source command
radius compensation delete the tool nose radius compensation
E251 G00/G01 sets radius The command beside G00/G01 is used to Modify source command
compensation create the tool nose radius compensation
E252 No replacing Used command as Mr11 Modify source command
variable in M
command
E253 No orbit com The command which can produce the Check the block P, Q in G71,
(command) in comparatively moving coordinate is G72 are correct or not
lacked in cycle
G71/G72 cycle
E254 Forbidden M3/M4 The M3/M4 command is used in M47 Using the command after change
com in M47 state the state
E255 Spindle allows to The spindle don’t stop Stop the spindle
use M47
E256 Lack of module G When compound command is G command is added
command consecutively cancelled, the G command
is not used
E257 No using the type of In the special situation, this kind of Modify source command
variable variable is used in illegal
E258 Beveling data is too So large chamfer data can’t be carried in Reduce the chamfer data
big this path
E259 Editing is cut off Reset key is pressed in program
E260 No Y axis traverse in When the Y axis has exchanged the Modify the program according to
M48 spindle, the moving command can’t be the real situation
used in Y axis
E261 Drawing is cut off The reset key is stopped in the drawing
demonstration
E262 No chamfering to full Whole circle is used in chamfer Divide into two semi-circles
circle
E263 Use pointer variable The pointer variable has special
wrongly explanation, it must be used carefully Modify program
E264 Arc radius is too big The arc radius by I/K program is over the Modify program
range
E265 No calling in monitor Call command H is used in process Using jumping P or other method
macro monitor r7000 command to control
E266 Pointer variable The pointer variable points to the Check the program, then modify
points invalid NO forbidden variable it
E267 no compensate Tool nose radius compensation, the Divide into two semi-circles
(compensating) to program path has the whole circle
program
full circle C
E268 Traverse is 0, retract When making the G90 and G94 command Modify program
too big (traverse program, the starting point and end point
don’t meet the regulation
amount is 0 or
retraction is too big)
268
Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message
Alarm in program check, means in the workpiece program the explanation of the command
which is collided with system parameter. When the workpiece program is treated isolated, there is no
problem. It needs to analyse the program from the whole auxiliary parameter and the setting of
interface parameter, then to modify the program and parameter setting to eliminate the alarm.
List of alarm in program check
Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting
number
E601 Illegal use Sxxxx:Sxxxx The Sxxxx command is over the Modify it to the gear position
parameter assured gear position value in correct range or modify
out of gear range
range the P410 parameter
E602 Illegal use M21: The M21 interface parameter Set the interface parameter
doesn’t specify the exact chip pin P500 is effective, or change the
No define M21 pin para
program command
E603 Illegal use M22: The M22 interface parameter Set the interface parameter
doesn’t specify the exact chip pin P500 is effective, or change the
No define M22 pin para
program command
E604 Illegal use M23: The M23 interface parameter Set the interface parameter
doesn’t specify the exact chip pin P501 is effective, or change the
No define M23 pin para
program command
E605 Illegal use M24: The M24 interface parameter Set the interface parameter
doesn’t specify the exact chip pin P501 is effective, or change the
No define M24 pin para
program command
E606 Illegal use M91: The M91 interface parameter Set the interface parameter
doesn’t specify the exact chip pin P517 is effective, or change the
No define M91 pin para
program command
E607 Illegal use M92: The M92 interface parameter Set the interface parameter
doesn’t specify the exact chip pin P517 is effective, or change the
No define M92 pin para
program command
E608 Illegal use M93: The M93 interface parameter Set the interface parameter
doesn’t specify the exact chip pin P518 is effective, or change the
No define M93 pin para
program command
E609 Illegal use M94: The M94 interface parameter Set the interface parameter
doesn’t specify the exact chip pin P518 is effective, or change the
No define M94 pin para
program command
E610 Illegal use M78: The function of M78 is set to be Set the interface parameter
invalid P409_d4 is effective, or change
Command invalid
the program command
E611 Illegal use M79: The function of M79 is set to be Set the interface parameter
invalid P409_d4 is effective, or change
Command invalid
the program command
269
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User
Manual
Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting
number
E612 Illegal use M41: The function of M41 is set to be Modify P410_d6=1(frequency
invalid conversion) or
Command invalid
P410_d7=0(electrical level), or
change the program command
E613 Illegal use M42: The function of M42 is set to be Modify P410_d6=1(frequency
invalid conversion) or
Command invalid
P410_d7=0(electrical level), or
change the program command
E614 Illegal use M43: The M43 function is set to be invalid Modify P410_d6=1(frequency
conversion) or
Command invalid
P410_d7=0(electrical level), or
change the program command
E615 Illegal use M44: The M44 function is set to be invalid Modify P410_d6=1(frequency
conversion) or
Command invalid
P410_d7=0(electrical level), or
change the program command
E616 Illegal use M32: The M32 function is not expanded to Set P506=1, or change the
be effective program command
Command invalid
E617 Illegal use M33: The M33 function is not expanded to Set P506=1, or change the
be effective program command
Command invalid
E618 Illegal use M10: The M10 function is set to be invalid Modify P409_d7 to be
effective , or change the
Command invalid
program command
E619 Illegal use M11: The M10 function is set to be invalid Modify P409_d7 to be
effective , or change the
Command invalid
program command
E620 Illegal use r10xx: The input chip pin by variable is Modify P412_d1 to be effective,
occupied by other function, or the or change the variable
No program pin
parameter forbids to use the input corresponding input chip pin or
chip pin statement program change the program command
E621 Illegal use r20xx: The input chip pin by variable is Modify P412_d1 to be effective,
occupied by other function, or the or change the variable
No program pin
parameter forbids to use the output corresponding input chip pin or
chip pin statement program , or used change the program command,
the user-defined changing tool or modify parameter P318=9
method
E622 No traverse command in The parameter setting: the M61 Change the position parameter
M61 prog program forbids the motion command P404_d2 to be allowed, or
change the program to don’t
include motion command
E623 Illegal use M47 The switch setting in spindle and Y Modify P404_d4=1, or change
axis is not the program command
E624 Illegal use M48 The switch setting in spindle and Y Modify P404_d4=1, or change
axis is not the program command
E625 Illegal use M04 The spindle reversion signal is set to Modify P404_d2=1, or change
be without the program command
E628 Tool type is 9, T When the tool post type is 9, the T Modify program
command need single command doesn’t have separate
section
block
E629 Illegal use Y command The control axis is set to be Y axis Modify P405_d1=1, or change
the program command
E630 Cut NO. exceed In the program the tool number is Modify P319, or change the
over the setting range program command
E631 Illegal use G96 When the spindle S control is set to Modify P410_d6=1, or change
be gear shifting mode, the constant the program command
line speed cutting
E632 No define G31I input Don’t set the G311 interface Set the P532 to be effective, or
interface, invalid parameter, or the setting is wrong change the program command
E305 Positive
X or Z negatively moves in JOG working
hardware limit X or Z positive limit switch is closed
mode till the alarm is released
alarm
E306 Negative
X or Z positively moves in JOG working
hardware limit X or Z negative limit switch is closed
mode till the alarm is released
alarm
E307 Z machine (+) Z machine coordinate(Zm) exceeds X or Z positively moves in JOG working
software limit the positive software limit alarm value mode, or set the machine coordinate to
alarm (P015) zero again, release the alarm
E308 X machine (+) X machine coordinate(Zm) exceeds X negatively moves in JOG working
software limit the positive software limit alarm mode, or set the machine coordinate to
alarm value\(P017) zero again, release the alarm
E309 Y machine (+) Y machine coordinate(Zm) exceeds Y negatively moves in JOG working
software limit the positive software limit alarm mode, or set the machine coordinate to
alarm value(P019) zero again, release the alarm
E310 Z machine (-) X machine coordinate(Zm) exceeds Z positively moves in JOG working mode,
software limit the negative software limit alarm or set the machine coordinate to zero
alarm value(P016) again, release the alarm
E311 X machine (-) X machine coordinate(Zm) exceeds X positively moves in JOG working mode,
software limit the negative software limit alarm or set the machine coordinate to zero
alarm value(P018) again, release the alarm
E312 Y machine (-) Y machine coordinate(Zm) exceeds Y positively moves in JOG working mode,
software limit the negative software limit alarm or set the machine coordinate/machine
alarm value(P020) zero return again, release the alarm
E313 Z nose (+) Z negatively moves in JOG working
Z tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode, or execute the toolsetting/program
software limit positive limit alarm value(P009) reference point return again, release the
alarm alarm
E314 X nose X axis negatively moves in JOG working
X tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode, or execute the toolsetting/program
(+)software limit positive limit alarm value(P011) reference point return again, release the
alarm alarm
E315 Y nose (+) Y negatively moves in JOG working
Y tool nose coordinate exceeds the mode, or execute the toolsetting/program
software limit positive limit alarm value(P013) reference point return again, release the
alarm alarm
E316 E316: Z nose Y positively moves in JOG working mode,
Z tool nose coordinate exceeds the or execute the toolsetting/program
(-)software limit negative limit alarm value(P010) reference point return again, release the
alarm alarm
E317 X nose X positively moves in JOG working mode,
X tool nose coordinate exceeds the or execute the toolsetting/program
(-)software limit negative limit alarm value(P012) reference point return again, release the
alarm alarm
E318 E318:Y nose Y positively moves in JOG working mode,
Y tool nose coordinate exceeds the or execute the toolsetting/program
(-) software limit negative limit alarm value(P014) reference point return again, release the
alarm alarm
E319 Output Reduce the moving speed or modify the
Z/X/Y pulse output frequency pulse multiplication ratio, division
frequency too exceeds the system specified range coefficient(P203, P204) to the proper
high value
271
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User
Manual
Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting
number
E320 the value of spindle speed multiplying
Thread spindle Reduce the feedrate or modify P113 value
the thread pitch(P) is more than max.
speed too high to the enough
speed limit of cutting feed (P113)
E321 Can’t execute The system cannot execute G32 in Deleted G32, then execute the program in
G32 in DRY DRY RUN working mode DRY RUN working mode
E322 G34: Screw In machining the thread, the pitch is
pitch is out of grading, it will exceed the system Modify the machining program
range specified range before the end point.
272
Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message
Alarm in statement program means in the program by statement, the alarm is made by the wrong
statement command in executing the workpiece program, the alarm can be resolved by inputting the
correct command.
Alarm Alarm prompt Alarm reason Troubleshooting
number
E400 The system doesn’t evaluate and
Monitor variable
set the judgement condition to the Modify program, put right
not initialize process monitor before startup
E401 In macro, divisor The divisor is zero in statement Modify the divisor in macro command, let it
is 0 operation don’t be zero
E402 The process monitor assignment Modify program, put right
not support statement has assignment
monitor operation which is not supported by
calculation the system, i.e. square root, sine
operation
E403 Evaluate the variable r5008 illegal Modify program, put right
r5008 data error value
E404 Variable data r6xxx Illegally used the undefined r6xxx Modify program, put right
error series variable
E405 Variable data r4xxx Illegally used the undefined r4xxx Modify program, put right
error series variable
E406 The illegal written operation is Modify program, put right
r4003 can’t be
made to variable r4003(spindle
written real-time speed)
E407 The illegal written operation is Modify program, put right
r4007 can’t be
made to variable r4007(spindle
written real-time speed)
274
Programming Chapter Eight Alarm Message
275
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
This system has provided the program method similar to the advance language, it can realize the
variable assignment, arithmetic operation, logic judgement and conditional transfer. Using the statement
and variable program can come true the function which can’t be made by the common G and M
command.
9.1 Variable
The variable value can be set by the program command assignment or by key directly.
Multi-variable can be used in a program and they an be distinguished by variable number.
The variable expression method
Using small letter “r” + variable number( four digit integer) to express, the precursor zero can be omitted.
Such as:
r5: named number 5 variable; r1003: named number 1003 variable
The variable in this system can be divided by function and purpose as: common variable, pointer
variable, input/output interface variable, special variable in system inner, register variable of key scan
command, register variable of showing command, register variable of command, process monitor/
process monitor management variable, pulse signal/pulse signal monitor management variable etc.
Different variable has different function and purpose, its explanation and value range are different
too. Following is the instruction in classify.
Variable type Variable range Remark
Common variable r0001~r0199
pointer variable r9000~r9049
input interface variable r1001~r1032
output interface variable r2001~r2032
register variable r5001~r5004, r5008
system variable r4001~r4011, r6001~r6006,
r6101~r6164, r6201~r6204
process monitor variable r7000~r7009
process monitor management r7010~r7019
variable
pulse signal monitor variable r7100~r7103
pulse signal monitor management r7110~r7113
variable
variable transfer register variable r7900
276
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
1) The variable value doesn’t include decimal point, the variable value is get from representative
value riding 1000, when it is replaced to the coordinate etc field with decimal point, the variable
value divides 100, then the coordinate date including three decimal is get;
2) In the command symbol G, M, T the variable can’t be quoted; Gr003 can’t be used for program;
3) The field of program line number (i.e. P, Q etc) can’t quote variable;
4) The field L showing times and field H showing location sign can’t quote the variable;
5) Only the common variable can be quoted by command field, otherwise alarm;
6) When the program is in AUTO working mode, when the variable is used in main program and
also the transferred subprogram(i.e.: M60~M74 command), please pay attention that the
variable in the intercross using and changing of main program and subprogram will impact the
result of program running.
2) In the AUTO working mode, before executing the first program and pressing the CYCLE START
key, the system will put the parameter table P600 ~P639 into variable r001~r040 as the initial
value in AUTO; the variable r041~r099 is cleared.
3) After executed M20, in the recycle, r001~r040 are evaluated the initial value by the P600~
P639 in parameter table again; r041~r099 and r100~r199 are not cleared.
4)The initial value of r100~r199 is zero after power-on, later it won’t be cleared by itself. But it can
change their value in JOG or AUTO working mode immediately. Their initial value can be set by
the following method( using this variable in program, when the variable initial value isn’t
evaluated before using, the program won’t have the confirmation state, suggest the user
carefully)。When the user is using these variable and needs the initial value, the initial value of
r100~r199 can be set in JOG working mode. In the JOG or AUTO working mode and non
running the program, press will call the macro variable display window and express all
the macro variable in the program, press and , will let the pointer pointing
the needed modifying variable, press ENTER key to choose the variable and input the data,
then press ENTER key to confirm again. The variable value is forbidden to modify in the
program running process.
The variable number range of pointer variable is from 9000 to 9049, total 50 pieces.
The pointer variable is specially to point the address of a common variable. To evaluate it means to
evaluate all it pointed common variable; and using its value means to use all it pointed common
variable’s value. The pointer variable can participate the operation or reading judgement.
◆ The method of creating and changing pointer
The pointer must be created correctly and points to a certain given common variable before using
the pointer variable. The pointing sign are “-“ and “>” and a blank is allowed between them.
The variable format of creating and changing pointer:
Pointer variable name -> expression
Such as: r 9001 -> 1 ; expression of the r9001 pointer variable pointing to r001 common variable;
r 9002 -> 199 ;expression of the r9002 pointer variable pointing to r199 common variable;
r 9003 -> r100 ; when r100 equals to five, it’s the expression of r9003 pointing to r005
common variable
r 9003 -> r 9003+1 ;expression of r9003 pointing to next common variable, when it points r5 at
first, then now it points to r6;
r 9003 -> r 9003-1 ;expression of r9003 pointing to previous common variable, when it points
r6 at first, then now it points to r5;
◆The characteristic of pointer variable:
1) At first set up the pointer variable and let it point to a certain specified common variable, then
278
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
make the read/ written operation to it or use for judgement, otherwise alarm;
2) In setting up the pointer variable, the value range of is from 1 to 199( it is to say it can point r1 to
r100), when it’s exceeded, it will alarm;
3) The statement about setting up or changing the pointer variable, only can be written in a
separate section, otherwise alarm; the expression in the right side of pointing symbol can be
the addition and subtraction operation between two of them;
4) The pointer variable only can be used in the numerical value operation, can’t be quoted by the
data field like G etc command; such as Ur9000, alarm;
5) In the statement of assignment, conditional judge , to evaluate the pointer variable expresses to
evaluate the common variable which is pointed by it; however reading the pointer variable
expressed to read the value of the common variable which is pointed by it.
◆The explanation of pointer variable:
【program demonstration】
In the following program, Z/X axis will store the coordinate of the position to the common variable in
moving each position, it totally has stored 10 set coordinate; then take out them one by one and go
back to the initial position by the original path. The following is come true by the pointer variable.
N0000 G00 Z200 X200 ;
N0010 r9000 -> 1 ; expression of the r9001 pointer variable pointing to r001
common variable;
N0020 M98 L10 P1000 ;
N0030 M98 L10 P2000 ;
N0040 M02 ;
N1000 r9000= r6004 ; In the first calling, store the Z coordinate in this position to r1
N1010 r9000 -> r9000+1 ; In the first calling, the pointer +1 points to r2
N1020 r9000= r6005 ; In the first calling, store the Z coordinate in this position to r2
N1030 r9000 -> r9000+1 ; In the first calling, the pointer +1 points to r3
N1040 G00 W-25 ;
N1050 G00 U-15 ;
N1060 M99
N2000 r9000 -> r9000-1 ;In the first calling, the pointer +1 points to r20
N2010 r190= r9000 ; In the first calling, take out the reciprocal second X coordinate
from r20 and store it to r190
N2020 r9000 -> r9000-1 ; In the first calling, the pointer +1 points to r19
N2030 r191= r9000 ; In the first calling, take out the reciprocal second Z coordinate
from r20 and store it to r191
N2040 G01 Xr190 F1000 ;
N2050 G01 Zr191 ;
N2060 M99
This variable is correspond to input and output pin, specially is used to check and control the
input/output pin signal of the system. The interface variable is divided into input interface variable
and output interface variable.
279
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
280
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
【Explanation】
R5001 assignment is the working mode for setting keyboard register, the input value which is
get after executed the command is stored in register r5001, it can be read or use for the
conditional judge .
【For example】
r5001=4; the system is waiting for the keyboard input a character, it will be executed until the
key is released
when (r5001=51) then P1500; When press “3” , it turn to P1500 (the ASCII value of “3” is 51)
【Explanation】
1) When the keyboard scan command 3 or 5 is chosen, the key will be displayed in the window
when the display is open, but when the display don’t open, the key won’t be display after this
operation.
2) In waiting for pressing, when the ESC is pressed, it will cancel the press key input, and
executes the next statement.
3) The acceptable key symbol is as the below table, the other key input is ineffective. Notes :
The input value is the corresponding ASCII value of this key symbol.
The r5001 acceptable key symbol and the input value corresponding table:
Input
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 . - ENTER ESC
symbol
input
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 45 46 13 01
value
Input
G M X Z S T U W F I K D R
symbol
Input
71 77 88 90 83 84 85 87 70 73 75 68 82
value
281
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Display window register: r5002 (the system forbids to use this variable in the process monitor
description statement)
Through the operation to the display window register, the system can construct a window in the
display screen and used to prompt the program execution step, alarm etc information.
The different value is written in the register has different meanings; the system executes the relative
command according to the written value. Please refer the following table:
The r5002 execution command table:
Command meaning(the user information only can be displayed in the display window
number
0 close the display window;
1 Open an empty display window;
when the window is not opened,
2
call the display window which has opened last time;
10 Set the cursor position, the cursor points to the first line home;
11 Set the cursor position, the cursor points to the next line home;
12 Erasure the content from the current cursor position to the line end; the cursor position don’t change;
13 Erasure all the content in window, the cursor points to the first line home;
32~126 Sending an ASCII character to the display window; (see ASCII command table)
201~209 The cursor is positioned to the specified line, the range is from 1 to 9;
210~230 The cursor is positioned to the specified line, the range is from 10 to 30;
send a set of character string to the display window;
1000~1099 the mantissa 00~99 are character string number, it
at most can display 100 sets character string;
2000~2999 Send a alarm number to the display window: display “alarm XXX”, the range of XXX is from 0 to 999;
110001~110009 Set the line number of the display window (line 1 to 9); (the system windows default is 6)
110010~110040 Set the displayed character number in each line ( 10 to 40); (the system windows default is 30)
120000 ~ Set the window grounding or character grounding, 0 to 255 can be chose; ( the system defaults white,
120255 the value is 255)
130000 ~ Set the character color, 0 to 255 can be chosen ( the system defaults black, the value is 0)
130255
140000 Set the size of the character: 16*16
140001 Set the size of the character:: 8*16 (system widows default)
Note: when the assignment exceed the range, it is ineffective.
【Explanation】
R5002 assignment is to set the display window register command; the data is uncertainly when read
the register, it can’t be used for the conditional judge .
【Example】
r5002=1 ; open an empty display window
r5002=49 ; send the character “1” to display window
r5002=49+r3 ; send the character which has deflected r3 position with “1” to the display window
r5002=2001 ; the display window displays “ alarm 001”
【Explanation】
1) Set the size and color of the window before opening the display window; otherwise it’s the
system windows default;
2) When the window is opened, when the window size etc parameter is reinstalled, the window
content will be cleared automatism, the new setting is effective;
3) The reference of grounding and font color refers to the attached table in this chapter: the
282
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
283
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Display value register: r5003 (in the description of process monitor statement, this variable is
forbidden to use)
【Explanation】
The r5003 assignment is a command to display this value(it can be seen when the display window is
open), the data is uncertainty when read the register, it can’t be used for the conditional judge .
【Example】
r5003=r032 ; display the value in r032
r5003=r03+r01 ; display the value of r03 adding r01
284
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
Graph update register: r5004 (in the description of process monitor statement, this variable is
forbidden to use)
【Explanation】
The r5004 assignment is a command to clear the process graph display region ((it can be seen
when the graph display window is open). Write the random number to r5004, clear the content of the
system process graph display area.
【Example】
Clear the display area content, it also is the process graph path
Note: In the cycle process, the last process graph isn’t cleared; in order to let the user observe the new
process path and graph in conveniently, in the ending of the process program, execute the
command, the next process path and graph will be displayed again.
Program control register: r5008 (the description in the process monitor). The data is uncertainty
when read the register, it can’t be used for the conditional judge .
The different value is written in the register has different meanings; the system will execute the
relative command according to the written value.
The r5008 execution command table gathered:
Command meaning
number
1 Break off, the motion command is stopped immediately( same to press PAUSE key) and can be resumed
the running by pressing CYCLE START key again
(when it is used in the common program, it will be break off in the next motion command)
2 Running the single sect/ continuum execution working mode switch (same to press SINGLE key), it can be
resumed running by pressing CYCLE START key again.
(when it is used in the common program, it may stop after the next motion command is executed, in the
common program, the M00 command is suggested to use.)
3 Stopped after the cycle finished, it can go on the running by pressing CYCLE START key.
4 Start in cycle, (same to press CYCLE PRESS key) it is used in process monitor description in generally.
5 Set the single execution; it can be resumed by pressing CYCLE START key again.
6 set the continual execution
【Explanation】
The r5008 assignment displays the working mode of choosing the program break off and start, it
generally is used with the monitor description, please refer the monitor description example.
【Example】
r5008=1 ; The program break off immediately, it can go on the running through pressing
CYCLE START key
r5008=3 ; Break off after the cycle ending, (stop it after meeting M20) it can go on the running
through pressing the CYCLE START key
285
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
System special variable set 1: read/ write (in the process monitor description statement, read only,
write forbidden).
Variable
meaning
number
Z machine
r6001
coordinate
X machine
r6002
coordinate
Y machine
r6003
coordinate
Z tool nose
r6004
coordinate
X tool nose
r6005
coordinate
Y tool nose
r6006
coordinate
r6101···6164 Z tool offset 01···64
r6201···6264 X tool offset 01···64
【Explanation】
For the written variable, the assignment is a command to modify the parameter, in the same time it
has kept the assignment and can be used for the read or conditional judge . In the common
situation, don’t use the system inner special variable. The system inner special variable must be
used carefully.
【Example】
r6001=150000 ;modify the current Z axis machine coordinate to 150.000
when (r6005>3000) then P1500 ;when the current X tool nose coordinate is over 3.000, then
turn to P1500
r6201= r6201+20 ; add 0.020 to the X tool compensation of the first set tool
offset number
The system inner special variable value range: 32 digit with symbol
r4004 Spindle program rotate speed recorder : in execute the S command, the system will read
input the variable for automatism program rotate speed at first;
Target tool position number recorder: the system will input the tool position number Read/
r4005
to this variable automatically in executing T command; write
The target tool offset number recorder: the system will input the tool offset number
r4006 to this variable automatically in executing T command; Read/write
0≤tool offset number≤64
The current tool position number recorder: after the tool changing finished every
r4007 Read
time, the system will input the tool position number to this variable automatically.
The current tool offset number recorder: after the tool changing finished every time,
r4008 the system will input the tool position number to this variable automatically. Read
0≤tool offset number≤64;
286
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
【Explanation】
For the written variable, the assignment is a command to modify the parameter, in the same time the
variable has kept its assignment, and it can be read or condition judgement.
【Example】
When (r4008=1) then P0060 ;When the current is No. 1 tool offset, , it turns to P0060
When (r4001=1000) then P1500 ;When the process number equals to 1000, it turns
P1500000,
When (r4009=71) then P0050 ;When the current special transfer function key is “G”, it
turns P0050 to execute
【Explanation】
1) The workpiece recorder can be read and written.
2) When the program has used r4009 in instantaneous interference function, then the “G” or
“M” character or blank in the top left corner of display screen to show which program branch
transfer function is in current; display “G” expresses r4009=71, “M” expresses r4009=77,
the blank expresses r4009=0. Here the “G” or “M” has no relationship with command M, it
only is the sign of instantaneous interference function key. Evaluating r4009 the 71 or 77
equals to press the key “G” or “M”, the branch transfer is effective in same.
3) The r4010 and r4011 can’t evaluate negative, the zero assignment is insignificance, the most
assignment range is 0~9999999(i.e. 9999.999s), it can be used for read or conditional
judge . Such as: r1=r4010 or when(r4010>1000) then P0020。
4) In generally the r4005~r4008 is used for tool changing distinguishing. Such as: using in M60
user-defined tool changing program(parameter P318=9)
9.2 Statement
This system has assignment operation statement and conditional judge statement, they will be
introduced as following.
This system offered assignment statement can come true the operation between two variable or
value, the detail expression and operation are as below table:
Gathered table of assignment operation statement 9-1:
287
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
In the above table: rN express the variable name of storing operation result; rA, rB, rC express the variable for
running the operation, they can be constant too.
【Explanation】
1) The value, variable value, operation result don’t have decimal point, the unit is 0.001;
For example: the assignment of Angle 45° must be rB=45000.
2) In the Angle assignment operation statement the rA can’t be omitted, otherwise alarm; it can be
written rN=1*sine(rB).
3) In the PROGRAM EDITION working mode, all the special expressions can be get by pressing
the HP6 key in the faceplate.
4) Each assignment statement only can has one operator (except the multiply operation first,
dividing operation later)
Wrong example: r001= r002 + r003 – r004。
The right writing is : r001 = r002 + r003
r001 = r001 – r004
【Example】
r3=r2*r41 ; the result of r2 multiplying r41 gives to r3
r2=sqr (100) ; the date of 100 draw gives to r2
r1=0 ; the initialization r1 is Angle 0°
r51=1000*sin(r1) ; the sine value of Angle r1 multiplying 1000 gives to r51
r1=r1+1000 ; the Angle adds 1°
The conditional statement can form the branch structure. It makes judgement according to the given
condition, in order that it decide to execute which branch block.
288
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
【program example 1】
In the following program, it mainly demonstrates the method of automatically modifying tool
compensation in the program. In the batch machining, suppose each machining 20 piece, the tool T11
will fray one thread in the X direction regularly ; when the workpiece recorder is the integer double, the
program will make the tool compensation modification automatically.
N0010 G00 Z200 X100
……
N1000 r1=r4001 % 20 ; get the remainder of workpiece recorder dividing 20
N1010 when(r1=0) then P1030 ; when the remainder is zero, it will be the integer double of 20
N1020 M20
N1030 r6201=r6201-10 ; No.1 X tool offset reduce one thread
N1040 M20 ; recycle
【Program Example 2】
In the following program, it mainly demonstrates the method of temporary press interference and call in
289
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
the program. Suppose the pin of UO31 and UO32 control a . In the batch cycle machining, when the
handlers want to make the random sample to the workpiece, press G key, the loader collects a sample in
automatically.
%104
N0010 G00 Z200 X100 ;
N0020 G00 Z180 X80 ;
N0030 G01 Z100 F200 ; cut outer circle
N1000 when (r4009=71) then H2000; When “G” key is pressed in forestall, then call N2000
N1010 G01 X0 F200 ; cut off
N1020 r2031=1 ; loader returns to original position
N1030 r2032=1 ;
N1040 M20
N2000 r2031=0 ; loader goes forward
N2010 r2032=0 ;
N2010 r4009=0 ; clear “G” state
N2020 M99
【Program example 3】
In the following program, it mainly demonstrates the function operation. According to the elliptic
parameter equation finger out that the point in ellipse are moving along the ellipse path by short line
approaching method.
The parameter equation of ellipse is X=50*sin(a),Z=100*cos(a);because the X is diameter program, so
X=100*sin(a)。
%103
N0010 G00 Z0 X0
N0020 G00 Z200 X200
N0022 G00 Z190 X110 ; confirm the start point of G01 path
N0030 r1=0000 ; the initial value of r1 is 0°
N0040 r12=100000*sin(r1) ; 100000 the angle sine value multiplies 100000
N0050 r13=100000*cos(r1) ; 100000 the angle cosine value multiplies 100000
N0060 r12=r12-110000 ; finger out the relative difference of ellipse start point path
and G01 start point
N0070 r13=r13-190000
N1000 r2=100000*sin(r1) ; The angel sine value multiply 100000 giving to r2
N1010 r3=100000*cos(r1) ; The angel cosine value multiply 100000 giving to r3
N1020 r2 = r2 - r12
N1030 r3 = r3 - r13
N1040 G1 Xr2 Zr3 F500 ; Moving along the ellipse path
N1050 when(r1=360000) then P1080 ; When the angel equals to 360°, then escape
N1060 r1=r1+1000 ; The value of r1 pluses 1000 (angel pluses 1)
N1070 M97 P1000 ; cycle
N1080 M02
The common part program is executed according to the designed path one by one in advance, it
can’t make the prompt response for the real time happened matter in the command executive
midway.
In the system, there are ten inspector which are numbered according to 0# to 9# turn, called 0#
inspector, 1# inspector… 9# inspector. Their work is called process monitor; in the same time of
290
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
executing the common part program, they specially track with the matters which are real time
happened in the part program execution process. But the user must describe the task of the
inspector, and tell them to track what matter, how to deal with it after it happen. The inspector
without task is in dormancy state.
Each inspector has a monitor register and a monitor management register separately, the
corresponding turn number is as following:
Inspector number: 0#~9# number in turn
Monitor register number: r7000~r7009 corresponding the inspector number in turn
Monitor management register number: r7010~ r7019 corresponding the inspector number in turn
Using the process monitor, at first must describe the process monitor according to the rule. The
process monitor description includes a assignment statement and a when condition statement,
neither of the two can be dispensed; the assignment statement indicates the monitor object, the
when condition statement can make the judgement according to the information by monitor, and
decide to execute some branch block or not.
In the machining process, if the process monitor is start up, then the program status bar will display
“M-n” in right side. In them: M expresses the process monitor, n expresses n process monitor
started. It also can check the system using process monitor status in macro variable window.
For example: M-2 expresses two process monitors are start up
【Description method of process monitor】
1) Assignment description:
What is called assignment description, is to designate the monitor object by a assignment
statement; all assignment statements which aim at monitor register(r7000~r7009) are called
monitor description statement.
For example: r7000= r1001 or r1002; 0# monitor r7000 object are interface input signal UI01, UI02
r7001=r4003( rotate speed); 1# monitor r7001 comes form spindle real time speed
2) Condition description
What is called condition description, is to designate how to make judgement according to the
monitored information;
The condition description statement and common conditional statement have the unanimous
basic form, and the program rule is basic same.
When (relation expression) then statement 1 else statement 2;
Among them: in the condition description statement, the left of when related expression is
monitor register name;
In the condition description statement, the call can’t be used in then, else, only assignment or
transfer.
For example: when (r7000=1) then P1500 ; when the input signal can meet the requirement,
then turns p1500
When (r7001>6000) then r3=r3+1 ;meet the requirement, r3 adds 1
【Explanation】
1) The system regulation: all assignment statement of aiming at r7000~r7009, are the description
to monitor 0#~9#; according to the program execution path, the latest description is effective.
291
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
2) The operator of assignment description statement only can be one of“+”, “-”, “or”, “and”;
otherwise alarm.
3) the conditional judge statement is allowed to make the assignment description, such as when
(r5004=3) then r7000= r1001 + r1002,it is the legal statement.
4) system rule: when the r7000~r7009 appears in the left conditional expression of when
conditional statement, it is to say that’s the conditional description to 0#~9# monitor. The call
can’t be used in then, else, only assignment or transfer.
5) The assignment description and when conditional description must appear in pair; when there
is no assignment description, or evaluated the cannot monitor variable, then r7000=0; when
there is no when conditional description, it’s allowed but with little signification and without
monitor function.
6) In the when condition description, the system can’t execute the description statement
immediately, but wait for the corresponding serial number monitor function opened, then starts
the monitor.
7) when the assignment meets the requirement, it’s not the conditional transfer behind, but the
common variable evaluated, such as when (r7000=100) then r3=r3+1,the monitor won’t
close.
After making the process monitor rule description, evaluate the monitor management register
(r7010~r7019),then can open or close the monitor. There are following working modes for opening
the monitor.
assignment Process mode of matter
Close the opened monitor, let the inspector in the dormancy state; keep its task, can open again and
0
go on the monitor;
Open the monitor; in the monitor process, make the judgement according to the matter’s relation
expression, when the condition comes into existence, the process mode is as following:
1)When the inspector execute the assignment on common variable or output variable, it won’t impact
the execution of common program command, go on the monitor;
2)When the inspector wants to execute the special assignment, then close the monitor, stop the
1
current motion command immediately, wait for the execution ending of all executing MST
command, execute the special assignment;
3)When the inspector want to execute transfer, then close the monitor, stop the current motion
command immediately, wait for the execution ending of all executing MST command, execute the
transfer;
Open the monitor; in the monitor process, make the judgement according to the matter’s relation
expression, when the condition comes into existence, the process mode is as following:
1)When the inspector execute the assignment on common variable or output variable, it won’t impact
the execution of common program command, go on the monitor;
2)When the inspector wants to execute the special assignment, then close the monitor, stop the
2
current motion command immediately, wait for the execution ending of all executing MST
command, execute the special assignment;
3)When the inspector want to execute transfer, then close the monitor, stop the current motion
command immediately, wait for the execution ending of all executing MST command, execute the
transfer;
Note: In execution, when meet the M20/M02, close all the monitor, clear the task description;
Special assignment means to evaluate the program control register r5008, system special variable set
1 and set 2.
【Example】
r7010= 0 ; when the system writes zero to r7010, then cancel the r7010 monitor;
r7016= 1 ;open r7016 monitor; when the system meets the condition, stop the current
motion command immediately, execute the assignment or transfer;
292
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
r7012= 2 ;open r7012 monitor; when the system meets the condition, executes the
valuation or transfer after executed current motion command;
【Explanation】
1)Once opened monitor, in the same time of executing the common part program, in fact there are
two description statements are alternated ceaseless, executed circularly in the system inner;
until they are closed.
2)The when statement opens or closes the process monitor are allowed; such as when (r1=0)
then r7010=1。
3)It’s allowed that one monitor opens another one, but won’t closed itself; such as when (r7001=0)
then r7010=1, 1# monitor when it meets the requirement opens 0# monitor, at this time 1# is still
open.
4)In making program, before open the monitor, it must make the description to the monitor; when
it opens a monitor(without task) which don’t have description, the system will alarm prompting
“E400: variable r7xxxx don’t be initialized”.
5)When opened some monitor, change its monitor description in the instance of don’t meet
requirement and don’t stop monitor, then the new monitor description will change the old
description, and the monitor will still on the opening state, needn’t restart. But it’s very
dangerous in this state, the monitor must be closed at first, then change its monitor description,
then open it again.
6)After meets the monitor requirement, when the executed command in monitor condition is skip
command(Pxxxx), close the monitor automatically; when the executed command is
assignment or calculate command, don’t close the monitor.
7)The monitor management register is the read variable, can’t be used in read or conditional
judge, otherwise alarm.
8)If the monitor is opened, under the PAUSE/Block stop /Cycle stop state, the monitor is still
effective; its assignment or operation command will be executed after meeting the requirement,
the skip command can be executed by pressing “CYCLE START”key.
9)Once the monitor is opened, in the system inner, because its two description statements are
alternated ceaseless, executed circularly, its execution speed is faster than the common
program; for the calculation statement which executes assignment after meet the requirement,
it may be executed for time after time, this variable result is uncertainly(suggest to don’t use it
like this). Pay attention in the common part program, this variable must be used carefully.
For example, when (r7000=100) then r3=r3+1 ;// when meet the condition, r3 pluses 1, at
this time pay much attention, the value of r3 is very uncertainly(the accumulation frequency is
very high), when the call or transfer of subprogram in the program uses r3, it will induce the
program execution uncertainly, suggest that the uncertainly variable like r3 can’t be used for
the real function of all command in this instance.
10)In the common program, read the monitor register, monitor management register, it’s value is
zero or uncertain; such as r5= r7000, then the value of r5 is uncertain.
293
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
11)When one monitor is open, it can check the signal change above 3ms width; when ten monitor
are open, they can check the signal change above 30ms width.
【Program example 1】
The following program introduce the explanation of process monitor.
In the batch machining, when the rough bar uneven length, it’s hard to confirm the machining start
point. Suppose a sensor is installed in the tool, then the system can use the sensor to confirm the
machining start point.
In the following program, set the U105pin which is quoted to the system by the sensor signal; when
the tool is far away the workpiece UI05=“1”,when the tool is near the workpiece UI05=“0”,when the
tool is moving to the direction of near workpiece from far away, it is stopped at the position UI05=“0”,
and confirm this point to be the machining start point.
%105
N0010 r7000=r1005 ; 0# monitor tests the state of input signal r1005, it forms the
monitor description with nether judgement statement
N0020 when(r7000=0) then P1000 ; When the signal r1005 is monitored to be “Zero”, then
turn to P1000 program running
N0030 G00 Z300 X200 ; At first orientate to the initial point
N0040 G00 X180 ;
N0050 r7010=1 ; Opening 0# monitor by mode 1, when it meets the requirement,
stops the motion immediately, and turn P1000
N0060 G00 W-100 F1000 ; The tool is closing the workpiece from far away
N0070 r7010=0 ; When the last command is finished, but nothing can be checked,
then close the 0# monitor
N0080 G00 Z300 X200 ; Back to initial point
N0080 M02
N1000 G50 Z200 X180 ; Set this point to be the machining start point, set the workpiece
coordinate system again
N1020 G01 Z90 F500 ; Cut outer circle
N1030 G01 X0 ; Cut off
N1040 G51 ; Revert the workpiece coordinate system
N1050 G00 Z300 X200 ; Back to initial point
N1060 M02 ;
【Program Example 2】
The following program introduce the explanation of process monitor.
The system has exterior cycle start/pause function, the handlers stand far away the system and can
use the exterior press-button to come true the start/pause function. But in the position which is far
away the system, it’s hard to come true “single block stop”. In the following program, it will come true
the function through the process monitor
In the program, set the UI05 pin which is quoted by press-button signal to system; when press the
switch UI05=“0”, when release UI05=“1”. After opened the monitor, this press-button can make the
cycle switch between single block and continuum execution working mode.
294
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
%106
N0030 r7000 =r1005 ; 0# monitor tests the state of input signal r1005
N0040 when(r7000 =0) then r5008=2 ; When the signal r1005 is monitored to be “zero”, then
pause
N0030 r7001 =r1005 ; 1# monitor tests the state of input signal r1005, r1006
N0040 when(r7001 =1) then r7010=2 ; When the press-button is released, then open the 0#
monitor again
N0070 r7011=2 ; Open the 1# monitor by mode 2
N0070 r7010=2 ; Open the 0# monitor by mode 2
N0010 G0 X100 Z200
N0020 G00 X50 Z190
N0050 G1 X50 Z160 F300
N0060 G2 W-80 R100
N0080 G1 U10 W-20
N0080 G1 W-20
N0080 G1 U10 W-20
N0090 G0 X100 Z200
N0160 M02
【Program Example 3】
In this system, there are other four pulse monitor variable with number 0#~4# in turn. They
specially engage the pulse count of input signal. Each pulse monitor variable has a monitoring
register and a management register separately, the corresponding number in turn are as following:
Pulse monitoring variable number: 0#~3# number in turn
Pulse monitoring register number: r7100~r7103 corresponding the monitor variable number in turn
Pulse monitoring management register number: r7110~r7113 corresponding the monitor variable
number in turn
What is called pulse monitor, it belongs to process monitor too, its description mode, open/close
mode, all rules are absolutely same to process monitor.
295
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
In the machining process, when the pulse monitoring is started, the right of process status bar will
display “P-n”. it also can check the state of system current used pulse monitoring. Such as: P-1,
expresses one pulse monitoring is started.
◆The explanation of pulse monitoring:
1)At first make the description to pulse monitoring variable; (all assignment statement for r7100 are
description)
Such as: r7100 = r1001; r7100 adds 1 for the pulse signal of interface UI01
2)Then make the description to pulse monitoring condition;
Such as: when (r7100>50) then P1500 ;when the r7100 count value is greater than fifty,
then turn P1500
3) And then start the monitor through the assignment of pulse monitoring manager
Through the assignment of pulse monitoring management register(r7110~r7113), can open or close
the monitor.
Among them: when the assignment 0, 1, 2 are same to process monitor.
When the assignment is 5, the pulse monitor counter is cleared to 0.
When the assignment is 6 or 7, the operator should set the pulse monitor count mode .
assignment The process method of matter
0 Close the opened monitor, just the same to process monitor
Open the monitor; the process method is absolutely same to process
1
monitor
Open the monitor; the process method is absolutely same to process
2
monitor
5 When the assignment is 5, the pulse monitor counter is cleared to 0.
Set the counter mode: when the operation result is changed from zero to
6
non zero, the inner counter will plus 1.
Set the counting mode: when the operation result is changed from zero to
7
non zero, the inner counter will plus 1.
【Program example】
The following programs introduce the explanation of pulse monitoring.
296
Programming Chapter Nine Statement Programming
In the following program, suppose to check the UI05 pin which is quoted to system by signal; in the
machining, when the times of UI05 changing from “0” to “1” is greater than ten, end the program.
%108
N0010 r7100 = r1005 ; Making the plus 1 count to r1005 pulse signal
N0020 when(r7100>10) then P2000 ; When the monitor pulse number is greater than 10, then
turn to P2000 running
N0030 r1=0 ;
N0040 r7110=6 ; Set the count mode, when it is changed from zero to non-zero,
the inner counter will plus 1.
N0050 r7110=2 ; Choosing the monitor working mode 2 to open
N1000 G00 Z300 X200 ; Orientating to initial point
N1010 G00 X180 ;
N1020 G01 Z90 F500 ; Cut outer circle
N1030 G01 X0 ; Cut off
N1050 G00 Z300 X200 ; Back to the initial point
N1060 M97 P1000 ;
N2000 M02 ;
Variable transfer register: r7900; (the system forbid to use this variable in the process monitor
description statement)
【Explanation example】
r7900= 1 ;
Write any number to this register, it expresses all common variable in monitor backup area are
copied to common variable storage, the following will explain this register function.
In an ordinary way, in order to avoid the collision, when some common variable is used in the
monitor, this common variable must be avoided using in the common block. Because the system
has a common variable storage, and a backup storage of monitor variable, the two section variable
value change maybe aren’t synchronous.
Example as common variable 3, explain the change of r3:
1) When r3 assignment statement is executed, r3 is modified in the common program, then the r3 in
monitor will be modified immediately too;
2) When the r3 assignment statement is executed in the monitor, it only has modified the r3 in
backup monitor; now the r3 in common program isn’t modified.
3) When the variable transfer statement(i.e.r7900=1) has been executed, the system will copy all
common variable in backup monitor to common variable storage;
【Program Example】
In the following program, suppose to check the UI05 pin which is quoted to system by signal; in the
machining, when the times of UI05 changing from “0” to “1” is greater than ten, after the cycle
execution is finished, the program end.
%109
N0010 r7100 = r1005 ; Making the plus 1 count to r1005 pulse signal
N0020 when(r7100>10) then r1=1 ; When the pulse number is greater than ten, r1 equals
297
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
298
Programming Chapter Ten Customized Command Programming
They system has a set of customization command except the offered standard M command. The
machine manufacturer can set some commands to come true the control of additive equipment,
however the operator can operate the additive equipment by input the command expediently.
The system has provided fifteen customization commands from M60 to M74, how many is need
exactly is edited by the machine manufacturer. The customization command must be edited in
%254 program, at first debug %245 program successfully in AUTO working mode, then harden the
program in EDIT working mode; after the program is hardened successfully, the hardened
customization command can be used in AUTO mode or other program(i.e. %000~%253),
otherwise the system will alarm that there is no customization command.
This chapter will express the written customization command method from example:
【Program example:】
It is supposed that the manufacturer install a loader in the machine. UO31 output pin controls the
forward and back of the loader, when it is input “0”, the loader goes ahead, when it is output “1”, the
loader will go back; checking the loader forward and back is in the place or not by UI05/UI06
inputting pin, when the system has checked the UI05 is “0” the loader is in the forward place, when
the system has checked the UI06 is “0” the loader is in the back place; in the example M61
command is used for controlling the loader forward an check if it is in-position ; M62 command is
used for controlling the loader backing, and check if it is in the back place.
%254
N0010 M98 P1000 ; No. %245 program starts execution, call the M61
command at first
N0020 G04 D3 ;
N0030 M98 P2000 ; Cll M62 command
N0040 G04 D3 ;
N0050 M02 ;
N1000 -M61 ; The start sign of M61 command
N1010 r2031=0 ; Loader forward
N1020 when (r1005=1) then P1000 ;When it is checked when UI05 is “1”, then start the cycle
check
N1030 M99 ; M61 command is end
N2000 -M62 ; The start sign of M62 command
N2010 r2031=1 ; Loader backing
N2020 when (r1006=1) then P2000 ; When it is checked that UI06 is “1”, then start the cycle
checking
N1030 M99 ; M62 command is end
In No. %254 program, the system customization command program format is : input a set program
which starts from “M60” to “M99” in the program, this block is formed M60 command. The other
299
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
block which start by “-M61 ~ -M74”and end by “M99” is formed M61 ~ M74 command.
【Format】
N1000 -M61 ; The start sign of M61 command
N1010 r2031=0 ; Loader forward
N1020 when (r1005=1) then P1000 ; When it is checked that UI05 is “1”, then start the cycle
checking
N1030 M99 ; M61 command is end
【Explanation】
1)The customization command is mainly formed by statement, when G code want to be added in it,
the position parameter P404_d2=1 must be set, it also is to say M61 command allows the G motion
code, otherwise the system alarms.
The customization command harden is in No. %254 program. So No. %254 program also is called
the user-defined command storeroom: P254 mainly includes the M60~M74 command which is
formed by statement and block, the system will make the special translate and edit in translating
and edition.
【Format】
P254 program format:
N0010 M98 P1000 ; No.%254 program starts execution
N0020 M98 P2000 ; Call M61 command
N0030 M98 P3000 ; Call M62 command
N0040 M02 ;
N1000 -M60 ; the start of M60
…
N1100 M99 ; the end of M60
N2000 -M61 ; the start of M61
… ; the user customized M61 content
N2100 M99 ; the end of M61
N3000 -M62 ; the start of M62
… ; the user customized M62 content
N3100 M99 ; the end of M62
The debugging steps of customization command storeroom is as following:
1)Edit the user need customization command according to the above customization command
storeroom program format
2)debug the program by single block mode in AUTO working mode
3)After debugged the program, harden the program in EDIT mode, press the key: hp5 5 ;the
machine manufacturer confirm if it’s allowed to modify the hardened program and harden again,
it also is to set the position parameter P404_d0=1.
4)The system prompts that after the P254 translating and harden succeed, press “ESC” key.
300
Programming Chapter Ten Customized Command Programming
【Explanation】
After the No.%254 translating and harden succeed, it also can input the customization command in
P254 in JOG working mode and run, in order to check the correctness of P254.
In the JOG working mode, input the customization command directly when it’s need to execute the
hardened customization command in P254. In editing program the hardened customization
command in system P254 can be used , the operation is simple and convenient.
【Using customization command format 】
%001 ; execute the customization command beside the No.%254 program
N0010 M61 ; execute M61 command
N0020 G04 D3 ;
N0030 M62 ; execute M62 command
N0040 G04 D3 ;
…
…
N0050 M02 ;
【explanation】
1) The M60~M74 can be used in JOG working mode or other program directly only the No.% 254
program has hardened to FLASH, otherwise the system alarm; when the corresponding
customization command isn’t written in No. % 254 program, but it is used in JOG working
mode or other program, the system alarm too.
2) The operation of how to harden the No.%254 program to FLASH, please refer the No.%254
program explanation, with the detail in OPERATION, 4.3 EDIT working mode in this
explanation notebook.
3) After the No. %254 program is modified, it must be hardened to FLASH again, otherwise the
called M60~M74 command in JOG working mode or other program aren’t the latest
customization command after modified.
4)In AUTO working mode, when the M60~M74 used variable are used in main machining process,
must pay attention to the impaction of variable cross-change to the program
5) M60~M74 command must be used separately , such as when(r1>100) then M61 expression
will alarm.
【Program example】
The following is the program of coming true the change tool operation by written customization
command.
M61 changes the first too; M62 changes the second tool; M63 changes the third tool; M64 changes
the fourth tool
301
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
%254
N0000 M98 P50 ; Call M61, change the T11 tool number
N0010 M98 P200 ; Call M62, change the T22 tool number
N0020 M98 P350 ; Call M63, change the T33 tool number
N0030 M98 P500 ; Call M64, change the T44 tool number
N0040 M30 ; Program end
N0050 -M61 ; Start to call M61, start to change tool
N0060 T11 ; Target tool number
N0070 when(r1001 = 0) then(P190) else(P80) ; Jude the current tool is consistent to target tool
or not
N0080 r2011 = 1 ; Close the tool post CCW rotation
N0090 r2012 = 0 ; Tool post CW rotation
N0100 r4010 = r39 ; Changing tool time is set to be 30 seconds
N0110 when(r4010 < 5) then(P650) else(P120); Judge the tool changing time is too long or not
N0120 when(r1001 = 0) then(P130) else(P110); Judge the tool position signal
N0130 r2012 = 1 ; Close the tool post CW rotation
N0132 r4011 =50 ; Set to delay 50ms
N0134 when(r4011<2) then (P140) else(P134) ; Delay 50ms
N0140 r2011 = 0 ; The tool post CCW rotation
N0150 r4011 = r40 ; Set the tool post CCW rotation time
N0160 when(r4011 < 5) then(P170) else(P160) ; Check the tool post CCW rotation time
N0170 r2011 = 1 ; Close the tool post CCW rotation
N0172 r4010 = 100 ; Tool post CCW rotation in-position delayed time
N0174 when(r4010 < 5) then(P180) else(P174) ;Tool post CCW rotation in-position delayed
N0180 when(r1001 = 0) then(P190) else(P700) ; Judge the in-position signal
N0190 M99 ; Tool change end
N0200 -M62 ; Start to call M62, start the tool change
N0210 T22 ; Target tool number
N0220 i f(r1002 = 0) then(P340) else(P230); The current tool is consistent to target tool or not
N0230 r2011 = 1 ; Close tool post CCW rotation
N0240 r2012 = 0 ; Tool post CW rotation
N0250 r4010 = r39 ; Set the tool change time 30 seconds
N0260 when(r4010 < 5) then(P650) else(P270); Judge the tool change time is too long or not
N0270 when(r1002 = 0) then(P280) else(P260); Judge the tool position signal
N0280 r2012 = 1 ; Close the tool post CW rotation
N0282 r4011 =50 ; Set to delay 50ms time
302
Programming Chapter Ten Customized Command Programming
303
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
304
Connection Chapter One Interface
CONNECTION
AC 220V
【Explanation】
● X1:input/output, pin44 D socket, CNC receives machine signal/CNC signal outputs to
machine interface
● X2:tool pose, pin15 D socket, input/output interface
● X3:motor, pin15 D socket, interface of X/Z drive unit
● X4:spindle, pin26 D socket, spindle coder, spindle inverter and Y drive unit interface
● X5:MPG, pin 9 D socket, connect with MPG
● X6:input power supply, green pin4 socket, the power supply box has been connected to the
system X6 interface, the user only connects with 220V power supply
● power supply box: use GSK-PB power supply, with +5V,+24V,GND power supply
305
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
306
Connection Chapter Two Interface Graph
2 .1 .1 In te rfac e la yo ut 1
F ro n t c o v e r R S 2 3 2 c o m m unication(m ale)
D a ta re c e iving(R X D )
RTS
d a ta s e n d in g(TX D )
CTS
GND
X 5 M P G (fem ale)
+5V
0V
M P G A p u lse(M A )+
M P G B p u lse(M B )+
M P G A p u lse(M A )-
M P G B p u lse(M B )-
X 2 to o l p o s t (m ale)
T o o l p o s t C W signal(TL+)
T o o l p o s t C C W signal(TL-)
T o o l po s t +24V
T o o l p o s t 24V ( G N D )
N o . 1 to o l (T1)
N o . 2 to ol(T2)
N o . 3 to o l (T3)
N o . 4 (T4)
X z ero(P C X )
Z z e ro (P C Z)
T oo l p o s t lo c k in -p osition signal ( T C P )
N o . 5 to o l (T5)
N o . 6 to o l (T6)
N o . 7 to o l (T7)
N o . 8 to o l (T8)
X 3 m o to r(m ale)
X /Z d rive +5V
Z e n ab lin g (Z E N )
X e n a b lin g (X E N )
Z n e g a tiv e term inal
Z p o s itiv e te rm inal(ZD +)
X n e g a tiv e te rm inal(XD -)
X p o s itiv e te rm inal(X D +)
Z p u ls e n e g a tiv e term inal(ZP -)
Z p u ls e p o s itive term inal (ZP+)
X p u ls e n e g a tiv e term inal(X P -)
X p u ls e po s itiv e term inal(X P +)
X /Z d riv e +24V G N D( 0V)
Z d riv e u n it alarm (Z A LM ) X /Z d riv e +24V
X d riv e u n it alarm (X A LM )
307
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
l
a
y
o
u
t
2 . 1 .2 2
X 1 in p u t/ o u tp u t ( f e m a le )
S p i n d l e a n a l o g v oltage+(S V C)
S p i n d l e a n a l o g v o l t a g e ground(A GND)
C o o l i n g ON(M 8)
C h u c k c l am p(M 10)
N o t b e d e f i n e d b y s t andard2(U02)
C oo li ng O F F (M 9)
C h u c k r e l e a se(M 11)
N o t d e f i n e d b y s t a ndard 1(U01)
S p i n d l e b r a k e signal(M S P )
S p i n d l e g e a r o u tput4(S 04)
I / O 2 4 V ( +24V )
S p i n d l e CW (M 3)
S p i n d l e g e a r o u tput3(S 03)
T a i l s t o c k b a ckward(M 79)
S p i n d l e CCW (M 4)
S p i n d l e g e a r o u tput2(S 02)
T a i l s t o c k f orward(M 78)
S p i n d l e stop(M 5) S p i n d l e g e a r o u tput1(S 01)
I / O 2 4 V ( +24V )
I / O 2 4 V (+24V )
I / O 2 4 V ( +24V )
I / O 2 4 V ( +24V )
I / O 2 4 V g r o u n d (24V GND)
I / O 2 4 g r o u n d (24V GND)
H y d r a u l i c t a i l s t o c k p e d a l switch input point (T P S ) I / O 2 4 g r o u n d (24V GND)
F e e d h o l d s ignal(M X Z 1)
C h u c k r e l e a s e i n - p o s i tion check(RM 11)
H y d r a u l i c t a i l s t o c k p e d a l switch input point (S HL) S p i n d l e / f e e d h o ld signal(M X Z 2)
C h u c k c l a m p i n - p o s i tion check(RM 10)
P r e s s u r e l o w check(P RE S )
Y d e c e l e r a t i o n signal(DecY )
I / O 2 4 g r o u n d (24V GND)
T oo l po st l oc k in -p os it io n si gn al ( T CP )
X d e c e l e r a t i o n signal(DecX )
E x t e r n a l p ause(S P ) Z /X /Y p os it iv e li m i t(LT +)
Z d e c e l e r a t i o n signal(DecZ )
Z /X /Y p os it iv e li m it(LT -)
E xt er na l cy cl e st ar t( S T )
E m e r g e n c y stop(E S P )
I / O 2 4 g r o u n d (24V GND)
X 4 s p i n d le (f e m a l e )
S p i n d l e a n a l o g v o ltage (+)(S V C)
S p i n d l e a n a l o g v o l t a g e ground(A GND)
U n u s ed
E n c o d e r 5 V g r o u n d (5V GND)
D r i v e u n i t 5 V g r ound (5V GND)
S peed/positi on state output check(A P I) E n c o d e r 5 V (S E 5V )
Y d r i v e u n it 5V (P 5V )
Y z ero ( P CY ) E n c o d e r C p u lse (P C-)
Y n e g a t i v e d i rection(Y D-)
Y a la rm ( Y A LM )
E n c o d e r C p u lse(P C+)
Y p o s i t i v e d i rection (Y D+)
U n u s ed
E n c o d e r B p ulse (P B -)
Y p u l s e ( -)(Y P -)
U n u s ed
E n c o d e r B p ulse (P B +)
Y p u l s e ( +)(Y P +)
S p e e d / p o s i t i o n s w i tch control(A P O)
E n c o d e r A p ulse (P A -)
2 4 V g r o u n d ( 24V GND)
Y e n a b l i ng(Y E N)
E n c o d e r A p ulse(P A +)
P o w e r s u p p l y 24V (+24V )
308
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
The CNC system can connect with the external PC(RS232 interface) or another CNC system by the
serial to perform the data exchange or transmission; also perform the data exchange or
transmission by USB interface and external U disk. The front cover communication position layout is
as follows:
RS232
USB
【Explanation】
1)Serial communication interface: RS232 communication, pin 9 D male to connect with PC RS232
interface.
2)USB interface: connect with U disk.
USB interface is used to connect the CNC system and U disk. The system not only sends the data
to the U disk, and also receives the data in the U disk by the USB interface. The U disk is directly
inserted into the USB interface on the system panel, and the system automatically identifies and opens
the content of the U disk when the U disk creates the file and file name in the root catalog according to
the file catalog requirements of the system.
【Note】
1)The system USB interface must be covered without being used and without being exposed for
long time, otherwise, which causes the surface metal being oxidated and reduces the interface
sensitivity.
2)Do not keeping the U disk in the system USB interface for long time, otherwise, which causes the
system interface to be aged, and damages the U disk.
3)After the U disk is used, the user must press ESC to close the U disk before pulling out it, at the
moment, the USB icon displayed on the system window disappears and it can be pulled out from
the system USB interface, otherwise, which damages the system hardware and the U disk.
309
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
When the system performs the data with the external PC, the user must use our developed
communication software.
The communication cable length cannot exceed 15m, otherwise, which causes the data be
distortion.
For protecting RS232 interface circuit from being damaged by the static electricity, the coats
of the CNC and PC should be earthed.
3.1.5 Connecting with another CNC system by RS232 communication interface (communication
connections between GSK928TEa)
RXD RXD
2 2
TXD TXD
3 3
GND GND
5 5
CNC1 CNC2
The communication cable length must be less than 15m, otherwise, which will cause the
skipping data distortion.
310
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
The CNC system X1, X2 interface have 23-channel switching input, 18-channel switching output,
which use the photoelectric isolation.
X1:input/output,pin 44 D female
In the table, when the interface is not used to the standard signal, it can be used to the general
input/output interface, at the moment, the interface parameter can be defined to the general
input/output interface.
Example: when the interface pin31 is not used to the standard signal ST (setting it parameter
P412_d7=0), at the moment, the interface pin31 is used to the general UI26(input interface 26), and
can be used to other interfaces; P511 is set to 26, i.e. the defined pin31 is the safety door check
interface; the user can see the position display “SAGT” of the previous UI26 in the system diagnosis
input interface window.
311
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
312
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
1:TL+ 9:TL-
2:+24V 10:0V
3:T1 11:T2
4:T3 12:T4
5:PCX
13:PCZ
6:TCP
14:T5
7:T6
15:T7
8:T8
X2:input/output,pin 15 D male
In the table, when the interface is not used to the standard signal, it can be used to the general
input/output interface, at the moment, the interface parameter can be defined to the general
input/output interface.
Example: when the system uses the line-up tool post (P318 is set to 0), pin 3,4,7,8,11,12,14,15 of
X2 are taken as the general input interface, and also can be used to other input interfaces.
Variable name:
The input variable name is r1001~r10032;the output variable name is r2001~r2018.
Note: the variable name is referred to PROGRAMMING, Chapter 9 Statement Programming.
313
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
3.3K
Input signal
Connect it
when the signal 0V
is valid CNC side
+24V
3.3K
Input signal
The contact of the input signal at the machine side should meet the conditions:
Contact capacity: more than DC28V, 16mA
leakage current among the contacts in open circuit: below 1mA.
Voltage drop among contact in close-circuit: below 1V (current 8.5mA including the voltage drop).
2) The input signal UI26, UI27(SP, ST are standard signals)use the normally-open contact of the
machine contact switch; ESP uses the normally-closed contact of the machine contact switch
with self-lock.
314
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
3.3K
Machine side
0V CNC side
Connection example:
Button switch without lock
ST
SP
ESP
CNC input interface
315
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
ULN2803
Output signal Relay
0V
CNC
side Machine side
● drive LED:
Use LUN2803 output to drive LED with a serial resistor to limit the current (about 10Ma)
through LED.
Machine side
CNC side
+24V
ULN2803 Output
ULN2803
output
316
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
2)X2 interface:
Pin 5 PCX X zero signal
Pin 13 PCZ Z zero signal
317
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
3)X4 interface:
Pin 24 PCY Y zero signal
Travel switch
Dog installed on the machine slider
to +24V GND
to deceleration signal
2) When the bit parameter P407_d7, P407_d6, P407_d5, P407_d4, P407_d3, P407_d2 is set to
0, the machine zero return is positive, the deceleration signal LOW is valid. The following is
the connection example of the deceleration signal and zero signal; the one-turn signal of servo
motor is taken as the zero signal when the system is connected with the servo motor.
318
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
24VGND
Machine side
Deceleration signal
DecX
DecZ
DecY
or
Servo
Zero signal motor
Disk
PCX
PCZ
PCY
319
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Note: AK31, SBWD-80 tool post is referred to the user manuals of Yantai AK31 series tool post, Changzhou
SBWD-80 series tool post .
The tool change mode is set by P318. The tool change mode and the control time sequence are as
follows:
P318=1: tool post type 1, tool change mode 1, is applied to the general 4-tool electromotive turn tool
post, tool change (CW) and the clamped (CCW). (Example, P318=5, 6, 7, 8: the system
executes the tool change in the tool change mode 1).
Execution steps as follows:
1)After the tool change is executed, the system judges whether the target tool number is the current
tool, if it is , the system does not the tool change output control till the tool offset value is modified,
otherwise, the system executes the next step;
2)According to the new tool offset number, the system counts the new tool nose coordinates and
displays it;
3)The system outputs the tool post (CW) signal TL+ checks the tool signal of the target tool, and
close TL+ output after it checks the signal; when P325 (the time upper of tool change shifting) is
in the set time and has not checked the tool signal, it closes the TL+output and alarms: “Check
tool signal overtime”.
4)The system output tool post(CCW) signal TL- after the time set by the delay data parameter
P321(t1);
5)The followings are executed based on whether P408_d6 has the locking signal TCP:
● Delay P324 (tool post (CCW) locking time) setting time when the locking signal
TCP( P408_d6= 0) is not checked; the next step is executed after the time ends.
● The system checks TCP in the time set by P324 when the system checks the locking signal
TCP (P408_d6=1); the system closes TL- output and alarms “Check locking signal
overtime” when it has not received TCP; the system delays the time set by P322(t2) to
execute the next step.
320
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
6)Close the tool post(CCW) signal (TL-), and the tool change ends.
7)Confirm the signal, i.e. check whether the current tool input signal is consistent with the current
tool number; if it is, CNC alarms “Tool number alarms”
P318=2: tool post type 2, tool change mode 2, is applied to the general 4-tool electromotive turn
tool post, tool change (CW) and the clamped (CCW).
The tool definition of tool change mode 2 is the same that of the tool change mode 1, and its tool
change process is the same that of the tool change mode 1, it only reduces the last step, i.e. the
system does not whether the current tool signal is consistent with the target tool in the tool change
mode 2.
Execution steps as follows:
1)Modify the tool offset value;
2)The system outputs the tool post (CW) signal TL+ checks the tool signal of the target tool, and
close TL+ output after it checks the signal; when the system has not checked the tool signal in
the time set by P325 (tool change shifting time upper),, it closes the TL+output and alarms:
“Check tool signal overtime”.
3)The system output tool post(CCW) signal TL- after the time set by the delay data parameter
P321(t1).
4)The followings are executed based on whether P408_d6 has the locking signal TCP:
●Delay P324 (tool post (CCW) locking time) setting time when the locking signal
TCP( P408_d6= 0) is not checked; the next step is executed after the time ends.
●The system checks TCP in the time set by P324 when the system checks the locking signal
TCP (P408_d6=1); the system closes TL- output and alarms “Check locking signal
overtime” when it has not received TCP; the system delays the time set by P322(t2) to
execute the next step.
5)Close the tool post(CCW) signal (TL-), and the tool change ends.
321
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
P318=3: tool post type 3, too change mode 3, is applied to Hengyang CLT-63~CLT300 turning
machine tool tower series in Taiwan, the system nearby executes the tool change CW/CCW.
In tool change mode 3, max. tool quantity (P319) and tool signal covering the circuit (P320) is set by
the corresponding tool post type.
Used signal definition as follows:
Tool post CNC signal Signal explanation
signal
SensorA T1 Input tool signal 1
SensorB T2 Input tool signal 2
SensorC T3 Input tool signal 3
SensorD T4 Input tool signal 4
SensorE TXT (P529) Input tool inductive signal (strobe signal)
SensorF TCP Input tool post locking signal
Sol A1 TZD (P507) Output tool pot releasing control signal(tool post worktable brake)
Sol A2 TFD (P508) Output tool pot locking control signal(tool post worktable graduation)
Sol B TL+ Output positive rotation control signal of tool pot
Sol C TL- Output negative rotation control signal of tool pot
two conditions meet, the current tool is the target, the system does not execute the tool change
output control and modify the tool offset value, otherwise, executes the next step;
2)Modify the tool offset value;
3)Sol A1 is turned on, Sol A2 is turned off, and the tool pot is released;
4) When Sensor F is valid, the tool post is released. The system alarm: “Tool post released
overtime” when the system has not checked SensorF is valid in the time set by P325;
5)Control the tool post to rotate(CW/CCW) to execute nearby the tool change according to the
current tool number and the target tool number to judge the tool change direction;
6)After the SensorE drop edge which has checkes the tool post rotating to the tool signal before the
target tool number appears, the system executes the next step;
7)After the SensorE drop edge which has checks the tool post rotating to the tool signal before the
target tool number appear, SolA1 is turned off, SolA2 is turned on, the tool pot is locked (at the
moment, Sol B still keeps ON, the motor normally rotates); when the system has not checked the
tool signal before the target tool number or the tool signal of the target tool in the tool change
time upper set by P325, the system alarms: “Check tool signal overtime”;
8)The system checks the SensorF is valid, Sol B is turned off, the motor stops rotating, and the tool
change is completed; the system alarms “Tool post locked overtime” when the system has not
checked SensorF is valid in the time set by P324.
【Example】
Example: the turret with 8-tool executes the tool change from No.1 to No.4 tool.
1)Sol A1 is turned on, Sol A2 is turned off, and the tool pot is released;
2)The system wait the Sensor F is invalid, judges the nearby tool change direction, Sol B is turned
on and motor rotates;
3)Check the tool signal( Note: SensorE creates the valid signal when it is in the No. 1, No. 2, No.3
tool, does not perform the locking operation in the 4th tool); when it checks No. 3 tool signal, it sets
SensorE preparatory operation to make that the tool pot is in No. 4 tool, SolA1 is turned off, SolA2
is turned on and the tool pot is locked(at the moment, SolB still keeps ON and the motor normally
rotates) once Sensor E is valid;
4)When the system has checked Sensor F is valid, SolB is turned off, the motor stops rotating and
the tool changed is performed.
P318=4: tool post type 4, tool change mode 4. It is applied to the tool post type which executes the
nearby tool change (CW/CCW).
323
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
P318=9: tool post type 9, too change mode 9. use M60 to execute the tool change.
In tool change mode 9, the system automatically calls M60 to execute the tool change when T
command is executed.
T command execution process as follows:
1)The system firstly modifies the tool number and the tool offset, and counts the target tool nose
coordinates;
324
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
2)Modify macro variable r4005 (target tool number) and r4006(target tool offset number);
3)Call M60 to execute the tool change programs;
4)Wait M60 to be completed;
5)Complete the tool change.
【Program example】
The following is the program to compile the customized command to realize the tool change mode 9
operation; applied to the general electromotive turret tool post.
%254
M98 P1000 ; 4 tools, setting tool signal(T4 T3 T2 T1) separately in
r1004~r1001
M02
N1000 -M60
N1010 r1 = 14 ; 1# tool signal (1110)
N1020 r2 = 13 ; 2# tool signal (1101)
N1030 r3 = 11 ; 3# tool signal (1011)
N1040 r4 = 7 ; 4# tool signal (0111)
N1050 if(r4005 = 1) then r5 = r1 ; target tool number saved to r5
N1060 if(r4005 = 2) then r5 = r2
N1070 if(r4005 = 3) then r5 = r3
N1080 if(r4005 = 4) then r5 = r4 ; look for target tool number
N1090 r2012 = 0 ; tool post (CW) searching for target tool position
N1100 r4010 = 10000 ; set max. time (CW) to be 10m
N1110 r6 = r1000 ; read 32 input signal to r6
N1120 r7 = r6 and 15 ; read tool signal (r1004~r1001) to r7
N1130 if(r7 = r5) then P2000 ; searching for tool number
N1140 if(r4010 = 0)then P3000 ; alarm for CW overtime
N1150 M97 P1110 ; continuously check tool signal
; tool post lock
N2000 r2012 = 1 ; stop tool post rotating after having found tool signal
N2010 r4010 = 500 ; tool post (CCW) being locked after delaying 500ms N2020
if(r4010>0) then P2020 ; delaying wait
N2030 r4010 = 1000 ; set the CCW locking time
N2040 r2011 = 0 ; CCW locking
N2050 if(r4010>0) then P2050 ; wait the CCW locking
N2060 r2011 = 1 ; stop CCW
M99 ; complete the tool change
; tool change failure
N3000 r2012 = 1 ; stop tool post rotation after alarm
N3010 00S check tool selection signal overtime
325
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
In the above, No. 254 program is written to the system FLASH, and the detailed operation is
referred to Program 10.2 Customizing Commands. The detailed operation is referred to
PROGRAMMING Chapter 10.2 Customized Commands; and after the user sets the parameter
related to the tool change mode 9, the system executes the T to realize the required tool change
function in the manual tool change or the machining program.
The tool signal check is controlled by P408_d7. P408_d7=0, the tool signal check is the default mode,
P408_d7=1: the tool signal check is table look-up mode. Note: line-up tool (P318=0) is not influenced
by P408_d7.
In the default mode, P319 must be equal to P320, otherwise, the system prompts “P319 is not equal
to P320” in tool change.
Tool signal definition in the default mode as follows:
The tool signal circuit quantity defined by P320 separately corresponds the tool quantity defined by
P319, each signal line corresponds to one tool number, and the valid level of the tool signal is LOW,
other tool signals are invalid when some tool signal is valid.
Example: P319=4,P320=4: the tool signals are as follows:
326
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
327
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The system can be matched with the drive units of the reaction stepper motor, the compound stepper
motor and AC servo motor by the motor drive unit interface X3.
P405_d4,P405_d3, P405_d2 set the drive unit alarm level is LOW or HIGH. The drive unit must use
the following methods to provide the signals:
328
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
+24V
Alarm signal
3.3k
or
TLP181
0V
0V
CNC side
Drive unit side
When the CNC operates normally, the enabling signal output is valid (the enabling signal is
connected with 0V). When the drive unit alarms and the emergency stop alarms, CNC closes the
enabling signal output(enabling signal is not connected with 0V) and the circuit layout is as follow:
+24V
TLP181
TLP181
0V
26LS31
300Ω
26LS32
329
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
3.5.4 Connection between CNC system and drive unit of compound stepper motor
Z connection layout:
330
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
When other stepper drive unit is connected with the CNC system, the system can uses the
corresponding control switching, and its detailed connection method is referred to the corresponding
drive device user manual.
【Note】
When the stepper motor is used, it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405(d 7~d
0),X-motion parameter(P100~P116), and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation,
Parameter Working Mode.
The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system, otherwise cause that the
motor steps out owing to the external interference.
CNC system, the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing
to avoid the motor stepping out because of the external interference.
331
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
3.5.5 Connecting between CNC and drive unit of reaction stepper motor
X connection layout:
Z connection layout:
332
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
【Note】
When the stepper motor is used, it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405(d 7~d
0),X-motion parameter(P100~P116), and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation,
Parameter Working Mode.
The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system, otherwise cause that the
motor steps out owing to the external interference.
CNC system, the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing
to avoid the motor stepping out because of the external interference.
333
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Connection layout between CNC and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit:
X connection layout:
5 X0 Zero 2
X2
Z connection layout:
Less than 15m shield cable
13 Z0 Zero 2
X2
334
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
Connection layout between CNC and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit
5 X0 10 RSTP
4 DG
X2 tool post socket
17 DG
22 FSTP
Metal shell
13 Z0 10 RSTP
4 DG
X2 tool post socket 17 DG
22 FSTP
Metal shell
【Note】
When the stepper motor is used, it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405(d 7~d
0),X-motion parameter(P100~P116), and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation,
Parameter Working Mode.
The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system, otherwise cause that the
motor steps out owing to the external interference.
CNC system, the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing
to avoid the motor stepping out because of the external interference.
335
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
GSK928TEa MINAS V
L Single-phase
Xpu+ PULS1
3 3
N
11 Xpu- PULSZ 4 Encode feedback signal AC220V
5 Xdir+ SIGN1 5
Xdir- SIGN2 PE
13 6 U
7 Xen SRV-ON 29 V Motor power supply
+24V COM+ W
2 7 P
1 Xalm AIM 37 D
OV CCWL
10 2 R AC servo motor
CWL 1 T
INH
33
COM-
Metal shell 41
FG
25
FG
50
Metal shell
X0 CZ
X2 5 19
Z connection layout:
Less than 15m shield cable
GSK928TEa MINAS V
L Single-phase
Zpu+ PULS1
4 3
N
Zpu- PULS2 Encoder feedback signal
12 4 AC220V
Zdir+ SIGN1
6 5
Zdir- SIGN2 PE
14 6 U
15 Zen SRV-ON 29 V Motor power supply
+24V COM+ W
2 7 P
9 Zalm AlM 37 D
10 OV CCWL
2 R AC servo motor
CWL 1 T
INH
33
COM-
Metal shell 41
FG
25
FG
50
Metal shell
Z0 CZ
X2 13 19
336
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
3.5.8 Connection layout between CNC system and Japanese Yaskawa drive unit
X connection layout:
Less than 15m shield cable
Metal shell
Z connection layout:
Less than 15m shield cable
Metal shell
337
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The CNC system controls the connection between the voltage(SVC) output signal and the spindle
converter by the spindle X4 converter, which realizes the stepless change-speed within limits.
338
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
Analog spindle interface SVC can output 0~10V, and the circuit is as follow:
LM358
input interface
Control voltage
+ 10Ω 9 SVC
_
Converter
18 AGND
CNC side 0V
Machine side
The connection cable between the system and the converter should use the shield cable.
Signal explanation: PA+/PA-,PB+/PB-,PC+/PC- are the separate difference input signal of encoder A,
B, C phase, which are received by 26LS32; PA+/PA-,PB+/PB-,PC+/PC- are quadrature square wave
of the difference 90°, max. signal frequency <1MHz; the CNC uses the encoder lines is set by P209
in the range 100~5000.
A+ PA+
1
0V 0V
8
+5V +5V 7
Z- PC-
6
B- PB- 4
Z+ PC+
5
0V 0V
8
A- PA-
2
B+ PB+
3
The connection cable between the system and the spindle encoder must use the shield cable which
must connect with the socket shell.
The connection between the system and the spindle encoder must use the doublet cord.
When the spindle encoder output signal is not the difference output mode, PA-,PB-,PC- cannot be
connected, at the moment, the anti-interference ability of the encoder output signal reduces. It is
suggested that the system should use the spindle encoder with the difference output mode.
339
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Connection layout between CNC system Y and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit
Less than 15m shield cable
24 Y0 Zero 2
Connection table between CNC system Y and GSK DA98 AC servo drive unit
Note: When the spindle and Y are switched (P410__d4=1), Y is connected with the drive unit; the connection
method between Y and other drive units is referred to that between Z/X and other drive units.
【Note】
When the stepper motor is used, it is regulated according to the bit parameter P405(d 7~d
0),X-motion parameter(P100~P116), and definitions of parameter are referred to Operation,
Parameter Working Mode.
340
Connection Chapter Three CNC Device Connection
The shield cable must be used to connect the step driver and CNC system, otherwise cause that the
motor steps out owing to the external interference.
CNC system, the stepper driver and the stepper motor must be reliably connected with the earthing
to avoid the motor stepping out because of the external interference.
3.6.8 Connection between CNC system Y and DAP03 spindle drive unit
GSK928TEa DAP03
r Single-phase
12 Ypu+ PULS+ 42
S / three-phase
Ypu- PULS- Encoder feedback signal
13 28 AC220V
Ydir+ SIGN+
14 33
Ydir- SIGN- PE
15 34 U
19 Yen SON V
24 W Motor power supply
Yalm AlM
23 7
11 OV ZOUT-
4
COM- R
35 S AC servo motor
+24 COM+ 39
10 T
9 SVC VCMD+ 14
18 AGND VCMD- Spindle
15
Metal shell Metal shell encoder
APO VP 12
20
API VPO 44
25
Y0 ZOUT+
24 40
M3 SFR 9
41
X1 40
M4 SRV
25
Connection table between CNC system and DAP03 spindle drive unit
341
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
The CNC system can be externally connected with MPG by the MPG interface X5. MPG can control
the coordinate axis move. When the MPG connection line is less than 1m, it can use the
single-terminal connection, when it is more than 1.5m, it can use the difference connection to
improve the anti-interference ability. The input pins are not connected when the MPG has no MA-,
MB-.
Standard
Pin Pin function
signal name
1 +5V
1:+5V 6:0V 2 MA+ MPG A pulse+
2:MA+ 7:MB+ 3 MA- MPG A pulse -
3:MA- 8:MB- 4 Empty
5 Empty
6 0V
7 MB+ MPG B pulse +
8 MB- MPG B pulse -
X5 MPG 9 Empty
When MA+,MA- and MB+,MB- are taken as the difference (26LS31) output, it is suggested that the
system uses 26LS32 to receive the signals and the circuit method is as follows:
342
Connection Chapter 4 User and Maintenance
4.2 Earthing
The correct earthing in the electricity device is important and its aims are as follows:
1) Protect the operator from being hurt because of the abnormal conditions;
2) Protect the electric devices from interference by the machine and its near electric devices which
cause the abnormal working of the control device.
3) The machine must be earthed stably, the neutral wiring in the charged barded wire net must not
be the earthing line, otherwise, which causes the injury of persons or the device to be damaged.
The system can normally run in the following AC input power supply:
Voltage wave:AC220V (-15%~+10%)
Frequency wave: 50Hz ± 2%
The machine electric cabinet provides the power supply not only for the machine but also for the
system, and the machine power supply is referred to machine installation explanation introduction.
4.4 Guard
After the CNC system is not used for long time, the user must firstly clean the dust, and dry up it,
and then check the wiring, the earthing of the CNC system device, keeps it power-on in some time to
ensure that the system runs without any failure.
343
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
Appendix
Appendix 1 CNC system electrical component symbol explanations
Semiconductor D Indicator E
diode
Capacitor C LED P
Resistor R Normally-open
contact
Push-button S
switch without lock
Shield layer
Protective earthing
Exchange.
Wiring terminal
344
Connection Appendix
345
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
IO24V VDD5V
O116
ST R116 ID25
346
Connection Appendix
U202
ULN2803 IO24V
1 18
2 17 OD8
3 16 J1
O208 OUT8 ID0 A1 B1 ID1
A1 B1
4 15 OD9 5VGND C1
C1
ID2 A2 B2 ID3
A2 B2
5 14 5VGND C2
O209 C2
OUT9 ID4 A3 B3 ID5
A3 B3
6 13 OD10 5VGND C3
C3
ID6 A4 B4 ID7
R217 A4 B4
OUT11 7 12 TL+ 5VGND C4
O210 C4
OUT10 ID8 A5 B5 ID9
OUT10 R216 10K 8 11 TL- OD11 5VGND C5
A5 B5
C5
10K ID10 A6 B6 ID11
A6 B6
9 10 IO24V 5VGND C6
O211 OUT11 C6
ID12 A7 B7 ID13
A7 B7
R237 R236 OD12 5VGND C7
C7
2K2 2K2 ID14 A8 B8 ID15
A8 B8
5VGND C8
O212 C8
OUT12 OD0 A9 B9 OD1
A9 B9
OD13 5VGND C9
IOGND C9
OD2 A10 B10 OD3
O213 A10 B10
U200 5VGND C10
C10
ULN2803 OUT13 OD4 A11 B11 OD5
OUT4 R200 10K 1 18 M5 OD14 5VGND C11
A11 B11
C11
OD6 A12 B12 OD7
OUT14 R201 10K 2 17 M78 5VGND C12
A12 B12
O214 C12
OUT14 OD8 A13 B13 OD9
OUT5 R202 10K 3 16 M4 OD15 5VGND C13
A13 B13
C13
OD10 A14 B14 OD11
OUT15 R203 10K 4 15 M79 5VGND C14
A14 B14
O215 C14
OUT15 OD12 A15 B15 OD13
OUT6 R204 10K 5 14 M3 OD16 5VGND C15
A15 B15
C15
OD14 A16 B16 OD15
OUT7 R205 10K 6 13 MSP 5VGND C16
A16 B16
O216 C16
OUT16 ID16 A17 B17 ID17
OUT8 R206 10K 7 12 M9 OD17 5VGND C17
A17 B17
C17
ID18 A18 B18 ID19
OUT9 R207 10K 8 11 M8 5VGND C18
A18 B18
O217 C18
OUT17 ID20 A19 B19 ID21
A19 B19
9 10 IO24V OD0 5VGND C19
C19
ID22 A20 B20 ID23
A20 B20
5VGND C20
R223 R227 O200 C20
OUT0 ID24 A21 B21 ID25
2K2 2K2 A21 B21
OD1 5VGND C21
C21
ID26 A22 B22 ID27
A22 B22
5VGND C22
O201 C22
IOGND OUT1 ID28 A23 B23 ID29
A23 B23
U201 OD2 5VGND C23
C23
ULN2803 ID30 A24 B24 ID31
OUT13 R208 10K 1 18 M10 5VGND C24
A24 B24
O202 C24
OUT2 OD16 A25 B25 OD17
OUT17 R209 10K 2 17 UO2 OD3 5VGND C25
A25 B25
C25
OD18 A26 B26 OD19
OUT12 R210 10K 3 16 M11 5VGND C26
A26 B26
O203 C26
OUT3 OD20 A27 B27 OD21
OUT16 R211 10K 4 15 UO1 OD4 5VGND C27
A27 B27
C27
OD22 A28 B28 OD23
OUT3 R212 10K 5 14 S04 5VGND C28
A28 B28
O204 C28
OUT4 OD24 A29 B29 OD25
OUT2 R213 10K 6 13 S03 OD5 5VGND C29
A29 B29
C29
OD26 A30 B30 OD27
OUT1 R214 10K 7 12 S02 5VGND C30
A30 B30
O205 C30
OUT5 OD28 A31 B31 OD29
OUT0 R215 10K 8 11 S01 OD6 5VGND C31
A31 B31
C31
OD30 A32 B32 OD31
A32 B32
9 10 5VGND C32
O206 C32
OUT6
OD7 JE
IO24V
R228 R235
2K2 2K2 O207 OUT7
IOGND 5VGND
347
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
D502
YSON O502 YEN
Y_ALM R518 O506 YALM
1N4148
1N4148
Z_ALM R520 O508 ZALM
P181
O512 D504
XO1 Y02
Z_ORG R521 O509 ZORG
1N4148
1N4148
5VGND YI2 R523 O511 AORG
348
CNC
Connection
X3 X4 X1 X5
X2 RS232/USB
0~
10V FWD
0V REV
PE COM
Appendix 4 External control connection layout
U V W PE
349
GSK928TEa Turning CNC System User Manual
350